\v "~_, 
 
§ohtxi ^nm^ Whmton 
 
 ^ mt t0 
 
 1903 
 
arY893 '^°'"^" ""'"^'^''^ library 
 ^.!;.1t,^!?.Sli,l,°t,.,!tie devices and their pa, 
 
 n,an^ 1924 032 183 489 
 
 olin.anx 
 
The original of this book is in 
 the Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924032183489 
 
1894 1894 
 
 A CATALOGUE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 DEVICES AND THEIR PARTS 
 
 MANUFACTURED BY 
 
 The Union Switch & Signal Co. 
 
 GEORGE WESTINGHOUSE, JR., E. H. GOODMAN, 
 
 President. Vice-Pres't and Gen'l Man'g'r. 
 
 JAS. JOHNSON, 
 Secretarv and Treasurer. 
 
 General Office and Works : 
 
 SWISSVALE, PA. 
 
 Chicago Office : New York Office : Boston Office : 
 
 Home Insurance Building. Havemever Building. Hatliawav Building. 
 
 Copyright, i8q4, by The Ur.ioN Switch <.^ Sign,\l <Jo., S«iss\'ale, Pa. 
 
Preface. 
 
 OINCE the organization of The Union Switch & Signal Co. a large amount of 
 
 work has been performed in the interloclcing and block signaling field. A few 
 statistics illustrating the scope of our business may prove of interest, and will 
 certainly be instructive as showing the widespread and growing demand for safety 
 appliances on railroads. 
 
 The Saxby & Farmer Improved Interlocking Machine is of the type 
 which is most widely in use throughout the world, and almost to the exclusion of 
 other types on this continent. More than 900 distinct plants, containing over 16,000 
 levers, have been built by us, and equipped with this machine. Nearly every rail- 
 road in the North and East maintains at least one of these installations, while most 
 roads have a great many more than one. For instance, on a certain great system, 
 there are in service about 200 machines that contain in excess of 4,100 levers, while 
 on one of the large railroads in the East there are 175 machines, containing 2,200 
 levers. 
 
 The Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking Machine, which is the highest 
 development of the idea yet reached, is in use at 40 different points, comprising 
 1,600 levers. A large proportion of these plants are at the most important terminals 
 in the country, where the performance required of them is of the most exacting 
 kind ; the Union Station at St. Louis ; the Pennsylvania Railroad terminals at 
 Jersey City, Philadelphia and Pittsburg ; the complicated grade crossing at Stewart 
 Avenue and Twenty-second Street, Chicago ; the Philadelphia &: Reading Railroad 
 terminal at Philadelphia ; the Chicago & Northwestern Railway terminal at Chicago, 
 and the Boston & Maine Railroad terminal at Boston are amongst some of the 
 larger places. 
 
 In Electro-Pneumatic Automatic Block Signaling a most encouraging 
 progress is to be noted. About 1,500 signals have been erected, which, placed one 
 third of a mile apart, about the average distance, cover five hundred miles of road. 
 
The Union Electric Banner, Target and Disc Signals are widely dis- 
 tributed, and are in common use, not only as automatic block signals, but as a 
 protection for isolated switches, junctions, tunnels, drawbridges, sharp curves, and 
 for many other purposes. 
 
 The Union Lock and Block Systeini is also being extended, and now com- 
 prises nearly 600 block instruments in actual service. 
 
 Even a careless examination of this book will show that we are prepared to 
 furnish any sort or kind of interlocking, block signaling, switch or frog work that 
 commends itself as safe and reliable, but with devices whose main claim to atten- 
 tion is their cheapness we do not care to deal. All of the special arrangements 
 that we manufacture are fully protected by patents, our rights in which we propose 
 to maintain and protect. 
 
 In our last catalogue, issued in 1889, we endeavored to accomplish two things; 
 first, to describe and illustrate the devices manufactured by us, and, second, to 
 explain the theory and principles by which we are governed. The edition of 1889 
 (8,000 copies) is exhausted, but it has been so widely distributed, and the railroad 
 public is now so well informed as to the best signaling practice, that we shall 
 confine ourselves in the present volume to an illustrated list and description of 
 the articles which we manufacture and erect. The present work, therefore, aims 
 only to show the machines, signals and methods which are considered reliable and 
 best for the object to be accomplished. 
 
 We shall take pleasure in showing our works and in explaining our methods 
 to all those interested in railroad signaling and maintenance who will do us the 
 honor of calling on us. 
 
PART I. 
 
Table of Contents. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 F Tracks and 
 
 THERE IS AN ALPHABETICAL INDEX IN THE BACK OF THE BOOK. 
 
 Preface, ......... 
 
 How TO Order, ........ 
 
 Saxby & Farmer Improned Interlocking J^Iachine, 
 
 Bay City Division Junction, Detroit, View of Tracks and Signals, 
 
 Patents Relating to Mechanical Interlocking, 
 
 Stevens Interlocking Machine, 
 
 Triple Ground Lever, .... 
 
 Double Ground Lever, .... 
 
 Selectors, ....... 
 
 Facing Point, Bridge and Bolt Locks, 
 
 Grand Central Station, New York, View 
 
 Boston & Maine Railroad, Boston, Plans of Tracks, 
 
 Double Point Switch and Lock Movement, JMechanical 
 
 Detector Bars, ........ 
 
 Philadelphia Ter.minal, Pennsylvania Railroad, View of Train Shed, 
 
 Bridge Couplers, 
 
 Scotch Block, .... 
 
 Rocking Shafts and Bell Cranks, 
 
 Deflecting Rods, 
 
 Compensators for Pipe and Wire, 
 
 Philadelphia Terminals of Philadelphia & Reading Railroad and Pennsylvania Rail 
 
 Plans of Tracks, 
 Foundations and Stake, .... 
 
 Lugs ; Double and Wide Jaws, 
 
 Carriers for Pipe and Wire, . 
 
 Bolts and La(; ScRE^\•s. Pipe and Wire 
 
 Union Station, Chicago, View of 'Pracks and Signals, 
 
 Adjusting Screws for Pipe and Wire, 
 
 Jaws, Various, 
 
 Slot, The Mechanical, 
 
 D S 
 
 Chain Wheels, 
 
 Block Si(.;nal Stands, 
 
 Signals, Station Block, 
 
 Signals, Pennsylvania Lines West of Pittsburg, 
 
 Signals, Chicago & Northwestern Railway, 
 
 Signals, Ordinary Main Line, 
 
 Signals, Bracket Post, ..... 
 
 Signals, Main Line, Parts of, ... 
 
 Jersey City Terminal, Pennsylvania Railroad, View of Tracks a 
 
 Signals, Iron Main Line, 
 
 Deering Draw Bridge, Chicago, Plan of Tracks and Signals, 
 
 Se.maphore, Illuminated, . 
 
 Signals, Dwarf, 
 
 Signals, Pot, .... 
 
 Lamps, Lenses and Burners, . 
 
 Cabins for Interlocking Machine? 
 
 Table of Contents, Electric and Electro-Pneumatic Devices (See Part II. 
 
 Switch Stands, Switches and Frogs (See Part III.), 
 
 Signals, 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 3 and i 
 
 i 
 
 8 to 18 
 
 15 and 81 
 
 19 and 39 
 
 20 to 23 
 
 2-4 and 25 
 
 26 and 27 
 
 28 to 38 
 
 40 to 46 
 
 43 
 
 47 
 
 48 to 51 
 
 52 to 54 
 
 55 
 
 56 to 01 
 
 62 and 63 
 
 64 to 68 
 
 68 and 69 
 
 70 to 72 
 
 73 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 76 and 77 
 
 78 to 80 
 
 82 to 84 
 
 85 
 
 86 and 87 
 
 88 and 89 
 
 90 and 91 
 
 92 to 95 
 
 96 and 97 
 
 08 and 99 
 
 100 and 101 
 
 102 and 103 
 
 104 and 105 
 
 106 and 107 
 
 108 to 114 
 
 115 
 
 116 to 118 
 
 119 
 
 120 and 121 
 
 122 to 127 
 
 128 and 129 
 
 130 to 133 
 
 134 to 137 
 
 140 
 
 316 
 
 6 
 
How to Order. 
 
 TN ORDERING material for repairs, if single parts only are needecl they will 
 be found illustrated on the Plate devoted to the arrangement to which they 
 belong, while on the page or pages following a descriptive list is given. If a 
 Saxby & Farmer Latch Handle is wanted, it should be ordered as " No. i'6, Plate 
 3," which is all the description that is necessary, since only one kind of Saxby & 
 Farmer Latch Handle is made. A Saxby & Farmer Lever, however, is made in two 
 sizes, and the order in that case must read " No. ■22, Plate o, for distant signal," 
 or for one of the other purposes named in the description ot the part. 
 
 It would have been impossible to describe all of the combinations of parts, 
 but we are able to promise that anyone wishing to order certain assemblages 
 such as a " Saxby & Farmer Lever Complete," may do so in the confidence that 
 all of the parts naturally belonging to that combination will be sent. 
 
 To order successfully, state the number of the part, the Plate on which it is 
 illustrated, and if it is made in more than one form, give the particular kind that 
 is wanted ; also state whether the shipment is to be made by express or freight. 
 
 In a field so new as signaling is in this country, it follows that a consider- 
 able amount of experimenting will be done, and during the life of The Union 
 Switch & Signal Company many devices have been tested which, on experience, have 
 been considerably altered or abandoned for something better. We do not illustrate 
 or describe any of these original forms, but beg to assure our patrons that the 
 patterns are kept in stock, and that we shall take pleasure in filling orders for any 
 broken or worn-out parts, upon being furnished with an adecpate description, or 
 the part which it is desired to replace. 
 
 Our facilities for shipment are unusually complete, owing partly to our loca- 
 tion, which is eight miles east of Pittsburg, directly on the line of the Pennsylvania 
 Railroad, and in close proximity to the Baltimore cK: Ohio and Pittsburg eS: Lake 
 Erie Railroads. 
 
 We have a private telegraph office in our works, the address of which is 
 SWISSVALE, Pa. 
 
PLATE 1. 
 
The Saxby & Farmer Improved Interlocking Machine. 
 
 PLATES 1 AND 2. 
 
 T^HE history of interlocking in this country, and for that matter throughout the 
 whole world, is indelibly impressed with the characteristics ot this type of 
 machine. As used on this continent, it originally contained all of the checlcs and 
 elements of safety which were required, but the locking was inconvenient in many 
 ways, and before the present form was adopted the limit of combinations had 
 apparently been reached in the large machines which began to be called tor at 
 about that time. The construction of the old locking in two tiers was often em- 
 barrassing and always expensive from a maintenance standpoint, since a slight 
 alteration, when it occurred in the lower tier, required that the machine should be 
 dismantled and thrown out of service. It was even found necessary to remove a 
 part of the walls of the cabin on several occasions in order to get the bars out of 
 the lower tier. 
 
 The discovery was also made that the particular form of box lock which 
 had always been regarded as a necessary element of the machine was extremely 
 limited in its application and, owing to its peculiar construction, practically useless 
 when more than two or three levers were involved. 
 
PLATE 2. 
 
 10 
 
THE SAXBY & PARMER IMPROVED INTERLOCKING MACHINE. (Continued.) 
 
 PLATES 1 AND 3. 
 
 All of these defects led us to seek for some simpler and more rational 
 form of lockino", which has been secured to an eminent detrree, and has been used 
 exclusively in our work for the past three years. 
 
 In the present machine the rocker and link, which transmit the movement 
 of the latch handle to the locking, have been retained, but the ancient " flop " has 
 been replaced by a square shaft, which revolves in turned bearings and drives the 
 long locking bars exactly as was done in the old machine. 
 
 The locking is now disposed in one tier, and any required changes may be 
 made by removing the caps which prevent the locks from lifting and protect the 
 parts from dirt. 
 
 The arrangement of the bars permits the greatest amount of locking in the 
 smallest space and, since the small cross-locks only are driven by impact, the wear 
 on the dogs is reduced to a minimum. In this feature the locking differs from, 
 and is superior to, any other form that we know of 
 
 We do not attempt to give a detailed description of this machine, since our 
 space is limited, and it is familiar to most practical men : to others who are not 
 familiar with it we shall be happy to send the information in another form. 
 
 A detailed list and description of the parts will be found in connection with 
 the two following plates. 
 
 1 1 
 
PLATE 3. 
 
 12 
 
Saxby & Farmer Improved Machine. 
 
 LARGE PARTS. 
 
 PLATE 3. 
 
 THE FRONT OF THE MACHINE IS THAT PART OCCUPIED BY A MAN WHEN OPERATING THE LEVERS. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Leg. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 2. Bottom Rail. — This is made in two sizes, 4-way and S-way ; a 4-way is shown. 
 
 ;i Bottom Rail. — This form is used only when it is desired to add a lever to the out- 
 side of a machine already in service. 
 
 4. Cap for B(jttom Rail. 
 
 5. Lever Shoe. 
 
 6. Top Plate. — This is made in two sizes, 4-way and 8-way ; a 4-way is shown. 
 
 7. End Strip for Top Plate. — This is made in two forms, right-hand and left-hand ; a 
 
 right-hand strip is shown. 
 
 8. T(jp Plate. — This form is used only in connection with No. 3, when it is desired to 
 
 add a lever to the end of a machine already in service. 
 
 9. Bearing for Front, Intermediate and Back Rails. — This is made in many sizes ; 
 
 the particular size is always cast on the part and should be named in ordering 
 duplicates ; an 8-way is shown. 
 
 10. Front Rail. — This part is made both as a 4-way and an 8-way; a 4-way is shown. 
 
 11. Cap for Front Rail. — This is also made as a 4-way and 8-way ; a 4-way is shown. 
 
 ll' Lntermediate Rail. — This part is not used until the number of spaces in the locking 
 bracket exceeds 20. It is made in two sizes, 4-way and 8-way ; a 4-way is shown. 
 
 13. Cap for Intermediate Rail. — Made as 4-way and 8-way ; a 4-way is shown. 
 
 14. Back Rail. — This is made as a 4-way and 8-way ; a 4-way is shown. 
 1.5. Left-Hand End Block. 
 
 \(\. Intermediate End Block. 
 
 17. Right-Hand End Block. 
 
 18, Cap for Locking Bracket. — These are made in lengths to suit the locking brackets. 
 
 ];». Locking Bracket. — This form is made in many sizes, which are distinguished by the 
 number of locking bar spaces contained in each one ; an 8-way is shown. 
 
 13 
 
No 
 
 SAXBY «& FARMER IMPROVED MACHINE, LARGE PARTS. -(Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 3. 
 
 20. Quadrant. 
 
 21. Rocking Link. 
 
 22. Lever. — This is made in two sizes; the first (the one shown) is for the operation of 
 
 switches, locks, movable frogs and home signals when not too far from the tower. 
 The second size is used always for distant signals, and sometimes for home signals. 
 
 23. Latch Shoe. 
 
 24. Latch Rod. 
 
 25. Universal Link. 
 
 26. Latch Handle. 
 
 27. Latch Spring. 
 
 28. Latch Rod Thimble. 
 
 29. Locking Shaft. — The kind shown is an 8-way, and is used when the number of spaces 
 
 in the locking bracket does not exceed 20 ; it is made in different lengths, deter- 
 mined by the number of spaces contained in its locking bracket. Some of the 
 earliest shafts were made of round steel, and if new drivers or other parts are 
 desired for them the shape should be stated. 
 
 30. Locking Shaft With Intermediate Rail. — This style is made in different lengths, 
 
 but is only used when the number of spaces contained in the locking bracket 
 exceeds 20. The remarks appended to No. 29, concerning the determination of 
 lengths and round shafts, apply to this as well. A 24-way is shown. 
 
 31. Crank for Locking Sliaft. 
 
 32. Driver for Lockinc; Bar. — Standard. 
 
 33. Driver for Locking Bar. — This form is used only when a new driver is to be applied 
 
 to a machine already in service. 
 
 34. Filling Block for No. 33. 
 
 35. Tail Lever. — Made in two sizes to correspond with the levers No. 22. 
 
 36. 40-LB. Weight. '| For the tail lever. A 5G-lb. weight is also made and can be furnished 
 
 y if desired. These weights are also used on the counter-balance 
 
 37. 14-LB. Weight. J levers of signal poles. 
 
 PLATE 4. 
 
 View of tracks and signals at Detroit, Mich., operated by a Saxby & Farmer 
 Improved Interlocking Machine. Another view of this place is shown on Plate 35. 
 
 H 
 
PLATE 4. 
 
 15 
 
PLATE 5. 
 
 
 mM 
 
 u% 
 
 @ 
 
 10 
 
 m 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 I 
 
 
 i6 
 
Saxby & Farmer Improved Machine. 
 
 SMALL PARTS. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 4. 
 5. 
 6. 
 
 r. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 11. 
 12. 
 
 13. 
 14. 
 15. 
 16. 
 17. 
 18. 
 19. 
 20. 
 21. 
 22. 
 23. 
 24. 
 25. 
 26. 
 27. 
 28. 
 29. 
 30. 
 31. 
 32. 
 
 33. 
 34. 
 35. 
 
 PLATE 5. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 Bolt, 3,^ 
 
 Bolt, 3_^' 
 
 Washer, 
 
 Bolt, 5 s 
 
 Bolt, 5 x 
 
 Bolt, 3/ 
 
 Bolt, 3/ 
 
 Bolt, 5 § 
 
 Bolt, 5 ^ 
 
 Bolt, y^ 
 
 Bolt, J^ 
 
 Bolt, ^/^ 
 top 
 
 Bolt, V^ 
 
 xl7", for fastening leg to upright timber. 
 
 X 7", for fastening leg to bottom timber. 
 
 i^.", for Nos. 1, •_> and 7. 
 
 X 4", for 14-lb. weight. 
 
 xo'a", for 40 and 56-lb. weights. 
 
 ^'lyi" ' for fastening bottom rail to intermediate leg. 
 
 x2^4", for fastening bottom rail to end leg. 
 
 x2J^", for clamping driver to locking shaft. 
 
 X 2", for fastening lever and tail lever to lever shoe. 
 
 for fastening quadrant, middle and front. 
 
 for fastening crank to locking shaft. 
 
 for fastening bearing of locking to leg, and back end of quadrant to 
 
 x2>^ 
 
 x2 
 
 4 ' 
 
 xl/8 , 
 plate. 
 
 X 1 -4 , 
 
 X 15/8 , 
 
 1 c /" 
 
 X 15/8 , 
 
 for fastening cap to bottom rail. 
 
 Bolt, 5^" x IVs", full head, for fastening top plate and end strip to leg. 
 
 Bolt, ^"xlS/g", ^-head, for fastening top plate and end strip to leg. 
 
 Bolt, 3/3" xl", Hex head and nut, check bolt for end of tail lever. 
 
 Lever Number. 
 
 Die for Rocking Link. 
 
 Cap Screw, ^"x^/^", for fastening cap to locking bracket. 
 
 Set Screw, 34" x l/^J' , for fastening link pin. 
 
 Tap Bolt, z/<g' y^XVjJ' , for fastening locking bracket to back rail. 
 
 Tap Bolt, }4" xiyi", for fastening top plate to leg. 
 
 Cap Screw, yi"y^\%", for fastening lock rails and end blocks to bearings. 
 
 Machine Screw, 3/g"xl-34;", for fastening cap to middle rail. 
 
 Tap Bolt, ^"xl^", for fastening latch shoe to lever. 
 
 Cap Screw, 3,/^" ^'2%" , for fastening locking bracket to front rail. 
 
 Cap Screw, 3,/^" x 4.}'^", for fastening locking bracket through end block to bearing. 
 
 Dowel Pin, i/ii'x'iyi", through bearing and leg. 
 
 Dowel Pin, 3.'8"x2", through top plate and leg; through lever shoe and lever. 
 
 Dowel Pin, :^/8"x13^", through latch shoe and lever. 
 
 Dowel Pin, j4-"^'^/i"' through i^-" dog to locking bar. 
 
 Dowel Pin, i^"x1", through locking rails to bearing; through 33" and ^2" dogs to 
 locking bars. 
 
 Lever Shoe Pin, 1"x4^'8"- 
 
 Rocking Link Pin, 1"x3". 
 
 Swivel Pin, flat, l"x25-'8". 
 
 17 
 
No. 
 
 36. 
 37. 
 
 38. 
 
 39. 
 
 40. 
 
 41. 
 
 42. 
 
 43. 
 
 44. 
 
 45. 
 
 46. 
 
 47. 
 
 48. 
 
 49. 
 
 50. 
 
 51. 
 
 52. 
 
 53. 
 
 54. 
 
 55. 
 
 56. 
 
 57. 
 
 58. 
 
 59. 
 
 60. 
 
 61. 
 
 62. 
 
 63. 
 
 64. 
 
 65. 
 
 66. 
 
 67. 
 
 68. 
 
 69. 
 
 70. 
 
 71. 
 
 72. 
 
 SAXBY & FARMER IMPROVED MACHINE, SMALL PARTS. -(Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 5. 
 
 Turned Pin, J^" x 2", for fastening swivel pin to universal link. 
 
 Split Cotter, for No. 36. 
 
 Turned Pin, >^"x1H", for fastening latch handle and number plate to lever, and 
 universal link to lockingf crank. 
 
 Split Cotter, for No. 38. 
 
 Piece of Locking Bar, }^"x^" in section (any length). 
 
 Piece of ^"x^" Steel, used for cross locks (any length). 
 
 Right Hand Tappet, y%' . 
 
 Left Hand Tappet, 2,/%' . 
 
 Right Hand Tappet, y^" . 
 
 Left Hand Tappet, y^" . 
 
 Right Hand Tappet, ^". 
 
 Left Hand Tappet, ^". 
 
 Filling Piece for Locking Bar. 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 - Filling Pieces for Cross Locks. 
 
 Right-Hand Trunnion. 
 
 Left-Hand Trunnion. 
 
 Rivet, ylj' y^\\^\ for y^" locking dogs, Nos. 62, 65, 67, 68, 69. 71, 72, 73 and 74. 
 
 Rivet, ^^''xlii", for )/," locking dogs, Nos. 61, 64, 66, 70. 
 
 Rivet, 54"xl3^-", for y^' locking dogs, Nos. 60, 63. 
 
 Rivet, %"x1tV", for trunnions. 
 
 Rivet, i4"xlfV", for driving piece and block. 
 
 Driving Piece and Block. 
 
 Locking Dog, y%' x yi" . 
 
 Locking Dog, ^"x^^". 
 
 Locking Dog, ^^^''x^^". 
 
 Locking Dog, 3/8"xI/^". 
 
 Locking Dog, ^"x^^". 
 
 Locking Dog, y^'^Yz". 
 
 Locking Dog, ^"xl". 
 
 Locking Dog, ->:+"x1". 
 
 Locking Dog, 34"x1". 
 
 Locking Dog, 3/^"'x1". 
 
 Locking Dog, 5^"x1". 
 
 Locking Dog, y"xl". 
 
 Locking Dog, y'xl". 
 
 Lockinc; Dog, y'xl", ofTset. 
 
 74. Locking Dog, 3.4;" xl", offset. 
 
Patents Relating to Mechanical Interlocking. 
 
 NAME. 
 
 DATE. 
 
 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 W. BUCHANAN, . 
 
 October 
 
 23, 1877, .... 10C,42.S 
 
 W. BUCHANAN, 
 
 December 
 
 2.5, 1877, 
 
 
 
 198,449 
 
 C. H. JACKSON, 
 
 April 
 
 1, 1879, 
 
 
 
 213,754 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 June 
 
 17, 1879, 
 
 
 
 210,510 
 
 C. H. JACKSON, 
 
 July 
 
 15, 1879, 
 
 
 
 217,530 
 
 C. H. JACKSON, 
 
 August 
 
 5, 187'.t, 
 
 
 
 218,123 
 
 A. G. cu:mmings, 
 
 August 
 
 12, 1879, 
 
 
 
 218,490 
 
 H. W. SPANG, 
 
 November 
 
 11, 1879, 
 
 
 
 221,025 
 
 C. H. JACKSON, 
 
 January 
 
 13, 1880, 
 
 
 
 223,510 
 
 C. H. JACKSON, 
 
 January 
 
 20, 1880, 
 
 
 
 223,650 
 
 C. H. JACKSON AND F. S. GUER 
 
 BER, . . . February 
 
 17, 1880, 
 
 
 
 224,540 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 April 
 
 13, 1880, 
 
 
 
 226,499 
 
 J. SAXBY, .... 
 
 July 
 
 20, 1880, 
 
 
 
 230,200 
 
 C. H. JACKSON, 
 
 July 
 
 27, 1880, 
 
 
 
 230,418 
 
 A. S. A^OGT, ... 
 
 August 
 
 24, 1880, 
 
 
 
 231,511 
 
 F. W. AND W. W. BRIERLEY, 
 
 August 
 
 31, 1880, 
 
 
 
 231,648 
 
 H. F. COX, .... 
 
 September 
 
 14, 1880, 
 
 
 
 232,176 
 
 H. F. COX AND R. H. SOULE, 
 
 March 
 
 15, 1881, 
 
 
 
 238,861 
 
 J. WOOD (Re-issue), 
 
 March 
 
 22, 1881, 
 
 
 
 9,614 
 
 F. S. GUERBER, . 
 
 May 
 
 3, 1881, 
 
 
 
 240,904 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 August 
 
 16, 1881, 
 
 
 
 245,794 
 
 I. FISHER, .... 
 
 August 
 
 30, 1881, 
 
 
 
 246,485 
 
 H. F. COX, .... 
 
 September 
 
 6, 1881, 
 
 
 
 246,602 
 
 C. H. JACKSON, . 
 
 November 
 
 29, 1881, 
 
 
 
 250,075 
 
 M. N. FORNEY, 
 
 December 
 
 (i, 1881, 
 
 
 
 250,517 
 
 H. F, COX, .... 
 
 April 
 
 4, 1882, 
 
 
 
 255,774 
 
 H. JOHNSON, 
 
 June 
 
 20, 1882, 
 
 
 
 259,865 
 
 H. F. COX, .... 
 
 August 
 
 22, 1882, 
 
 
 
 262,931 
 
 H. F. COX, .... 
 
 October 
 
 24, 1882, 
 
 
 
 266,350 
 
 M. N. FORNEY, 
 
 October 
 
 31, 1882, 
 
 
 
 266,802 
 
 M. N. FORNEY (Re-issue), . 
 
 November 
 
 14, 1882, 
 
 
 10,237 
 
 H. F. COX (Re-issue), . 
 
 January 
 
 2, 1883, 
 
 
 10,265 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 January 
 
 2, 1883, 
 
 
 
 270,024 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 February 
 
 C, 1883, 
 
 
 
 271,608 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 February 
 
 (i, 1883, 
 
 
 
 271,808 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 February 
 
 13, 1883, 
 
 
 
 272,122 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 May 
 
 1, 1883, 
 
 
 
 276,564 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 
 May 
 
 8, 1883, 
 
 
 
 277,118 
 
 G. W, BLODGETT and G. R. HA 
 
 RDV, , . . September 
 
 11, 1883, 
 
 
 
 284,716 
 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 
 December 
 
 23, 1884, 
 
 
 
 309,618 
 
 C. R. JOHNSON, . . . . 
 
 January 
 
 (J, 1885, 
 
 
 
 310,519 
 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 
 July 
 
 14, 1885, 
 
 
 
 322,283 
 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 
 N(;)\'ember 
 
 [Conliitued on Pa^e j'Q.) 
 
 3, 1885, 
 
 
 
 329,643 
 
PLATE 6. 
 
 20 
 
Stevens Machine. 
 
 PLATE (>. 
 
 nPHIS machine, although it is made of the best quahty of material, has no pre- 
 liminary locking arrangement, and is best adapted for throwing side track 
 switches or switches in ladder tracks where it would be inconvenient and expensive 
 to have a man running from one switch stand to another, or to have a number of 
 men stationed at the different switches. By assembling all of the switch stands at 
 one central point in the form of a machine, one man can easily do the work of 
 half a dozen under the old plan, and do it better. 
 
 If locking is desired, it can be supplied of the ordinary Stevens type, but 
 we do not advise the use of this machine for anything but yard work. 
 
 As it can, like all other machines that we build, be placed in either a high 
 tower or at the ground level, it is best to specify its location in ordering. 
 A list of its parts will be found on the next page. 
 
 21 
 
PLATE 7. 
 
 IG 
 
 22 
 
 o 
 
 24 
 
 ?5 
 
 29 
 
 30 i 
 
 22 
 
Stevens Machine. 
 
 PLATE 7. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER, 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Leg. 
 
 2. TuRXED Pin, l}4" diam., on which lever moves. 
 
 3. Lever (used only in high tower). 
 
 4. Lever (used only in low tower). 
 .5. Latch Shoe. 
 
 6. Latch Rod. 
 
 7. Latch String. 
 
 8. Latch Thimble. 
 
 9. Latch Handle. 
 
 10. Quadrant. 
 
 IL Bearing. (This is made in two sizes; the smaller one is shown.) Specify the number 
 of bars when ordering. 
 
 12. Locking Plate. Specify the number of bars and the number of levers when ordering. 
 
 13. Tappet Link. 
 
 14. Tappet. Specify the size of the machine and the number of locking bars when ordering. 
 
 15. Steel Plate, l"xy\". Used as a cap for the locking and for locking bars. (When 
 
 wanted as a cap, specify number of levers in machine.) 
 
 16. Tap Bolt, 3/g" diam., for fastening the cap to the locking plate. 
 
 17. Tap Bolt, ^" diam., for fastening locking plate to bearing. 
 
 18. Tap Bolt, }4" diam., for fastening quadrant to leg. 
 
 19. Tap Bolt, j4" diam., for fastening latch shoe to lever. 
 
 20. Bolt, j4" diam., for fastening legs together in machines containing more than two levers. 
 
 21. Bolt, }4" diam., for fastening quadrant to leg. 
 
 22. Bolt, }{" diam., for bolting bearing to leg. 
 
 23. Wa,sher, 1^" inside diam., for No. 2. 
 
 24. Cotter, 2^" for lever pin. 
 
 25. Lever Number. 
 
 26. Locking Dog. Made in different shapes. 
 
 27. Turned Pin, j4" ^ ~/^", for fastening tappet link to tappet. 
 
 28. Turned Pin, i^"x2", for fastening tappet link to lever. 
 
 29. Turned Pin, 3^"xlf{", for fastening latch rod, latch handle and lever number. 
 
 30. Rivet, }^" x1}(", for fastening locking dog to locking bar. 
 
 31. Cotter, ^"x^", for turned pins numbers 27, 28 and 29. 
 
 23 
 
PLATE 8. 
 
 ^ 
 
 LtiiLiJ iiliUUlik m , 
 
 I 
 
 16 
 
Triple Ground Lever. 
 
 PLATE 8. 
 
 nPHE Triple Ground Lever is reall)^ an interlocking machine, since the Stevens 
 locking is attached to it. It is of great value where one or two switches and 
 one or two signals must be operated, and where it is not desired to maintain a 
 signal man. Its use is recommended at such places as the end of double track and 
 out-lying cross-overs. Since the end of double track is frequently moved, the inter- 
 locking device, through the simplicity of its construction, can be moved with it at 
 small expense. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Ba.se. 
 
 2. Top. 
 
 3. Shaft, 1^4" diam. 
 
 4. Set Screw, 3/s"x2y^", for shaft. 
 
 5. Locking Bar, 3/g"xlj/l". 
 
 6- ) 
 
 r Two forms of Locking Dog. 
 
 8. Rivet, }^"x1", for locking dog. 
 
 9. Pin, }4"xo", for fastening lever. 
 
 10. Chain, ) 
 
 r for attachinof pin No. 9. 
 
 11. Rivet, ) *' ^ 
 
 12. Bolt, S/s" xl^", for fastening top. 
 
 13. Lever. 
 
 14. Rack. 
 
 15. Pinion. 
 
 16. Bolt, %"x1}^", for pinion. 
 
 25 
 
PLATE 9. 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 IS 
 
 19 21 
 
 20 22 
 
 
 A26 
 
 
 •^o 
 
 26 
 
Double Ground Lever. 
 
 PLATE 9. 
 
 T^HIS device was designed for throwing a switcli or cross-over and distant signals 
 at outlying points on the main line of a railroad, and is of particular value 
 
 on curves or at other places where the switch lights cannot for any reason be seen. 
 It is positively interlocked in such a manner that the signals cannot be cleared 
 
 until the switch is right for the main track, and, conversely, so that the switch cannot 
 
 be moved from the main track route until the signals have been thrown to danger. 
 The Double Ground Lever was the forerunner of the Triple Ground Lever, 
 
 which is illustrated on Plate 8. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Lock Bar, in ordering give length required. 
 
 2. Base. 
 
 3. Chain Wheel. 
 
 4. Locking Pin. 
 
 .5. Collar and Dowel Pin, for bearing of No. 6. 
 
 6. Spring, for No. 4. 
 
 7. Bolt and Nut, }4" ^^y^", for fastening No. 2.5 to No. 3. 
 
 8. Bolt and Nut, cheese head, for filling lock holes in Nos. 3, 19 and 2(t ; this is made 
 
 in two sizes, 3/s"x2^", for No. 3; and i/s"^l/4", for Nos. 19 and 20. 
 
 9. Washer, Xg", for Nos. 8 and 10. 
 
 lu. Bolt and Nut, countersunk head, for filling lock holes in Nos. 3, 19 and 20 ; this is 
 made in two sizes, 3i"x2}4", for No. 3; and 34"x]}4", for Nos. 19 and 20. 
 
 n. Hex Nut. 1 
 
 I 
 
 12. Washer 34!". )- For left-hand ends of Nos. 15, 16, 17 and 18. 
 
 13. Split Cotter, 7/3" x 1 i<|". J 
 
 14. Split Cotter, -:fV"x2", for right-hand end of No. 18. 
 
 15. Stud, for switch rod connection on No. 27 ; this also helps to join Nos. 19 and 27. 
 
 16. Stud, used only when a pipe connection is desired with No. 3. 
 
 17. Stud, for joining Nos. 2, 19 (or 20), and No. 27. 
 
 18. Stud, for joining Nos. 2, 3 and 25. 
 
 19. Switch Lever Casitnc;, this is fastened to No. 2, and is used in connection with No. 27. 
 
 20. Switch Lever Casting, this is fastened to No. 2, and is used in connection with a 
 
 separate ground lever, in which case No. 27 is not provided. 
 
 21. Clip, used with No. 20, when the separate ground lever is of flat iron. 
 Clip, used with No. 20, when the separate ground lever is of round iron. 
 Rivet, for fastening No. 21 or No. 22 to No. 20. 
 
 24. Cross Ar.m, for No. 25. 
 
 25. Signal Lever. 
 
 26. Staple. 
 
 27. Switch Lever. 
 
 22 
 
 27 
 
PLATE 10. 
 
 28 
 
standard Selector. 
 
 PLATE lO. 
 
 T^HIS is the Union Switch & Signal Company's Standard Selector, and is the 
 
 result of ten years' practical experience in the manufacture of interlocking 
 material. The three pipes shown in the foreground are the ones which operate 
 the three switches that control the action of the selector. The motion is transferred 
 from the switch pipes through the trunnions, the motion plates, etc., to the selector 
 itself, the rods in the selector being thrown out of engagement by dogs which are 
 attached to the driving bar; three of these dogs are plainly shown against the 
 nearest hook bar. 
 
 The selector itself is shown without the cover, which in practice is placed 
 upon it, and prevents the escape of the hook bar from the slide plate when the 
 latter is reversed. 
 
 The selector may be made in any size, although it is not usual to make 
 them larger than an .s-way. 
 
 It is well to note that a selector is known always by the number of switches 
 which are connected with it, and not by the number of hook bars. The selector 
 shown on the opposite page is known as a 8-way selector. 
 
 A detailed list of the parts will be found upon the next page. 
 
PLATE 11. 
 
 20 21 22 
 
 23 
 
 T T I I 
 
 24 25 26 
 
 %J 
 
 ■28 28 30 31 
 
 !« 
 
 32 
 
 li 
 
 30 
 
A 
 
 Standard Selector. 
 
 PLATE 11. 
 
 SELECTOR is known by the number of switches which are connected with 
 it. Not by the number of hook bars. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Cover. — Made in different sizes, 3-way is shown. 
 
 2. Selector Base — Made in different sizes, 3-way is shown. 
 
 3. Slide Plate. — Made in different sizes, 3-way is shown. 
 
 4. Guide. — Made to suit selector base. 
 
 5. Hook Bar. 
 
 6. Outside Strip for Base. — Made in different sizes, 3-way is shown. 
 
 7. Motion Bar. — Made to suit the width of base. 
 
 8. Selector Dog. 
 
 9. Motion Plate Base. — Made in sizes 1, 2, 3 and -i-ways ; a 3-way is shown. 
 
 10. Motion Plate. 
 
 11. Malleable Iron Screw Jaw. 
 
 12. Hook Bolt. — In ordering for repairs, state the length required. 
 
 13. Driving Bar for Motion Plate. 
 
 14. Hook Bar Stand. — Made in different sizes. 
 
 15. Cap for Hook Bar Stand. — Made to suit No. 14. 
 
 16. Trunnion, Straight. 
 
 17. Trunnion, y^' offset. 
 
 18. Trunnion, l" offset. 
 
 19. Trunnion, Xyi" offset. 
 
 20. Tap B(jlt, 3,8"x5 8", for selector dog. 
 
 21. Tap Bolt, 3,/8"x3,/^", for outside strip. 
 
 22. Bolt and Nut, %" y^\y%" , for cover. 
 
 23. Tap Bolt, i/i^' y^yi", for hook bar stand. 
 
 24. Bolt and Nut, \%' y\y" , for trunnions. 
 
 25. Steel Roller, 1"x5/-^", for motion bar. 
 
 26. Roller Pin and Nut, S/%' diam., for steel roller. 
 
 27. Shackle Hook. 
 
 28. Pin, 5/8"x178", for shackle hook. 
 
 29. Pin, 5/8"xl.y4", for screw jaw. 
 
 30. Split Cotter, tV'xl^/", for trunnion. 
 
 31. Split Cotter, y'8"x'iy', for s/s" pins. 
 
 32. Split Cotter, sV^Js", for steel roller pin. 
 
 31 
 
PLATE 13. 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 T 
 
 4 
 
 32 
 
Pipe Selector, 
 
 PLATE 12. 
 
 T^HIS selector is the one usually employed when home signals are operated by 
 pipe. It is, as the illustration shows, an extremely simple at^air and is in 
 addition very reliable. It is usually placed immediately opposite the switch that is 
 concerned in the combination, and since the switch bar of the selector is then 
 connected directly with the lock rod of the switch, when either of its bars are 
 reversed, the selector locks its other bar and the switch positively. One of these 
 bars is shown in its reversed position. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 2. Cap. 
 
 .3. Tap Bolt, ^^"xj/g", for fastening- cap No. 2. 
 
 4. Signal Bar. 
 
 5. Switch Bar. 
 
 6. Driving Bar. 
 
 33 
 
PLATE 13. 
 
 41 
 
 m 
 
 ^m 3 
 
 34 
 
Hook Gear. 
 
 PLATE 13. 
 
 T^HE hook gear is really a one-way pipe selector, and has one feature of par- 
 ticular importance, which is the locking arrangement for the switch. The 
 shifting bar of the hook gear is a continuation of the lock rod of the switch, 
 and by referring to the cut on the opposite page it will be seen that the hook 
 bars, as shown by the one on the left-hand, have their ends formed of round iron, 
 which when one of them is reversed projects through the shifting bar and accom- 
 plishes the same purpose as a facing point lock. The advantage of this arrange- 
 ment will be readily seen, since it secures an independent locking of the switch. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 2. Corner Plate. (This is made in two sizes ; specify which is needed.) 
 
 3. Tap Bolt, i^".\1", for corner plate. 
 
 4. Engaging Bar. 
 
 5. Shifting Bar. 
 
 6. Rigiit-Hani) Hook Bar. 
 
 7. Left-Hand Hook Bar. 
 
PLATE 14. 
 
 36 
 
The Cabin Selector. 
 
 PLATE 14. 
 
 T^HIS selector is a recent invention, and, although until now it has not been 
 placed upon the market, it has received conclusive tests which prove that it 
 is designed according to correct principles. For two years several of them have been 
 in use upon one of the most important railroads in the country, where we have 
 closely watched its operation. We have now secured the sole right to manufacture 
 this desirable addition to interlocking devices, which is the invention of Mr. C. A. 
 Christofferson, foreman of interlocking on the C, C, C. & St. L. R'y. 
 
 It is intended to be placed in the cabin directly under the signal lever, which 
 is connected with the slide plates (Nos. 3 and 6) by the screw jaw (No. 7). The 
 hooks (Nos. -2 and 5) are contained in their respective frames (Nos. 1 and 4); the 
 shaft (No. 21) runs parallel with the long axis of the interlocking machine, and 
 has mounted upon it, first, the arms (Nos. 1) and 12) wdiich form the connections 
 with the switch levers that govern the action of the selector, and, second, the cams 
 (Nos. 15, 1(3, 17, IS, 19 and 20), which when revolved by the motion of the shaft 
 disengage the several hooks from or permits their engagement with the slide plate. 
 The use of this selector greatly simplifies the arrangement of the lead out 
 in complicated plants, and does away with the necessity, so frequently found now, 
 of inserting bell cranks or rocking shafts amongst the wire lines at the ends of 
 a machine. 
 
 A. 1-Wav Selector. — This selector is fitted up to show the manner of connecting 
 
 more than one switch with a single shaft ; it is done by running- a piece of chain 
 from each of the weighted arms to the corresponding switch lever. The weighted 
 arms are here shown raised up in the position they would occupy were one of 
 the switch levers, with which they are connected, reversed. 
 
 B. 3-Way Selector. — Here only one shaft is shown, in order that the side of the selector 
 
 may be more clearly seen. This form is also used as a 2-way selector, by aban- 
 doning one of the shafts. 
 
 C. Vertical Wheel. — This is shown in the position that it occupies under the selector 
 
 when placed in the cabin ; it is also made with two wheels for the 1-way selector. 
 
 A list of the separate parts will be found upon the next page. 
 
 37 
 
No. 
 
 ]. 
 
 2. 
 
 •> 
 t>. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 (i. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 11. 
 12. 
 13. 
 
 14. 
 
 15. 
 16. 
 17. 
 
 18. 
 19. 
 20. 
 21. 
 
 22. 
 23. 
 24. 
 25. 
 26. 
 27. 
 28. 
 29. 
 30. 
 31. 
 32. 
 
 33. 
 34. 
 35. 
 36. 
 37. 
 38. 
 39. 
 40. 
 
 THE CABIN SELECTOR.-(Continued.) 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 PLATE 14. 
 
 r For Fig. A. 
 
 For Fig. B. 
 
 r With iournals. 
 
 J 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 r Without iournals. 
 
 Frame, 
 
 Hex IK. 
 
 Slide Plate. 
 
 Frame. 
 
 Hook. 
 
 Slide Plate. J 
 
 Standard Screw Jaw, for joining Nos. 3 and 6 to the interlocking lever. 
 
 Turned Pin, 7-^" x 23/^" for No. 7. 
 
 Short Arm, for rigid connection with switch lever. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 5/8"x3>^" for No. 11. 
 
 Weight, for No. 12. This is usually furnished 14 lbs., but may be heavier if desired. 
 
 Long ArxM, for chain connection with .switch lever. 
 
 Pipe Lug, for switch lever connection, S/^" hole in the lug. This is sometimes made 
 
 with two lugs. 
 Connecting Link, for joining Nos. 9 and 13. This is made in different lengths to suit 
 the connection ; the two pieces are joined by 3^" pipe, to which they are welded. 
 Single Cam. 1 
 
 Double Cam. 
 Right Angle Cam. 
 Single Cam. 
 Double Cam. 
 Right Angle Cam. j 
 Square Steel Shaft. 
 Journal, for No. 21. 
 
 Collar, j _ „., 
 
 , For Nos. 15, 16 and 17. 
 Bearing. ) 
 
 3-Way Bracket. 
 
 1-Way Bracket. 
 
 Cap, for Nos. 25 and 26. 
 
 Vertical Wheel Stand, for 3-way selector. See description of Fig. C. 
 
 Rod, for Nos. 28 and 30. 
 
 Wheel, for No. 28. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 34"x33^", for fastening No. 24 to No. 4. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 2/^" y^iyi" , for fastening No. 24 to No. 1, and for fastening No. 27 
 
 to Nos. 25 and 26. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, i^"x^", for end of No. 12. 
 
 Tap Bolt, 3/3" xli/", for fastening No. 27 to No. 25 at inside holes on the ends 
 
 Set Screw, >^"x1", for Nos. 9, 12, is, 19 and 20. 
 
 Set Screw, %"y.iy^", for Nos. 15, 16, 17 and 23. 
 
 Turned Pin, 5/i," ^l^^" , for jaws on No. 14. 
 
 Split Cotter, -h"y.l)i", for Nos. 29 and 37. 
 
 Split Cotter, ^" xl%" for No. 8. 
 
 Rivet, l", for Nos. 2 and 5. 
 
 3.3 
 
PATENTS RELATING TO MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING.— (Continued from Page 19.) 
 
 NAME. 
 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 
 F. S. GUERBER, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 H. F. COX, 
 H. F. COX, 
 A. G. CUiMiMINGS, 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 
 V. SPICER AND J. SCHREUDER, 
 C. H. JACKSON, .... 
 J. T. HAMBAY, .... 
 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 A. G. CUMMINGS, 
 J, SCHREUDER and V. SPICER, 
 V. SPICER AND J. SCHREUDER, 
 J. G. SCHREUDER, 
 
 G. D. FOWLE, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. G. SCHREUDER, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. W. HANCOCK, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 G. KOENIG AND S. H. STUPAKOFF, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, .... 
 
 W. M. GRAFTON, .... 
 
 G. KOENIG AND S. H. STUPAKOFF, 
 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 
 S. LLOYD WIEGAND^ 
 
 J. J. TURNER, 
 
 J. J. TURNER, 
 
 J. J. TURNER, 
 
 S. H. STUPAKOFF, 
 
 S. H. STUPAKOFF, 
 
 I. G. SCHREUDER, 
 
 DATE. 
 
 Ndvember 17, 
 
 NOVEMBEK 
 
 L\-NI:ARV 
 
 l<'Ei;RUARV 
 
 Feuruarv 
 
 April 
 
 April 
 
 June 
 
 July 
 
 .August 
 
 Al'RIL 
 
 .April 
 
 September 27, 
 
 November 1, 
 
 November 1, 
 
 August 7, 
 
 September 18, 
 
 17, 
 5, 
 ■>!3, 
 23, 
 20, 
 20, 
 1, 
 37, 
 17, 
 19, 
 19, 
 
 November 
 
 March 
 
 March 
 
 June 
 
 July 
 
 July 
 
 July 
 
 July 
 
 August 
 
 October 
 
 November 12, 
 
 Nove.mber 12, 
 
 December 
 
 December 
 
 December 
 
 .\pril 
 
 June 
 
 July 
 
 September 1G, 
 
 October 21, 
 
 .August 
 
 C)ctober 
 
 March 
 
 July 
 
 [uly 
 
 N()\-EMBER 
 AfAY 
 
 I'rbruary 
 
 27, 
 19, 
 19, 
 18, 
 
 2, 
 2, 
 3, 
 9, 
 
 6, 
 1, 
 
 3, 
 10, 
 10, 
 1, 
 3, 
 8, 
 
 4, 
 27, 
 
 1, 
 19, 
 19, 
 15, 
 16, 
 
 iy85, 
 188.5, 
 1880, 
 1880, 
 1886, 
 1880, 
 1880, 
 1886, 
 1880, 
 1880, 
 1887, 
 1887, 
 1887, 
 1887, 
 1887, 
 1888, 
 1888, 
 1888, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 1889, 
 18.S9, 
 1890, 
 1890, 
 1890, 
 1890, 
 1890, 
 1891, 
 1S!)1, 
 1892, 
 1892, 
 1892, 
 1893, 
 1893, 
 1804, 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 330,395 
 330,832 
 333,852 
 330,701 
 330,702 
 340,489 
 340,490 
 342,907 
 .346,387 
 347,608 
 361,510 
 361,017 
 370,453 
 372,509 
 372,578 
 387,452 
 389,558 
 393,557 
 399,888 
 399,889 
 405,682 
 406,211 
 406,212 
 406,213 
 406,836 
 408,616 
 412,178 
 414,862 
 415,168 
 416,162 
 416,783 
 417,177 
 424,485 
 429,193 
 431,888 
 436,360 
 439,063 
 456,952 
 461,970 
 470,148 
 479,230 
 479,380 
 480,303 
 497,733 
 515,722 
 
 and others 
 39 
 
PLATE 15. 
 
 40 
 
Facing Point, Bridge and Bolt Locks. 
 
 O 
 
 PLATE 15. 
 
 N THIS page are shown several forms of plunger locks and bolt locks : 
 
 A. Standard Outside Pacini; Point Luck. — It is used in connection with lock bars H and 
 
 I, near the bottom of the page. When the casting is placed on the tie as shown 
 in the illustration, the curved bar is used. When the casting A is turned upside 
 down, the opening lies below the rail, and the straight bar is used. 
 
 B. Single Inside Facing Point Lock. — This is used in connection with J, shown at the 
 
 bottom of the page. 
 
 C. Double Inside Facing Point Lock. — This has a wider opening than B, but is other- 
 
 wise just like it ; with C it is possible to lock the rods connected with two pairs 
 of points, such as in the case of a double ; slip or a movable frog ; it is usually 
 placed in the middle of the track. 
 
 D. Pipe Bolt-Lock. — It is used in connection with a double point switch and lock move- 
 
 ment, when the home signal governing the movement of trains is operated by a 
 line of pipe. D is also made as a 2-wa)'. 
 
 E. Wire Bolt-Lock. — This is constructed on the same principle as D, but is intended for 
 
 use only when the home signal is operated by wire. It is somewhat lighter in all 
 its parts than D, and the signal connection has a greater stroke. It is made as 
 a 1, 2 or 3-way ; a 1-way is shown. 
 
 F. Gravity Bridge Lock. — F not only locks the draw when it is closed, but locks itself 
 
 as soon as the draw has moved. The casting on which the letter F is shown is 
 usually placed upon the drawbridge, and the other casting upon the abutment. 
 A stud, which projects from the top of the abutment casting, holds the swinging 
 doer away from the end of the plunger when the draw is closed, but when the 
 draw is open this same stud, being removed from its previous position, permits 
 the lock-casting to fall in front of the plunger. The automatic locking of the 
 plunger when it is withdrawn holds all of the other levers on the drawbridge in 
 their normal position, through the interlocking on the machine. The plunger is 
 unusually heavy, and the whole device forms an extremely strong bridge lock. 
 
 41 
 
FACINQ POINT, BRIDGE AND BOLT=LOCKS.— (Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 1 5. 
 
 G. Rail Lock. — Like F, it is intended for use upon draw bridges. Most modern swinij^- 
 
 bridges are provided with mechanism for raising the rails at the ends of the draw 
 
 before opening it, and in order that every possible check should be provided for 
 
 the safe operation of the interlocking mechanism, this device was designed. A 
 
 hole is drilled in the plate that projects downward from the rail, which, when the 
 
 rails are lowered and resting on their bases, permits the entrance of the lock 
 
 plunger. When the rails are raised, the solid face of the plate is brought in front 
 
 of the lock plunger, and the lever in the cabin is held in its normal position. 
 
 This device also serves to hold all of the levers in the cabin in their normal 
 
 position when any movement has taken place in any of the mechanism connected 
 
 with the draw. 
 
 H. One form of lock-bar and front rod for an Outside Facing Point Lock. If desired 
 the lock-bar may be turned back, as on L 
 
 I. This differs from H in the fact that a lug instead of a pin, and a jaw instead of an eye 
 is used for connecting the front rod with the lock-bar ; either a screw jaw as 
 shown or a plain wrought jaw may be used, and the lock-bar may be made 
 straight like H if desired. Both H and I are used with A as explained above. 
 
 J. Ordinary Combination Front Rod and Lock-Bar, which is used in connection with an 
 Inside Facing Point Lock. 
 
 A list of the parts will be found upon the following pages. 
 
 PLATE 16. 
 
 View of tracks and signals in the yard, immediately outside of the Grand 
 Central Station, New York. 
 
 This is one of the largest mechanically-controlled plants in the United States. 
 
 42 
 
PLATE IG. 
 
 43 
 
PLATE 17. 
 
 mm^m^^}i"-t:.:''jss^^ 
 
 E 
 
 IS 
 
 15) 
 
 jgSBSBS^"^ 
 
 
 29 
 
 I ^ o 
 
 31 
 
 33 
 
 36 
 
 39 
 
 j40 
 
 30 
 
 32 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 41 
 
 43 42 
 
 44 
 
 45 
 
 44 
 
Facing Point, Bridge and Bolt=Locks. 
 
 PLATE 17. 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Casting, for Outside Facino- Point Loclc. 
 
 ■2. Casting, for Single Inside Facing I^oint Lock. 
 
 3. Casting, for Double Inside Facing Point Lock. 
 
 4. Plunger, for Facing Point Locks. 
 
 5. Switch Bar, for Pipe Bolt Lock. 
 
 6. Sk^nal Bar, for Pipe Bolt Lock. 
 
 7. Casting, for Pipe Bolt Lock. 
 
 8. Signal Bar, for Wire Bolt Lock. 
 
 9. Switch Bar, for Wire Bolt Lock. 
 10. Casting, for Wire Bolt Lock. 
 
 IL Bridge Casting, for Bridge Lock. 
 
 12. SwiNt; Piece, for Bridge Lock. 
 
 1.3. Abutment Casting, for Bridge Lock. 
 
 14. Plunger, for Bridge Lock. 
 
 15. Rail Piece, for Rail Lock. 
 
 16. Plun<;er Casting, for Rail Lock. 
 
 17. Base, for Rail Lock. 
 
 18. Lug, for Rail Lock. 
 
 19. Plunger, for Rail Lock. 
 
 20. Slide Bar, for Rail Lock. 
 
 21. Lock Bar, for Outside Facing Point Lock. (To go with No. 22), this may be bent 
 
 back like No. 26 if desired. 
 
 22. Front Rod, used for outside Placing Point Lock and for Double Point Switch and 
 
 Lock Movement. 
 
 23. Front Rod with Luc;, also used for Outside Facing Point Lock. 
 
 24. Left-Hand I""oot. 
 
 20. 
 
 o 
 
 32. 
 
 '/•These fit both Front Rods Nos. 22 and 23. 
 Right-Hand Foot. 
 
 26. Lock Bar avith Screw Jaw. — This is also made with a plain jaw, and is sometimes 
 straight instead of being bent back. To go with No. 23. 
 
 & 
 
 27. Combined Frc)NT Rod and Lcjck Bar, for Inside Facing Point Lock. 
 
 28. Foot, for No. 27. 
 
 29. Pin, V'xoy^.", for Bridge Casting No. 11. 
 
 30. Washer, Special l", for Pin No. 29. 
 
 31. Split Cotter, tV'x\}4", for Pin No. 29. 
 Stud, \" x?>yi" , for Abutment Casting No. 13. 
 
 45 
 
FACING POINT, BRIDGE AND BOLT=LOCKS. -(Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 17. 
 
 83. Roller, V'xiy^", for Single Inside Facing Point Lock. 
 
 34. Roller, \"%" y^iy.", for Double Inside Facing Point Lock. 
 
 35. Roller Shaft, 5-,s"x33^", for single and double Inside Facing Point Locks. 
 
 36. Split Cotter, yV'-xIIs", for Roller Shaft No. 35, and for Pin No. 37. 
 
 37. Pin, 5/s"x2", for Plunger No. 11). 
 
 38. Pin, 7s"x23,s"' fo"" front rod, jaws and lugs. 
 
 39. Split Cotter, -h"y.l%", for front rod jaw pin. 
 
 40. Split Cotter, A" x 2", for stud on front rod No. 22. 
 4L Washer, special l^\", for stud on front rod No. 22. 
 
 42. Bolt and Nut, 5 s" x 23 g", for fastening rail piece No. 15, and feet Nos. 24, 25, 2S. 
 
 43. Nut Lock, 5 s", for Bolt and Nut No. 42. 
 
 44. Tap Bolt, %"y^\}4"< for joining Plunger Casting and Base, Nos. Ki and 17. 
 
 45. Rivet, ^2"x13.^", for fastening Lug No. 1«. 
 
 PLATE 18. 
 
 Plans of two large systems of tracks that are controlled by Electro-Pneumatic 
 Interlocking Machines. 
 
 It will be seen that at Causeway Street a large number of switches and signals 
 are entirely separated from the cabin by the Charles River Draw Bridge. This 
 does not interfere with the operation of the plant in any way, for the main air 
 pipe and electric wires are run under water. The machine that is located in the 
 cabin at Causeway Street is illustrated on Plate 12G. 
 
 46 
 
PLATE 18. 
 
 47 
 
PLATE 19. 
 
 48 
 
The Double Point Switch and Lock Movement. 
 
 PLATE 19. 
 
 T^HIS arrangement has now been in eonstant service for five years during which 
 
 time we have had no reason for altering our first opinion of it, and we can 
 safely say, when it is properly placed in connection with a pipe or wire bolt lock 
 (Figs. D and E, Plate 15), as on the opposite page, that it is a more reliable 
 device than even a separate facing point lock. 
 
 Unless otherwise specified, the numbers referred to in this description are 
 illustrated on Plate -20. 
 
 The crank (No. 3), which is pivoted to the base (No. 1), is joined to the 
 switch by the link (No. 20), or the switch rod connection (No. i>l); two lock pins 
 (No. 12) are fastened to the slide bars (Nos. ];> and U), which bear between them 
 the operating roller (No. 6) and are connected with the interlocking lever in the 
 cabin through a T crank, which also serves to connect the detector bar; the lock 
 bar (No. 21, Plate 17) passes from the front rod of the switch through the base 
 (No. 1), and the whole device is mounted upon 4"xl2" oak plank framed and 
 bolted to the ties, and held to a fixed distance from the rails by the tie plate 
 (No. 22) to which the rails are rigidly braced. 
 
 When the lever in the cabin is in either of its extreme positions, the detector 
 bar is lowered, one of the switch rails presses against the main rail and one of 
 the lock pins projects through the lock bar; a movement of the lever first with- 
 draws the lock pin and at the same time raises the detector bar until, just before 
 reaching the center of the movement, the operating roller strikes against one of 
 the surfaces of the crank and forces it to revolve, carrying the switch and lock bar 
 with it; the last part of the operation is devoted to lowering the detector bar and 
 locking the switch in its new position. The two views upon this plate are taken 
 from different points and show, in addition, that the detector bar may be connected 
 to either end of the movement. 
 
 The separate parts of this device are illustrated upon Plate 2o. 
 
 49 
 
PLATE 20. 
 
 50 
 
Double Point Switch and Lock Movement. 
 
 PLATE 20. 
 
 No ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 2. Boi.T AND Nut, for fastening- No. 1. These bolts are given more particularly on Plate 30. 
 
 3. Switch Crank. 
 i. Stud, for No. '.'>. 
 
 5. Stud, for No. 6. 
 
 6. Operating; Roller. Bears against No. 3, and is placed between Nos. 13 and 14. 
 
 7. Side Roller. 
 
 8. Stud, for No. 7. Placed at lower end of No. 1. 
 
 9. Stud, for No. 7. Placed at upper end of No. 1. 
 
 10. Cap, for No. 9. 
 
 11. Lug. Placed at each end of and between Nos. 13 and 14. 
 
 12. Lock Pin. 
 
 13. Upper Slide Bar. 
 
 14. Lower Slide Bar. 
 
 15. Strip, for switch rail to slide on. Placed on No. 22. 
 
 16. Rail Brace Plate. Placed back of No. 19 (Plate 21), and on top of No. 22. 
 
 17. Bracket, for the connecting rod of a derail. I^'laced on other side of track from derail, 
 
 and hung to rail by No. 18. 
 
 18. Hook Bolt, for No. 17. 
 
 19. Adiustaijlk Link, for detector bar connection. 
 
 20. AurusTAHLE Link, for switch connection. 
 
 21. Adtus TAPLi-; Switch Rod Connection. Intended to be used with device Fig. C ( Plate 
 
 38), and to take the place of No. 20, as shown here. 
 
 22. Tie Plate. 
 
 23. Split Cotter, ;/V"x2i^", for No. 4. 
 
 24. Split C(itter, -/v"x1i-^", for Nos. 8 and 9. 
 
 25. Split Cotter, rV'xli^", for No. 2(3. 
 
 26. Turned Pin, 7's" x '2 }i" ^ ^or Nos. 19, 2(.» and 21. 
 
 27. Rivet, 34;"n1i^", for fastening No. 16 to No. 22. 
 
 28. Rivet, }4" xl", for fastening No. 12 to No. 13. 
 
 29. Rivet, %"x2^4-"' ^oi" joining Nos. 11, 13 and 14 at lower end of slide bars. 
 
 30. Bolt and Two Nuts, ;.<" .\ 3,iq;", for joining Nos. 11, 12, 13 and 14 at upper end 
 
 of slide bars. 
 
 31. Washer, 1"-11/<", for No. s. 
 
 32. Washer, l%"-2^4", for No. 4, 
 
 33. Nut Lock, for No. 18. 
 
 51 
 
PLATE 21. 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 j^^ 
 
 BAR 
 
 ^-^H 
 
 
 
 SASr^ 
 
 Sr /« '^ fe V^ 
 
 
 .J^ 
 
 
 
 OUTSIDF BAR 
 
 20 
 
 1" I- T 
 
 23 
 
 O 
 
 24 
 
 o ^-^ I 
 
 28 
 
 '29 W3C 
 
 31 
 
 T T 
 
 25 26 
 
 32 33 34 
 
 o o 
 
 52 
 
Detector Bars and Special Rail Brace. 
 
 PLATE yi. 
 
 A. Inside Bar. 
 
 B. Outside Bar with Loxg Hook Buets. — This is the manner in which the outside bar 
 
 is usually applied ; the bolts are placed under the rail, the nuts screwed up and 
 the thing- is done. 
 
 C. Outside Bar wrni Short H(j()k Boi/is. — When a bar overlaps a switch, and on some 
 
 other rare occasions, it is found necessar)' to drill the base of the rail, and the 
 short hook bolt is required. 
 
 The principle upon which all of these bars work is the same as will be seen 
 b\- referring to the two upper figures ; the inside bar rises to about the top of 
 the rail when in its middle position, but the outside bar should rise considerably 
 above the top of the rail, not less than .^_,^". The inside bar is mainh' useful at 
 places where the gauge of the track is necessarily much wider than the gauge of 
 the wheels. 
 
 We wish particular!)' to call attention to our special form of rail brace, which 
 was designed for use at detector bars, but which is so extremel)' light, strong and 
 durable that its use ma)- properl)- be extended to other places. See No. 19. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Bracket, for inside bar. 
 
 2. Pix, l"x4:}4" AND Cotters, for No. 1. 
 
 3. Maleeahle I^ixk, for inside bar; in ordering give height of rail. 
 
 4. Clir, for inside bar. 
 
 0. 
 
 Inside Detector Bar, 2j{1"k-21'^" angle iron; give length required when ordering. 
 
 (i. Outside Uetector Bar, beveled edge, -2^x" wide; for mechanical work the bar is made 
 3 4i" thick ; for pneumatic work the bar is made {'/' thick. In ordering give length 
 required. 
 
 7. Loxg H<jok B(ji/r, for outside bar. 
 
 8. Short Hook Boet, for outside bar. 
 
 9. Bracket. | These are for the outside bar and are made in various 
 
 , r 1-11 sizes to suit different sections of rail ; therefore, in 
 
 10. Mallearee Link, tor mechanical work. ^ ■ .u c i t i • i .u 
 
 I ordermg give the size ot rail for which the parts 
 
 11. Maeeeable Link, for pneumatic work. ) are wanted, 
 
 12. Combined Speice and Driving Piece, for inside or outside bar. P'our of the holes are 
 
 fitted with bolt No. 23, and four with rivets Nos. 29 and 30. 
 
 13. Maleearle Driving Piece, for outside bar. 
 14 Eve Rod, for inside or outside bar. 
 
 53 
 
DETECTOR BARS AND SPECIAL RAIL BRACE. -(Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 21. 
 
 15. Pipe Claaii', for holding spring. 
 
 IC). Cai', for pipe guide No. 17. 
 
 17. Pipe Guide. 
 
 IS. SpRiNd, for driving the bar. 
 
 1"). Rate Brace, this is made in many sizes to suit the height of rail, therefore specify in 
 orderine. 
 
 20 
 21 
 
 o 
 
 ]')oET AND Nut, 34;" X 4", for fastening clip No. 4 to base No. ]. 
 
 Poet and Nut, 5yi"x2y:^.", cotter {Vx^ys", for fastening link No. :', to bar No. 5. 
 
 BoET AND Nut, J^'xl-^'s". for joining pipe clamps No. 15 and for joining cap No. 16 
 to guide No. 17. 
 
 ;;. Poet and Nut, 3^"x2", for joining one half of splice No. 12 to detector bar. 
 
 4. Special Washer, X^" diam., for studs Nos. 25 and 26. 
 
 5. I' ITER Stud and Cotter, for pneumatic link No. 11. 
 2(;. Ui'i'i'.R Stud .\nd Cotter, for mechanical link No. 10. 
 27. Nur Lock, 5 8" diam., for hook bolts Nos. 7 and 8. 
 
 2s. Sort Ir()N Rivet, -/V"-"<1K". for fastening driving piece No. 13 to bar. 
 
 29. S(.iKT Iron Rivet, 3y"xl5,'8", for fastening one half of No. 12 to bar in pneumatic work. 
 
 80. SoEi' Ikon Rivet, 3g"xli^", for fastening one half of No. 12 to bar in mechanical work. 
 
 81. Stud and Cotter, for driving piece No. 13. 
 
 82. Lower Stud and Cotter, for bracket No. 9 ; this is used in both mechanical and 
 
 pneumatic work. 
 
 83. Si'EciAE Washer, 1" diam., for No. 32. 
 
 34. Standard Washer, 1" diam., for Nos. 31 and 12. 
 
 PLATE 32. 
 
 A view in the train shed of the Pennsylvania Railroad at Broad Street, Phila- 
 delphia The siLspended starting signals show quite plainly. This is an extremely 
 important plant, and is illustrated in other ways on Plates 31, 101, 120 and 122. 
 
 S4 
 
PLATE 22. 
 
 55 
 
PLATE 23, 
 
 S6 
 
Multiple Bridge Coupler. 
 
 PLATE 33. 
 
 TTHIS Multiple Bridge Coupler is the only successful device that we know of 
 for accomplishing the movement of several signals and switches on shore by 
 a machine located on a revolvin>'" drawbridue. The ficfure on the left shows the 
 position of the coupler when the drawbridge is closed and one of the levers in 
 the machine is reversed. The figure on the right shows the device uncoupled, 
 the shore connections and bridge connections locked, and the drawbridge ready 
 to swing. They may be made ol considerable width, since the effort required to 
 disengage the coupler is very slight. In large plants it is sometimes necessary to 
 use several couplers, owing to the fact that the distance between the trusses and 
 the rails is occasionally quite limited. 
 
 This is a device, the action of which is absolutely reliable under all of the 
 conditions of traffic or temperature that we have ever met. 
 A list of the parts will be found upon the next page. 
 
 -■)/ 
 
PLATE 34. 
 
 5 
 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 
 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 
 
 o 
 
 58 
 
Multiple Bridge Coupler. 
 
 PLATE 24. 
 
 Note. — Numbers 1, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 15 are shown on plate 24, as constructed for a 
 4-way coupler. We furnish any of them to go with 2, 4, 0, 8, 10 or 1 8-way couplers. 
 
 0-) 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 2. Sn>E Strip. 
 
 3. Middle Strip. 
 
 4. Cover. 
 
 5. Engagement Shaft. 
 
 6. Bearing, for engagement shaft. 
 
 7. Counterweight Shaft. 
 
 8. Roller. 
 
 9. Roller Shaft. 
 
 10. Hook-Bar. 
 
 11. En(;agemeni-Bar. 
 
 12. Engagement Arm. 
 
 13. C(JUNTERWFIGHT Arm, made both as a right-hand and left-hand; a right-hand is shown. 
 
 14. Counterweight. 
 l,x Lock-Bar. 
 
 K;. Bolt and Nur, 3,s"xKv4", for lock-bar. 
 
 17. Bolt and Nut, 3s".x1><", for cover. 
 
 18. Set Screw, ^^"^^l^i", for counterweight. 
 
 19. Cap Screw, 14'" xS^", for middle strip. 
 
 20. Machixl Screw, '^.''x^-i", for side strip. 
 
 21. Split Cotter, ^" \ \ %" . for roller shaft. 
 Special Washer, 34", for roller shaft. 
 
 28. Kev, for shafts 5 and 7. 
 
 A special solid jaw Is used for connecting with the engagement arm, and is shown on 
 Plate 89. Fig. D. 
 
 59 
 
PLATE 25, 
 
 4 
 
 it 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 9 
 
 il 
 
 6o 
 
Automatic Bridge Coupler. 
 
 PLATE 25. 
 
 'T'HE Automatic Bridi^e Coupler is used at drawbridges where it is only neces- 
 sary that one signal, or at most a signal and derail, shall be used for 
 protecting the movements of trains across the draw. The coupler is entirely 
 automatic in its action, and locks itself through the movement of the bridge. Its 
 main features are evident from the illustration on the opposite page. When the 
 operating lever is on the bridge the casting on the right is placed upon the bridge 
 and the one on the left upon the abutment, but under certain circumstances this 
 arrangement may be reversed. A finger (No. 11), which projects up from the bridge 
 casting (No. 10), engages with a spider (No. 4), which is connected with the 
 abutment casting (No. 3), and when the bridge is turned places the dogs built 
 upon the spider in engagement with the lugs shown on the hook bar (No. 1). 
 
 The self-locking of the device takes place upon the first movement of the 
 draw in opening, and the unlocking upon the last movement of the draw in 
 closing. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. HouK Bar. 
 
 2. Stop Bolt, yi" ^lYz"- 
 ;'). Afjut-MEXt Casting. 
 
 4. Spider. 
 
 5. Turned l]/^" Pin, for spider. 
 
 6. Spring Washer, for spider. 
 
 7. Foundation Plate. 
 
 fS. Stud, Jg" diam., for foundation plate, 
 
 i). Special Washer, for stud. 
 
 10. Bridge Casting. 
 
 11. Turned l" Pin, for bridge casting. 
 
 12. Slide Plate. 
 
 6i 
 
PLATE 36. 
 
 62 
 
T 
 
 Scotch Block. 
 
 PLATE 36. 
 
 HE Scotch Block is a derailino- arranoement. In ficrures A and B the view 
 is taken on the outside of the track. Fig. A shows the scotch block in what 
 is called its reversed position, that is, in such a position as to allow the passage of 
 trains. In Fig. B the block rests on top of the rail, and a wheel striking it would 
 be derailed. The scotch block is used when it is necessary to effect a sudden 
 derailment, and is often placed on side tracks where it is desirable that cars shall 
 stand as near the danger point as possible, and be prevented from running on to 
 the main track or a crossing track. The section of rail to which the scotch block 
 is to be applied should always be mentioned. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Beakixc. — In ordering this piece give the section of rail which it is to fit. 
 
 2. ) 
 
 r Bolt, 7x"x5", and Nut, for fastenino- bearing to rail. 
 
 3. i ^ * 
 
 4. Spkixc; Nut L'jck, for Nos. 2 and ;!. 
 
 5. Wedge Block. 
 
 6. Bearinc; Siiaf'j'. 
 
 7. Cotter, ^/^''x-i", for Bearing Shaft, 
 
 8. Special Jaw. 
 
 9. Pin, for Special Jaw. 
 
 10. Cutter, j%-"xi}4'\ for Special Jaw Pin. 
 
 '53 
 
PLATE 37. 
 
 64 
 
Rocking Shafts and Bell Cranks. 
 
 PLATE 37. 
 
 A. The Rockinc Shaft shown here is ont; of the most notable improvements in inter- 
 
 locking devices oi the present period ; the shaft itself is hexagonal in section, 
 and is encircled by the off-set and straight cranks and by the collars which fit in 
 the bearings, and are punched to exactly fit the shaft. The bearings themselves 
 are made much like those used in the now obsolete welded rocking shaft. The 
 straight and offset arms are drop-forged, and all parts are interchangeable. 
 Through the use of this shaft it is possible to ship them from our works 
 knocked down, to be assembled and placed in their proper position when it seems 
 likely that no further changes will be made in the lead-out. The sole right of 
 manufacturing this device is vested in us. 
 
 B. 1 
 
 C. }' These are respectively H-way, 2-way and 1-way horizontal cranks. 
 
 D. J 
 
 E. Lead-out Box Ck-\nk. — It is made in any number of ways from a 4-way up, as shown 
 
 in the illustration. 
 
 F. One-WAV Verticat Crank. 
 
 G. Two-way Vertical Crank. 
 
 H. Adjustable Crank. — It has a movable eye on one arm and is an arrangement of 
 unusual convenience since it permits the changing of the stroke without the 
 drilling of holes in the crank arm. The one shown is of a kind adapted to 
 signals only, but the crank itself can be made of a size to fit in the base D on 
 this same page. 
 
 I, Small Light Crank. — Intended for use principally upon block signal posts. 
 
 The parts are illustrated on the following page. 
 
 65 
 
PLATE 38. 
 
 66 
 
List of the Parts of Cranks and Rocking Shafts. 
 
 PLATE as. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base ok Crank Box. i . . 
 
 ,- Made in several sizes ; a 4-way is shown. 
 
 2. Toi' (IK Crank Box. ) 
 
 3. Stand, for horizontal crank, made as a 1 , i' and .'l-wa)' ; a ^-way is shown. 
 
 ■i. Stan 1 1, for a vertical crank ; made also as a 2-way. 
 
 b. Hexagonal Rockinc .Shait, made in various lengths, and used both at the lead-out 
 and for moving detector bars. 
 
 0. Tor, for high or low lead-out bearing ; this is made also as a L'-way. 
 
 7. High Leak>-Out Bearing ; made also as a 2-way. A low lead-out bearing is constructed 
 
 which uses the same top (No. (>), and is also made as a 1-wa)- and a 2-way. 
 
 8. Top, for bearing No. !). 
 
 9. Bearing (used only with detector bars). 
 
 10. Okkskt Leao-Out Arm. 
 
 11. Arm, for shaft (used only with detector bars). 
 
 12. Strak.ht Lead-Out Arm. 
 
 13. End Rockin(; ShaI'T Journal. 
 
 11. Intermediate Rocking Shakt Journal. 
 
 1,5. Tie Plate, for detector bar rocking shaft. 
 
 16. Right Angle Crank, made in different sizes. 
 
 l". RkjHT Angle Crank, 113/^" arms. 
 
 IS. Right Angle Crank, '.)" arms. 
 
 19. Right Angle Crank, adjustable arm. This is made both for use at switches and nn 
 
 signal posts, and with arms of different lengths. See Plate 27, Pig. H. 
 
 20. T Crank, made in different lengths. 
 
 21. Radial Arm, made in different lengths. 
 
 22. Acute Angle Crank. ^ Made in different sizes; used on Pipe Compensators, and for 
 
 23. Obtuse Angle Crank. \ turning corners which are not a right angle. 
 
 21. Turned Pin, IV4" diam. ; made of a length to suit horizontal crank stand No, ;>. 
 
 1*5. Split Cotter, %" x '•'> --^." , for pin No. 21. 
 
 26. Turned Pin, I34" diam., for lower row of cranks on P'ig. I{, Plate 27. 
 
 27. Split Cotter, i/'xMy^", for pin No. 26. 
 
 28. Turned Pin, l%" diam., for upper row of cranks on P'ig. E, folate 2 7. 
 
 29. Speciai, Washer, 1 ^/^" x 2 ^':^" , for pins Nos. 21 and 2s. 
 
 30. Split Cotter, /'(;"x2", for pins Nos. 28 and 31. 
 
 31. Turned Pin, 1%" diam., for vertical stand No. 1. Made in two lengths. 
 
 32. Bolt and Nut, 3^"x7>3", for joining Nos. 8, 9 and l.'i, 
 
 67 
 
LIST OF THE PARTS OF CRANKS AND ROCKING SHAFTS.— (Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 28. 
 
 ?>3. Nut Lock, for bolt No. :'>2. 
 
 o5. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, Xi"xbyi", for joining base No. 1 and Top No. 2. 
 
 Set S(RK\v and Jam Nut, -j^" x ] S.y^" , for rocking shaft arms Nos. 10, 11 and 12. 
 ■^6. Set Screw and Jam Nut, 5'8"x1J4^", for end rocking shaft journal No. 13. 
 '57. Tap Bcjlt, ^s"x2y^", for joining top and lead-out bearing Nos. 6 and 7. 
 
 Deflecting Rods. 
 
 PLATE 39. 
 
 OOTH A and B are intended to be placed in a line of pipe where it is neces- 
 sary to make a considerable diversion from a straight line, but where the bend 
 is not sharp enough to require a crank. Both devices are made in many different 
 sizes ; 4-ways are shown. 
 
 A. Is composed of square 1" rods, having eyes on the ends to which it is intended to 
 
 connect the pipes through the medium of standard wrought jaws. 
 
 B. Consists of solid round 1 J4" rods with tang ends, to which the pipe is directly connected. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. SnuARE 1" Rod. 
 
 •2. Base, for Square Rods , a -i-way is shown. 
 
 :',. Cover, for Square Rods ; it is made to fit base No. "_'. 
 
 ■i. Base, for Round Rods ; a 4-way is shown. 
 
 5. Cover, for Round Rods ; it is made to fit base No. 4. 
 
 6. Round 1%" Rod. 
 
 7. Tap Bolt, ^8"x-)4^", for square rod cover. 
 
 8. Roller, for Round Rods. 
 
 9. Pin, }("x'P,y2", for Round Rod Roller No. 8. 
 10. Split Cotter, ]V," xl]/^," , for Roller Pin No. !). 
 
 68 
 
PLATE 29. 
 
 69 
 
PLATE 30. 
 
 n 
 
 I I 
 
 
 . \^ 
 
 E 
 
 
 J 
 
 ■*^ 
 
 I 
 
Compensators for Pipe and Wire. 
 
 PLATE 30. 
 
 A. STAxriARD Pu'K C< )M I'KxsA T(i K. — Tliis is made as a 1-way. L'-\va)' and .'l-way ; a l-\va)- is 
 
 shown. 
 
 B. STRAunir Arm Pipk Cum ri'.NSAidk. — 'llu- arm is matlc in different lengths, and is 
 
 mounted on an ordinar)' crank stand. 15 is also made as 1, 1' or o-way. See. 
 No. S below. 
 
 C. Back Wire CoAirENSAToR. 
 
 D. Fkoxi' WiKt; Ci )MrEXs A TOR. 
 
 Por man)' )'ears we have sout^dit for a relialile \vire compensator and have at last 
 found one, which is illustrated in figures C and 1 ). 
 
 Thousands of dollars have been expended in lien-tofore abortive attempts to produce 
 a compensator wliich would be at once simple and effective, but imtil this one Avas con- 
 ceived all of those previously produced have proved either too complicated for ordinary 
 jDurposes or else entirely useless from having been constructed upon incorrect principles. 
 
 The one we are now dealing witli is adapted to either long or short lines of wire, and 
 is intended to be placed in the cabin wliere it is easib- accessible. It requires no adjust- 
 ment, and is so constructed that the wire is compensated only while the interlocking lever 
 is in its normal position, thus avoiding the danger, which has existed in most of its prede- 
 cessors, that the compensating spring or weight might, under certcun conditions, be pulled 
 instead of the signal. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Ba.se, for A. 
 
 2. Obtuse Axoikm Ckaxk. / In ordering please give distance from each end hole to 
 ;;. Acute Axciei. Crank. \ middle hole. 
 
 4. Link, a malleable is shown, but, if particularly specifietl, it may be furnished of 
 wrought iron. 
 
 5. Stud, 1 '4" x 43/;;^", for Nos. '2 and ;'. ; state whether wanted for a 1, 2 or o-way. 
 
 1 . H. Washer, ]'i"--2v,", for No, Ti. 
 
 pi. < + / + 
 
 H 7. TURNEK PlX, 7s"xL*3,s", fot No, 4. 
 
 a: 
 
 ^ S. CoMPENSA ITXC. Akm ; give length recjuired between centers of holes. 
 
 9. Srftt Cotter, /j" x i'", for No. 5. 
 
 [10. Split Cottek, //'xli^". for No. 7. 
 
 £ - 
 
o 
 
 2 ' 
 
 COMPENSATORS FOR PIPE AND WIRE. Continued. 
 No. PLATE 30. 
 
 11. Base. ) 
 
 V These parts belong to Fig. C only. 
 
 12. Support, for No. 18. \ 
 
 1.3. Guide Bar. 
 
 14. Inside Cylinder. 
 
 15. Spring. 
 
 16 Revolving Collar, with stud and nut. 
 
 17. Outside Cylinder. 
 
 18. Fixed Collar. 
 
 19. Base, for Fig. D. 
 
 20. Split Cotter, tV'xl". ) 
 
 -For No. 16. 
 
 21. Wa.sher, 5/8"-! 3/s". \ 
 
 22. Bolt and Two Nuts, 3/g"x2}4", for fastening No. l.o. 
 
 23. Bolt, 3/s"xS{", for fastening No. 13 to Nos. 11, 12 and 19, and for fastening 
 
 one side of No. 18 to No. 17. 
 
 24. Bolt, 3/^" x S/g", for fastening one side of No. 18 to No. 17. 
 . 2.5. Roller, for stud on No. 16. 
 
 PLATE .31, 
 
 Two important terminals at Philadelphia that are controlled by the Electro- 
 Pneumatic Interlocking System. 
 
 72 
 
PLATE 31. 
 
PLATE 32. 
 
 
 ^<"'ii-* *> ^'<^^ 4>/Vf ft-^'^^ 
 
Oak Foundations and Stake. 
 
 PLATE 32. 
 
 ALL of these foundations are made by machinery from seasoned White Oalc, 
 the tops and sides being- do\'e-tailed and bolted together. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND LETTER. 
 
 A. Selector FouxriATTox. — 6' long, l' wide, ;'.' 4" deep. 
 
 B. DwAKF SiGXAi. FocNDATiiiN. — o' long, l' wide, ?>' 4" deep. 
 
 C. Cr.'VNK P"( lUXDATKiN. — 'l' long, ]()" wide, o' 4" deep. 
 
 D. Wmeel Foundation. — 2' long, ]0" wide, \V 4" deep. 
 
 E. Pipe Compensator Founhation. — ?>' long, Ut" wide, .'!' 4" deep. 
 
 F. Pii'E Carrier Foundation. — Variable lengths (a 1-way is 12" long, and the}' increase 
 
 at the rate of 2":'^" for each way), 8" wide, 24" deep. 
 
 G. Wire Carrier Stake. — ;!"x4" on top, 4' long, pyramidal point. 
 
 75 
 
PLATE 3.3. 
 
 iie> 
 
 3 
 
 BiiiirwiiK 
 
 I 
 
 <»ai iw« « mi>»i i iw w MWif ilwi iM iii i i illl lli iwwpMpwjWI I I i 
 
 76 
 
Different Methods of Making an Intermediate Connection with a Line 
 
 of Pipe, and a Means of Changing a Line from Pipe 
 
 to Wire, or vice versa. 
 
 PLATE 33. 
 
 T 
 
 HE figures A, B, C, show only the apphcation of the devices. If a crank is 
 desired it must be specially ordered. 
 
 A. Double Jaw. 
 
 B. Wide Iaw. 
 
 C. Pipe Lug. — The link which joins the crank and lug is formed of two plain jaws welded 
 
 together. One of these jaws is sent with No. 6 (see below), the other with the 
 crank. 
 
 D. Wire Lug. — The application of this device will be seen on plate 10, where it is con- 
 
 nected with a selector. It is also used at bridge couplers and wherever it is 
 necessary to change from a pipe to a wire line. The vertical wheel forms a part 
 of the device and is illustrated alone on Plate 41, Fig. A. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Wide jaw. 
 
 2. Turned Pin, '4^/1" long, for wide jaw. 
 o. Standard Wrought Jaw. 
 
 4. Double Jaw. 
 
 5. Turned Pin, 23/8" long; for Nos. 4 and (i. 
 
 6. Pipe Lufi. 
 
 7. Wire Lug. 
 
 8. Shackle. 
 
 y. Turned Pin, •23/s" long; for shackle No. s. 
 
 77 
 
PLATE 34. 
 
 A 
 
 1(1 
 
 r 
 
 H 
 
 5.^' 
 
 « 
 
 78 
 
Pipe and Wire Carriers. 
 
 PLATE 34. 
 
 PIPE CARRIERS. 
 
 A. SrK( lAi. PiPK Carrier. — It is used occasionally for short distances, and sometimes when 
 
 pipes are rim under tracks. 
 
 B. Plaix Pii'E Carrier. — In this device the main roller has only a rotary motion. 
 
 C. An'ti-Fkk rioN- Pipe Carrier. — Here the main roller has two motions; it revolves and 
 
 it travels with the pipe in its bearing, which is slotted. 
 
 Note. — In the two forms, B and C, the main dimensions are the same, that is, the 
 diameter of the pulleys, the distance between rods, center to center, and the distance between 
 revolvino- centers. 
 
 WIRE CARRIERS. 
 
 D. Side Wire Carrier. — It is placed upon the side of a support, and its use should be 
 
 restricted to perfectly straight lines of wire. 
 
 E. Angee Wire Carrier. — This is placed like the side wire carrier, on the side of a stake, 
 
 but, unlike the side carriers, adjusts itself to the curve of the wire. 
 
 F. Two-WAV Angle Wire Carrier. — Constructed on the same principle as E. 
 
 G. 
 H. 
 
 I. 
 
 J. 
 
 Are respectively 1, 2, 4 and 6-way common wire carriers. 
 
 J is a recent design and secures, through its use, a considerable economy in the width 
 of pipe carrier foundations and boxing. Its height is so great, however, that it should never 
 be used except where the lines are entirely straight. 
 
 No 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 Stand, for plain pipe carrier ; this is made in all sizes from a 1 way up ; a l-\vay is shown. 
 
 BoTro.M Roller, for plain and special pipe carriers. 
 
 Stand, for special pipe carrier. 
 
 Bottom Roller, for anti-friction pipe carrier. 
 
 79 
 
PIPE AND WIRE CARRIERS. -(Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 34. 
 
 No. 
 
 f). Stamj, for anti-friction pipe carrier; this is also made in all sizes from a 1-way up; a 
 ■2-way is shown. 
 
 6. Top Roller, for plain and anti-friction pipe carriers. 
 
 7. Sh.akt, for top and bottom rollers; the length varies with the size of the pipe carrier. 
 S. Split Cotter, tV -^ 1 ,^ .s". for roller shaft. 
 
 9. Wood Screw, 4=^15. j 
 
 ,- For side wire carrier. 
 
 10. Wo(jD Screw, #1-4. ) 
 
 11. Stam), for side wire carrier. 
 
 12. Wheel, for wire carriers. 
 
 13. Staxd, for angle wire carrier; a ]-way is shown, but it is made also as a 2-way. 
 
 14. RiAET, iV X 1 ^'s", for angle wire carrier. 
 
 15. Base, for angle wire carrier. 
 
 l(i. Stand, for common 2-way wire carriers; this is made also as a 4-way and 6-way. 
 
 17. Spllp Cotter, ^^.''x-I-yz", serving as the shaft for the wheels in 2-way common and 
 
 angle wire carriers, and in 4-way and 6-way common wire carriers. 
 
 18. Stand, for 1-way common wire carrier. 
 
 H). Split Cotter, ^^." xl-}i", for 1-way angle and 1-way common wire carriers. 
 
 PLATE 35. 
 
 System of tracks and signals on the Michigan Central Railroad at Detroit, 
 Mich. They are controlled by a Saxby & Farmer Improved Interlocking Machine. 
 Plate 4 gives another view of this place. 
 
 So 
 
PLATE 35. 
 
PLATE 36. 
 
 o. 
 
 3 4 
 
 8 
 
 M y 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 20 
 
 I 
 
 21 
 
 17 18 
 
 19 
 
 22 I 
 
 ©29 3 0»i 
 
 4 
 
 issm 
 
 31 3^ 
 
 33 gjgiBSlBBBi 
 
 42 
 
 41 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 12 
 
 ^ /r 25 
 
 24 
 
 23 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
Parts Relating: to Pipe and Wire. 
 
 BOLTS AND LAG SCREWS. 
 
 PLATE 3C. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Wire Eve, for use in connection with 7s" pin. 
 
 2. Wire Eye, for use in connection with No. 3. 
 
 3. Split Link. 
 
 4. Piece oe #9 Sicnai. Wire. 
 
 5. Piece ue 1" Pite. This is drilled, plugged and threaded. 
 
 6. Sleeve, for No. 5. 
 
 7. Rivet, for joining Nos. 5 and 8. 
 S. Plug, for No. 5. 
 
 9. Piece cie :--^" Pipe. This is drilled, plugged and threaded. 
 
 10. Sleeve, for No. 9. 
 
 11. Rivet, for joining Nos. 9 and 12. 
 
 12. Plug, for No. 9. 
 
 13. Turned Pin, 7,s"x33s", for No. 14. 
 
 14. Seiackle. Used in connection with No. 15, making a double-hinged shackle. 
 
 15. Shackle. Used for connectingf wire with an interlocking lever, and sometimes with No. 
 
 14, to form a double-hinged shackle. 
 
 16. Split Cotter, i'/'xlU", for Nos. 13 and 17. 
 
 17. Turned Pen, 7,s"x23,s", for No. 15. 
 
 18. Seiackle, ^{" spread, for driving bar on one-arm dwarf signal ; see Nos. 24 and 25 
 
 below. 
 
 19. Shackle, }4" spread, for balance levers, etc. 
 
 20. Turned Pin, f'8"xl5/8", for Nos. 19, 22 and 23. 
 
 21. Split Cotter, iV'xl^s", for No. 20. 
 
 22. Shackle Hook. Used for fastening chain on selector hook bar. 
 
 23. Double Shackle. Used on dwarf signals and at other places where wire is to be run 
 
 in two directions from a lever. 
 
 24. Turned Pen, i^'xl-l^", for No. 18. 
 
 25. Split Cotter, /v" x 1", for No. 24. 
 
 26. Lag Screw, Yz" x^^", for fastening lamp brackets, selector bar guides, semaphore 
 
 ladders, detector bar pipe guides, pipe carriers, dwarf-signal roller stands, vertical 
 signal rod guides, etc. 
 
 27. Lag Screw, ~xl"x4:", for fastening selector, hook gear, motion plate, one half of com- 
 
 pensator and crank stands, wheel and deflecting bar bases, dwarf signals, pot 
 signals, slots, plates for detector bar, detector bar rocking-shafts, bolt locks, facing 
 point lock castings, balance lever stands, ground lever switch stands, etc. 
 
 28. Lag Screw, 3:^"xG", for fastening double and triple ground levers, box crank bases, 
 
 legs of Stevens machine, etc. 
 
 83 
 
PARTS RELATING TO PIPE AND WIRE BOLTS AND LAG SCREWS.— (Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 36. 
 
 29. Washer, 3,3", for No. 30. 
 
 30. Bolt and Nut, 3y"xS>2", for pipe carrier foundations. 
 
 31. Bolt and Nut, I'<"x8><", for semapliore bearings. Tliis is used where the post is 
 
 7" thick ; if the post is thicker, the length of the bolt must be proportionately 
 increased. 
 
 32. Bolt and Nut, j4" xl'iy^", for wheel foundations. 
 
 33. Bolt and Nut, ^4" x\-^%" , for dwarf signal foundations. 
 
 34. Washer, %" , for Nos. 31, 32 and 33. 
 
 35. Bolt and Nut, 5.-^" x 123.^", for crank and pipe-compensator foundations. 
 
 36. Bolt and Nut, 5/s"x143/^", for selector foundation. 
 
 37. Washer, S/g", for Nos. 35 and 36. 
 
 38. Washer, i/+" < fo^ Nos. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43 and 44. 
 
 39. Bolt and Nut, 34^" x 6", for fastening one half of compensator and crank stands, part 
 
 of double point switch and lock movement, and lead-out shaft bearings. 
 
 40. Bolt and Nut, ^"x7", for fastening leg of Saxby & Farmer machine to horizontal 
 
 timber. 
 
 41. Bolt and Nut, ^"x9", for fastening part of double point switch and lock movement. 
 
 42. Bolt and Nut, 3,4'"x10", for fastening a crank stand to a cross tie. 
 
 43. Bolt and Nut, 3/^"x11", for fastening part of double point switch and lock movement. 
 
 44. Bolt and Nut, ^4"x17", for fastening leg of Saxby & Farmer machine to upright 
 
 timber. 
 
 PLATE 37. 
 
 View of tracks and signals at the Union Station, Chicago. 
 
 This plant is a proof of the success that may attend the use of the One-Arm 
 Dwarf Signal (shown on Plate 56), when used as a starting signal in places where 
 there is not room for a main line semaphore. Although one of the busiest and 
 most successfully-operated plants in this country, there is not a single high signal 
 in the installation. At the other end of the station is another plant of like size and 
 character. 
 
 84 
 
PLATE 37 
 
 85 
 
PLATE 38. 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 O 
 
 10 
 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 86 
 
Adjusting Screws for Pipe and Wire. 
 
 PLATE 38. 
 
 A. Wire Adjusting Screw. — This is also made as a lurn-buckle like Fig. B. 
 
 B. Pipe Adjusting Screw, with a malleable iron turn-buckle ; we can also furnish them 
 
 with a wrought iron turn-buckle if it is desired. 
 
 C Stecial Adjustment. — This is designed to be used at a switch and is riveted or bolted 
 directly to the bridle rod ; by bringing the two sleeves nearer together, or by 
 further separating them, the throw of the switch is increased or diminished as 
 desired. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 4. 
 5. 
 6. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 11. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 Swivel, for Wire Adjusting Screws 
 
 Washer, special yi" , for Wire Adjusting Screw. 
 
 Pipe Nut, for Wire Adjusting Screw. 
 
 Screw, for Wire Adjusting Screw. 
 
 Turn-Buckle, for Pipe Adjusting Screw. 
 
 Nut, for Pipe Adjusting Screw. ^ These are made with right and left-hand threads. 
 
 Screw, for Pipe Adjusting Screw, f In ordering specify which is wanted. 
 
 Bracket. 
 
 Screw. 
 Nut, lyi". 
 Sleeve. 
 
 - For Fig. C. 
 
 87 
 
PLATE 39. 
 
Jaws. 
 
 PLATE 39. 
 
 'T^HIS page is offered as a convenient reference, and contains most of the jaws 
 used and manufactured by us. There are, however, a few special forms not 
 shown here, which will be found amongst the parts to which they relate. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND LETTER. 
 
 A. Standard Wrought Jaav, 7y"x2a8" P'^i- 
 
 B. Standard Screw Jaw, 7y"x23s" P'"- 
 
 C. Standard Wide Jaw, 7s"noI,^" pin. 
 
 D. Slotted Iaw, for multiple bridge coupler, J's" ^-j4" pin. 
 
 E. Special Iaw, for scotch block, 7y"x3" pin. 
 
 F. Plain ]\Lvlleable Jaw, 7's"x23,x" pin. 
 
 G. Adjustable Link, 18" long; made of a standard wrought and a standard screw jaw. 
 H. Vertical Rod, for the one-arm dwarf signal. See Plate ,57, Nos. 73 and 74. 
 
 L Screw Jaw, 3//" rod, 5/s"xl5/8" pin. 
 
 J. Pipe Compen.sator Link, 7s"x'23/8" pins. 
 
 K. Adjustable Link, 12" long, made of a standard wrought jaw and special screw- jaw, 
 
 pms /s x24 8 • 
 
 L. Jaw and Piston, for pneumatic signal cylinder, 5,/8"xlj8" pin. 
 
 M. Adjustable Malleable Link, for pneumatic signal post, Y%' ^\}%" pin, 5/s" eye. 
 
 N. Special Jaw, 1J4" rod, for the pipe connected one-arm dwarf signal, Y^' ^\Y^" pin. 
 
 O. Special Jaw, for pipe connected block signals, 1" rod, S/8"xl3/^" pin. 
 
 P. Special J.vw, for pipe connected interlocking signals, XYjJ' rod, 5/s"xl3/^" pin. 
 
 O. Adjustable Link, for a mechanical slot, YY' ^'^d, ^/'Y ^Y'i" pins. 
 
 R. Adjustable Link, for main line indicator, YY' ^od, screw jaw pin 5/s"xl3.::^", small jaw 
 
 T / " i " 
 
 pm Y^ X 1 . 
 S. Adjustable Link, for electric slots, Y'i" ""od, Y-" ^Y'i" P'"- /^" "^y^- 
 T. Adjustai!LE Link, for pneumatic slots, y^" rod, Y" ^Y%' P'"- Y^" '^Y^- 
 U. Screw Jaw for Signal Posts, 1" rod, YJ' tang, 5,s"xl3i,;" pin. 
 
 89 
 
PLATE 40. 
 
 
 
 go 
 
The Mechanical Slot. 
 
 PLATE 40. 
 
 T^HIS device is for the purpose of placing a signal under the control of the 
 
 operators in two separate cabins. 
 
 The base (No. 1) is usually placed upon a signal post, the signal to be con- 
 trolled is fastened to the top of the case (No. I'j, the levers in the two cabins 
 are respectively connected with the rods (No. cj that lie in the case. The opera- 
 tion is as follows : the reversing of either lever alone does not affect the position 
 of the signal, but carries the rod to which that lever is connected to the top of the 
 case, forcing the roller (No. 5) in front of and above the other rod; the situation 
 is now like that shown in the illustration, the lever to which the right-hand rod is 
 connected having been reversed. When the left-hand rod is pushed up, the case 
 itself is forced to follow it, no other movement being possible, which results in the 
 clearing of the signal. During the last action the roller has been slid along the 
 side of the right-hand rod, and the bottom of the case has been brought up to the 
 dog which is seen in profile on No. (i ; a contrary effect is therefore secured in the 
 return movement, for it is the first rod that is lowered which causes the signal to 
 go to danger, while the lowering of the second rod accomplishes nothing but to 
 restore it to its normal position. 
 
 On rare occasions it is desirable to control from two cabins a distant signal 
 that is mounted on the same post with a home signal ; for this purpose a special 
 rod (No. 7) is provided. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Ba.se. 
 
 2. Case. 
 
 3. Cover. 
 
 4. Tap Bolt, for cover. 
 
 5. Roller. 
 
 6. Ordinary Rod. 
 
 7. Special Rod. 
 
 8. Link. 
 
 9. Screw |a\v for Link. 
 
 "10. Turned Pin and Cotter, for screw jaw. 
 
PLATE 41. 
 
 fT\- r , T *6.-t«riP'*v*fl'*"^^ --l^^wrr^^' 
 
 J 
 
 92 
 
Chain Wheels. 
 
 PLATE 41. 
 
 \ A 7E HAVE two standard sizes of wheels, a 6" and an 8"; the S" wheels will 
 fit only the large stands, but the 6" wheel, which has the same thickness 
 as the s", can be used in any stand. 
 
 A. Vertical 8" Wheel. — It has a pipe carrier at the bottom, and is used solely at those 
 
 places where it is desired to change from a pipe to a wire line, as in the case of 
 the back wire at the standard selector (see Plate oS), and at the abutments of 
 drawbridges ; it is made also as a 2-wa)'. 
 
 B. Standard 1-wav Vertical s" Wheel, for the front wire in a cabin ; it is made also 
 
 as a 2-way. 
 
 C. Standard 1-\vav Vertical 8" Wheel, for the back wire in a cabin. 
 
 D. Standard 2-wav Vertical 8" Wheel, for the back wire in a cabin. 
 
 E. Low 6" Vertical Wheel, used for special purposes, as at dwarf signals with indicators. 
 
 F. Special 6" Horizontal ]-way Wheel, used particularly at the one-arm dwarf signal. 
 
 G. Box (6") Wheel. — It is made as a 4-way, (i-way and 8-way ; a 4-way is illustrated. 
 
 H. Common 4-way 8" Horizontal Wheel. — This is made also as a 5-way, 3-way, 2-way and 
 1-way, which latter is shown in Fig. I. 
 
 I. Top View ok a Common 1-way 8" Horizontal Wheel. — The 4-way of this style is 
 shown in Fig. H. 
 
 The separate parts will be found upon Plate 42, 
 
 93 
 
PLATE 43. 
 
 ,««' -ti 
 
 94 
 
Chain Wheels. 
 
 PLATE 42. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Wheel Stand, for transfer lug from pipe to wire ; it is shown in position on Plate 10, 
 
 attached to the selector. This is also made as a 2-way. 
 
 2. Stand, for front wire vertical s" wheel. 
 
 3. Stand, for back wire vertical S" wheel. 
 
 4. Stand, for vertical 6" wheel. 
 
 .5. Shaft, 5/s" diam., used for all wheels. 
 
 6. Stand, for 6" box wheel, 4-way is shown ; it is made also as a 6-way and 8-way. 
 
 7. Ordinary 6" wheel. 
 
 8. Bottom Wheel, for stand No. 1. 
 
 9. Ordinary 8" Wheel. 
 
 10. Stand, for 4-way horizontal 8" wheel ; made also as 1-way, 2-way, 3-way and 5-way. 
 
 11. Stand, for 1-way 6" horizontal wheel. Used mostly in connection with the standard 
 
 one-arm dwarf signal. 
 
 95 
 
PLATE 43. 
 
 96 
 
Block Signal Stands. 
 
 PLATE 43. 
 
 A. High Stand. — In this stand the levers are entirely above the floor line. 
 
 B. Low Stand. — Here the levers extend below the floor line and the signal connections 
 
 may be placed either above or below. 
 Either of these stands may be arranged for a three-position signal if it is desired ; 
 therefore, please specify in ordering. 
 
 oi - 
 
 
 1 o 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Stand. 
 
 2. Shaft, 3,4" diam., and cotters 'i%"xrh", for No. 4. 
 ;-;. Spkcial Washer, 3_^", for No. 4. 
 4. Levi:r. 
 
 Stand. 
 0. Shaft, s./j^" dianT, and cotters Xy^J'^-h", for No. S. 
 7. Cast Washer for No. G. 
 ;5 ^ 18. Le\'er. 
 
 I' ~ 
 
 97 
 
PLATE 44. 
 
station Block Signals. 
 
 PLATE 44. 
 
 T^HE figure on the left illustrates our standard form of block signal as it is 
 arranged when placed in front of a telegraph office or block signal station. 
 The two blades control trains running in opposite directions and by the use of 
 semaphore casting No. 3, Plate 50, one lamp only is required. This signal 
 may be operated either by pipe or \vire, although when located near the cabin, 
 wire is much the cheapest arrangement, and is quite strong enough. 
 
 On the right is illustrated the block signal in use on the Pennsylvania Lines 
 West of Pittsburg. The blade pointing to the right occupies the cautionary position, 
 which is made possible by the great angle (90°), which separates the danger 
 (horizontal) and clear (vertical) positions. One lamp only is required with each 
 of these double signals, since it is placed on top of the post and shines in both 
 directions through the ring attached to the top of the semaphore casting. This 
 signal is always operated by pipe in connection with one of the stands shown on 
 Plate 43. 
 
 The parts may be found on Plates -±9, ;-)() and 51. 
 
 99 
 
PLATE 45. 
 
 
 . ^^ — 
 
 AB 
 
 100 
 
standard Semaphores of the Pennsylvania Lines West 
 
 of Pittsburg. 
 
 PLATE 45. 
 
 T^HE main objects of this system, which was designed by Mr. W. McC. Grafton,, 
 
 Signal Engineer of the above-named road, are : first, to secure a more con- 
 sistent signal than the ordinary one, by painting the blades a negative color and 
 depending for their identification solely on form, thus doing away with the contra- 
 diction incident to passing a clear signal that is painted red ; second, to make a 
 greater distinction between a danger and a clear signal, by increasing the arc 
 through which the blade must travel. 
 
 The ordinary night signals, red for danger, green for caution, and white for 
 safety, are retained. 
 
 The different parts are illustrated on Plates -±9, 50 and 51. 
 
 On the previous page the application of this semaphore to block signalino- 
 is shown. 
 
 lOI 
 
PLATE 46. 
 
 1 02 
 
The Chicago & Northwestern R'y Standard Semaphores. 
 
 PLATE 46. 
 
 'T'HESE semaphores are singular in the colors adopted for night signals, and in 
 
 the fact that the home signals on this road are always operated by pipe ; the 
 distant signals, like those on almost all other roads, are operated by wire. 
 
 The home signal in the danger position exhibits a red light, while in the 
 clear position a green light is shown. 
 
 The distant signal carries a peculiarly shaped lamp (Plate 59, Fig. C), which 
 has on its face two openings ; the one on the left is filled with a green glass, and 
 is never obscured, while the opening on the right is protected with a white lens, 
 which, however, is never visible. The upper hole in the distant signal semaphore 
 casting carries a red glass, the lower a metallic shield ; therefore, when a distant 
 signal is in the danger position two lights are visible, a green and a red, but when 
 the signal is in the clear position, only the green light is visible, owing to the 
 presence of the metallic shield in front of the white lens. 
 
 The practical result of this method of lighting is an entire avoidance of the 
 danger due to the breaking of the colored glasses ordinarily carried in semaphore 
 castings, for in this system a white light is not construed as a signal at all. 
 
 This method was conceived by Mr. E. C. Carter, Principal Assistant Engineer 
 of the Chicago & Northwestern R'y. 
 
 The parts of these signals are illustrated on Plates 4ii, 50 and 51. 
 
 103 
 
PLATE 47. 
 
 104 
 
Ordinary Two=Armed Straight Post, and Straight Post 
 
 with Indicators. 
 
 PLATE 47. 
 
 T 
 
 HE Two-Armed Straight Post illustrates the commonest form of main line 
 
 signal. The usual height is about 20 feet from the ground level to the lower 
 arm ; one foot in the ground for ever\' lour feet above ground, and six feet between 
 the centers of the arms. Except the last, these dimensions are variable and are 
 often departed from \\'hen the circumstances warrant it. 
 
 This post may be built with any number of arms from one up to five or 
 even more, although the practice is now quite general not to place more than two 
 arms on each post, the upper one for the direct or fast route, the lower one for 
 all divergent routes. 
 
 The Straight Post with Indicators is the type used on many of the New 
 England railroads, where the practice noted above with regard to the use of not 
 more than two arms on one post has not yet been adopted. 
 
 The indicators are a compromise between the two-armed post and the early 
 practice of using as many arms as there were routes to be followed. In some 
 cases a reflecting lamp, see Fig. M, Plate 5'.i, which casts its light upon the face 
 of the lower arm, is used instead of the lamp shown in the illustration, while still 
 other roads use the illuminated blade, Plate 55 ; the last seems to give the best 
 results, since it gives a better light than the reflecting lamp, and makes a distinc- 
 tion between the upjKT and lower arms \vhich is unmistakable. 
 
 The parts of these posts will be found illustrated on Plates 49, 50 and 51. 
 
 loq 
 
PLATE 48. 
 
 1 06 
 
The Bracket Post. 
 
 PLATE 48. 
 
 'T^HIS style is used at places where the post cannot be located next to the track 
 which it governs ; the arrangement of the uprights determines as to what track 
 or tracks the signals control, for a bracket post often relates to more than one track. 
 The following diagram illustrates a few of the different arrangements of signals : 
 
 P 
 
 1 
 
 P 
 
 ^^ 
 
 No. 1 would be placed next to a pair of tracks, on both of which trains run- 
 ning in the same direction are controlled. 
 
 No. 2 is that which is used where one track intervenes between the post and 
 the track which is signaled ; the dummy upright stands for the unsignaled track, 
 and usually carries a blue light at night. 
 
 No. 3. Here three tracks are involved; the middle upright is a dummy for 
 the middle track, while the outside uprights signal trains running in the same direc- 
 tion on the outside tracks. 
 
 No. 4. On this arrangement the dummy upright indicates that the track next 
 to the post is not signaled while trains running in opposite directions on the other 
 two tracks are signaled. 
 
 The parts of these posts are illustrated on Plates 49, 50 and 51. 
 
 to; 
 
PLATE 49. 
 
 !7 
 
 20 
 
 P 
 
 18 19 21 22 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 27 
 
 26 
 
 !6 
 
 29 
 
 O 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 io8 
 
Main Line Semaphore Fittings. 
 
 PLATE 49. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Distant SiGiXAL Blahk. j 
 
 ,- In orderintj state what casting on Plates 50 and 5:') it is to fit. 
 
 2. Home Signal Blaj.k. \ * "^ 
 
 *3. Ring, for Nos. 1, 4, 7 and 8. 
 
 *4. Ring, for Nos. 2, 5 and 6. 
 
 *5. Plain Ring. ) 
 
 - For No. 3. 
 "■"6. Filleted Ring. \ 
 
 *7. Weighted Ring, for No. 4 ; used only when the casting is operated by wire. 
 
 *S. Plain Ring. ^ 
 
 *9. Double Filleted Ring. [- For No. 7, when used as a station block signal. 
 
 *10. Weighted Ring. J 
 
 *11. Bagk Light Rlng, for No. 9 ; give diameter of the glass which it is to cover. 
 
 ^12. Piece ue Glass, for any one of the castings; made in all sizes and colors. 
 
 *13. Seaiaphoke Bearint;, in ordering state which one of the castings it is to fit; used onl}' 
 when there is no back light. 
 
 14. Semaphiire Shaft. ) 
 
 '- For No. 16. 
 l,^. Bolt and Nut, }i"xS". ) 
 
 *lCi. Semaphore Bearing, in ordering state which one of the castings it is to fit ; used only 
 in connection ^\'ith a back lii-dit. 
 
 * 
 
 17. Stud, 78"n3^", for vertical signal rod on No. 7. 
 
 18. Washer, 7s". ) 
 
 ■ For No. 17. 
 
 19. Split Cotter, -i/'xiy^". ) 
 
 *1'0. Stud, 34^"x23|", for vertical signal rod on Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, G and 8. 
 21. Washer, 3^;". 
 
 22 
 *2P, 
 
 *■' 
 
 -X- 
 
 • For No. 20. 
 Splli Cotter, -.iV xiy^". ) 
 
 '). Bolt and Nut, y^"x2", for fastening ring to lower hole in No. 7. 
 
 24. BoL'i' and Nu'i l'l"x]7''s", for fastening ring to No. 1, and to upper hole in No. 7. 
 
 ii). Bolt and Nu'i', J4^"x15/8", for fastening rings to upper holes on Nos. f) and (\. 
 
 ■■26. Bolt and Nt:t, ^i" x ]lA" , for fastening rings to Nos. 2, 8, 9, and lower holes on Nos. 
 5 and 6, 
 
 27. Bolt and Nut, '^'".vl^l", for joining Nos. 8 and 9. 
 
 28. Bolt and Nut, ^4"n1", for joining Nos. ,"> and 6. 
 
 29. Bolt and Nu'i", 3y"xli<", for fastening Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 30. Washer, 34", for No. 14. 
 
 31. Washer, }i" , for No. 1.3. 
 
 32. NuT, 34", for No. 14. 
 
 * The references in the text are to the semaphore castings on Plate 50. 
 
 109 
 
PLATE 50. 
 
 no 
 
Main Line Semaphore Castings. 
 
 PLATE 50. 
 
 In ordering Nos. 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8, state whether a round or square shaft hole is 
 required. For fittings see Plate 49. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Ordinary Single-Lkiiit Castixc, (ijj" glass. 
 
 2. Special Singi^e-Light Casting, 83 x" glass. 
 
 3. Block-Station Casting, with ring for glass. If the ring is wanted it must be ordered 
 
 separately (see Nos. 5 and <! Plate 49), i^}^" glass. 
 
 4. Block-Statiox Casting, 6^4" glass. 
 
 5. Right-Haxu Two-Light Casting, ^3 y" glass. 
 Left-Hani> Tw(.)-Light Casting, 83 ,s" glass. 
 Pennsvia'ania Company Three-Positkjn Casting (see Plate 45), 6^4" glass. 
 
 8 Chicago & Northwestern R'y Castin(; (see Plate 46), fii^" glass. 
 
 Back-Light Casting. In ordering state which one of the above castings it is to be 
 used with, and the size of the glass that it will require. 
 
 1 1 1 
 
PLATE 51. 
 
 :^(> 
 
 46 
 
 o 
 
 47 
 
 o 
 
 48 
 
 o 
 
 48 
 
 o 
 
 50 
 
 52 51 
 
 I 
 
 54 
 
 53 
 
 55 
 
 56 
 
 57 
 
 M 
 
 58 
 
 59 
 
 60 
 
 61 
 
 112 
 
Main Line Semaphore Post Fittings. 
 
 PLATE 51. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. 
 
 9. 
 
 o 
 O. 
 
 4. 
 5. 
 6. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 n. 
 12. 
 
 13. 
 14. 
 1.5. 
 16. 
 17. 
 18. 
 19. 
 20. 
 
 21. 
 22. 
 23. 
 24. 
 25. 
 26. 
 27. 
 28. 
 29. 
 30. 
 31. 
 32. 
 33. 
 34. 
 
 Piece of Ladder. ) 
 
 J o ( Give leno^th required. 
 
 Ladder biAV. ) ^ ^ 
 
 Bracket, for semaphore lamp. 
 
 Bracket, for indicator lamp. 
 
 Counterweight. Give weight required. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 5^^"xS}4", for No. 5. 
 
 Adtustable. 
 
 Right Angle. 
 
 Sio-nal cranks. 
 
 Bases, for Nos. 7 and 8. 
 
 Counterweight Lever Base, made in different sizes. 
 
 Pin, for No. 11. 
 
 Counterweight Lever, used with pipe connected signals. 
 
 Counterweight Lever, used with wire connected signals. 
 
 Guide, for vertical signal rod. 
 
 Clamp, for No. 15. 
 
 Link, adjustable, used with mechanical slot, jaw pins 5/s"xl3/l". 
 
 Vertical Signal Rod, jaw pin 5/^"xl5/^", eye ->^". Give length required. 
 
 Rod, for indicator lamp shield, jaw pin }4"xl", eye H". Give length required. 
 
 Rod, for indicator, jaw pins S/8"xl5/^" and >^" x 1". Give length required. 
 
 Indicator. ^ 
 
 Arm. 
 
 Base. 
 
 Stud, for No. 23. 
 
 Shield, for indicators and for indicator lamp. 
 
 Bracket, for No. 25. 
 
 Trunnion, for raising lamp shield. 
 
 Hand Rail. ) 
 
 Guy Rod and Nuts. ) 
 
 Bolt and Nut, -v<"x25". ) 
 
 Bolt and Nut, -^''^uy/'. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 34"x2>^" for No. 37. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, >^"x8", for No. 39. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 54"x9", for No. 42. 
 
 113 
 
 ^ Relating to indicators only 
 
 Give length required. 
 For No. 41. 
 
 1- Relating to Bracket Post only 
 
 J 
 
No. 
 
 35. 
 
 36. 
 37. 
 38. 
 39. 
 40. 
 41. 
 42. 
 43. 
 44. 
 45. 
 46. 
 47. 
 48. 
 49. 
 50. 
 51. 
 52. 
 53. 
 54. 
 55. 
 56. 
 57. 
 58. 
 59. 
 
 60. 
 61. 
 62. 
 
 MAIN LINE SEMAPHORE POST FITTINQS.— (Continued.) 
 
 Bolt am) Nut, 3/^"x13", for corners of post and] 
 for No. 37. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 5/s"x\4:%", for No. 40. 
 
 Brace, for chain wheel. 
 
 Wedge Washer. 
 
 SociCET, for No. 28. 
 
 Strut, for No. 29. 
 
 Knee Brace. 
 
 Upper Fastening. 
 
 Lower Fastening. 
 
 Platfokji Bracket. 
 
 Balance Lever, for bracket post. 
 
 PLATE 51. 
 
 ■ Relating to Bracket Post only. 
 
 For No. 29. 
 
 Washer, 
 
 n 
 
 for Nos. 30 and 31. 
 
 Washer, l", for Nos. 9 and 10. 
 
 Washer, l" special, for No. 24. 
 
 Washer, S/^" special, for No. 27. 
 
 Shackle, 5,s". for Nos. 14 and 45. 
 
 Turned Pin, 5/s"x15/s", for jaws on No. IS and left hand of No. 20 and for No. 50. 
 
 Split Cotter, jV^lji" for Nos. 27 and 51. 
 
 Turned Pin, i^"x1" for jaws on No. 19 and right hand end of No. 20. 
 
 Split Cotter, -ij'xl", for No. 53. 
 
 Split Cotter, 3V"x2>^", for No. 12. 
 
 Split Cotter, fV'xli^" for Nos. 9, 10 and 24. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, ^{"xl". for ladder end of No. 2. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 3-g" x2j/l", for fastening platform to No. 44. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, ]%" xV^J' , for ends of Nos. 13, 14 and 45, and for joining Nos. 15 and 
 16 and Nos. 25 and 26. 
 
 Lag Screw, lA" x^iyi" , for fastening Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 26 to post. 
 
 Rivet, ^/^^" xV%' , for joining Nos. 21 and 22. 
 
 Rivet, Y^" xXi/jJ' , for fastening No. 27 to No. 18. 
 
 PLATE 52. 
 
 View of tracks and signals at the Jersey City Terminal of the Pennsylvania 
 Railroad. 
 
 Particular attention is called to the location of the starting signals, each of 
 which is placed directly over the track that it governs. Other views of this place 
 are shown on Plates 67, 70, and 95. 
 
 114 
 
PLATE 53. 
 
 115 
 
PLATE 53. 
 
 40 41 
 
 ii^ ta4 
 
 O O m 
 
 60 Ei 
 
 42 43 44 
 
 ■19 50 51 
 
 56 37 
 
 ^2 6 3 64 
 
 o 
 
 66 
 
 ii6 
 
Iron Main Line Semaphores. 
 
 PLATE 53. 
 
 T^HESE posts are most frequently used on elevated tracks, but are adapted to 
 almost any kind of work. The post, with indicators, may carry six indicators, 
 
 as shown in the illustration, but by adding to the base (No. 32) a much larger 
 
 number may be used. 
 
 The two-arm post may also be built with only one arm. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Piece uf Ladder. 
 
 2. \^ERTiCAL SiGXAL RoD. Thcsc two cnds are joined by a piece of 3_j;" pipe. 
 
 3. Balaxxe Levek. 
 
 4. Weight. In ordering, specify whether a 10, 14, 17, 2(», 30 or -to lb. weight is 
 desired. 
 
 5. Bolt and Nut, S/g'xSy,", for fastening No. 4 to No. 3. 
 
 6. Semaphore Casting. For the wooden blade used with this casting see Plate 49. 
 
 7. Ring, for No. 6. 
 
 5 J 
 
 I I 8. Ring, for No. 9. 
 
 '■-' j 9. Back Light Casting. 
 
 10. Semaphore Shaet. Used on a post without indicators. 
 
 11. Lamp Bracket, 
 
 12. T<jp Bearing. 
 
 13. Piece of 4" Pipe, of which the post is formed. 
 
 14. Guide, for No. 2. 
 1^1.5. Ladder Stay. 
 
 ( l(). Indicator Rod Guide, for Nos. 20 and 21. 
 
 ! 17. Bracket, for No. 18. 
 
 18. Ixdicator Shield. 
 
 ?. i 19. Ixdicator. 
 
 20. Screw Jaw. | When joined by a piece of ^4" pipe, Nos. 20 and 21 form the indi- 
 
 21. Rigid Jaw. ) cator rod. 
 
 22. Shield Arm. 
 
 23. Indicat(jr Arm. 
 
 24. Semaphore Shaft. INIade in different lengths, according to the number of 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 Indicators. 
 
 25. Indicat(.)r Lever. 
 
 26. Shaft, for No. 25. 
 
 27. LocKiN<; Bracket. 
 
 28. Left-hand Stand. ) 
 
 ,- For No. 27. 
 
 29. Right-hand Stand. ) 
 
 30. IMoTiox Plate. 
 
 31. Pin, for joining Nos. 3 and 32. 
 
 32. Base. 
 
 117 
 
IRON MAIN LINE SEMAPHORES. -(Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 53. 
 
 g (' See No. 10. 
 
 £ . ' 83. Back. ) 
 
 Pi 
 
 o, p- ,, r Intermediate bearing; used only in repairs. 
 »| ; .35. Bolt and Nut, 5/s"x254", for joining Nos. 33 and 34. 
 
 pi 
 
 1^ I 36. IXTERMEDIATE BeARIXC;. 
 
 S I 37. Pix, for joining Nos. 3 and 38. 
 
 ^ i, 38. Base. 
 
 39. Washer, }i"~2", for Nos. 10 and 24. 
 
 40. Washer, ^"~l%", for No. 41. 
 
 41. Stud, li"x2i4", for connecting No. 2 to No. 6. 
 
 42. Turned Pin, 5/s"x}5.i", for jaw on No. 2. 
 
 43. Split Cotter, i^/'xiys", for Nos. 41 and 42. 
 
 44. Split Cotter, -fi;"x2A^", for fastening Nos. 31 and 37. 
 
 45. Nut, 34;" diam., for end of Nos. 10 and 24. 
 
 46. Bolt, yi" x\" , for fastening No. 1 to No. 12, and for fastening Nos. 11, 12, 
 
 17, 33 and 36 to No. 13. 
 
 47. Bolt and Nut, Y^" x\y%" , for fastening end of No. 15 to No. 1. 
 
 48. Carriage Bolt and Nut, 3g"xli,<", for fastening wooden blade to No. 6. 
 
 49. Bolt and Nut, 3/8"x1^4". for clamping No. 15. 
 
 50. Bolt and Nut, 3.y"xl", for clamping No. 16. 
 
 51. Bolt and Nut, J4"xlf<", for fastening No, 7 to No. 6, and No. 8 to No. 9. 
 
 52. Bolt and Nut, 1-4" x 3.:^", for fastening No. 17 to No. 18. 
 
 53. Washer, I'-lv^", for No. 24. 
 
 54. Washer, S/s'-la-s", for No. 63. 
 
 55. Filling Piece, made of l^" pipe, for taking up space on No. 26, where casting 
 
 No. 32 is too wide for the indicators carried on the post. 
 
 56. Locking Dog. Fits into No. 27. 
 
 57. Bolt, %" x\z/^\ for fastening Nos. 28 and 29 to No. 32. 
 
 58. Bolt, 3,s"x1I/4", for fastening No. 27 to Nos. 28 and 29. 
 
 59. Bolt and Nut, 3 «" x 2", for No. 16. 
 
 60. Split Cotter, V8"x1", for Nos. 62 and 63. 
 
 61. Si'LiT Cotter, i^' x\l{^\ for No. 24. 
 
 62. Turned Pin, yi" xW^' , for Nos. 20 and 21. 
 
 63. Stud, 5/s"xl3s", for end of No. 25. 
 
 64. Roller, 5/s"-1", for No. 63. 
 
 65. Rivet, )-{" xy^" , for fastening No. 18 to No. 22, and No. 19 to No. 23. 
 
 PLATE 54. 
 
 This plant forms a part of a large system of Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking 
 and Block Signaling that has been recently put in service on the Chicago & North- 
 western R'y. 
 
 iiS 
 
PLATE 54. 
 
 ng 
 
PLATE 55. 
 
 2 3 24. 
 
 I20 
 
Illuminated Semaphores. 
 
 PLATE 55. 
 
 T^HIS is a most excellent device, since by its use signaling is made perfectly 
 consistent, and a position signal is provided both by night as well as by day. 
 The lamp is placed on the post, back of the semaphore, from whence the rays of 
 light are projected against the corrugated reflector (No. 5), and then out, approxi- 
 mately at right angles with the face of the blade, through the slender opening 
 plainly visible in Figs. A and B. The result is a clear beam of light, which, unlike 
 that of the ordinary night signals, cannot be confounded with anything else ; and 
 more important still, the color of the light does not change when the glass is broken. 
 
 A. Combined Illuminated Semaphore, with ordinary glass in tlie casting. This maj' also 
 
 be arranged with only one glass in the casting if so desired. 
 
 B. Plain iLLUiiiNATED Semaphore. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Galvanized Iron Back. 
 
 2. Round Iron Clamp with Nuts, for joining Nos. 1 and 7 to No. 12 or No. 13. 
 
 3. Semaphore Blade. 
 
 4. Right Angle Reflector, for carrying light from lamp to glasses in No. 13. 
 
 5. Corrugated Reflector, for back of No. 3. 
 
 6. Plain Reflector, for No. 7. 
 
 7. Elbow. 
 
 8. Elbow Ring. 
 
 9. Semaphore Bearing, for Fig. B. 
 
 10. Lamp Bracket. 
 
 11. Se.aiaphore Bearing, for Fig. A. 
 
 12. Semaphore Casting, for Fig. B. 
 
 13. Semaphore Casting, for Fig. A. 
 
 14. Ring, for No. 13. 
 
 15. Shaft and Cotter, for Nos. 9 and 11 (to support Nos. 12 and 13). 
 
 16. Shaft and Cotter, for Nos. 12 and 13 (to connect with vertical signal rod). 
 
 17. Washer, for No. 16. 
 
 18. Bolt and Nut, 3/^" xl -):(", for fastening No. 7 to Nos. 12 and 13. 
 
 19. Tap Bolt, Y^" x /'s", for joining Nos. 9 and 10. 
 
 20. Bolt and Nut, }{"xliY"> ^or joining Nos. 3 and 7 to No. 12 or No. 13. 
 
 21. Carriage Bolt and Nut, ^^^''xli^;", for fastening No. 3 to No. 12 or No. 13. 
 
 22. Bolt and Nut, ^"x-y^", for fastening No. 14 to No. 13. 
 
 23. Machine Screw, 14:" x 12-32, for fastening No. 8 to No. 7. 
 
 24. Wood Screw, #4, for fastening No. 1 to No. 3. 
 
 121 
 
PLATE 6< 
 
 122 
 
The Dwarf Signal with Indicators, and the One=Arm 
 
 Dwarf Signal. 
 
 PLATE 56. 
 
 T^HE DWARF SIGNAL WITH INDICATORS is still in considerable use on 
 
 the older roads in the New England States, and is therefore shown here as 
 left-handed ; we, however, make it right-handed as well. It is also made with any 
 number ot indicators up to and including (>. An ingenious arrangement in the base 
 of this signal automatically locks all of the other mdicators in their normal position 
 when one of them is exposed. 
 
 The One-Arm Dware Signal is now used almost universally and, owing 
 to its simplicity, cheapness and reliability, bids fair to supplant all other kinds. It 
 is very low, and since it always has applied to it the rubber blade and disc, may 
 be placed at any point where two cars can pass, without being liable to damage. 
 A concealed spring in the head will carry the arm to danger should any of the 
 post connections be ruptured, while the horizontal spring below the post will per- 
 form the same office, almost always without aid from the back wire. By simply 
 turning the head on the post, and connecting the vertical rod to the other side, 
 the wires may be led up to the post from either of the four quarters. 
 
 We manufacture other styles of dwarf signals, but the ones shown we consider 
 typical, and best adapted to the two principal systems of signaling which respectively 
 use or dispense with route signals. 
 
 The parts of these two signals are illustrated on the following page. 
 
 123 
 
PLATE 57. 
 
 36 
 
 3 7 
 
 38 39 40 
 
 
 4 3 4 4 
 
 46 
 
 4 8 4 9 
 
 o o 
 
 50 
 
 51 
 
 o o 
 
 52 53 
 
 54 
 
 55 
 
 7 8 79 
 
 80 
 
 3-- 83 
 
 ^"4 fc'5 3g 
 
 87 as 
 
 89 
 
 90 
 
 94 
 
 • 
 
 D 
 
 124 
 
Dwarf Signal with Indicators. 
 
 PLATE 57. 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 2. Bearing, for semaphore. 
 
 3. Brace, for shield. 
 
 4. Clamp, for shield support 
 
 5. Bracket, for lamp. 
 
 6. Motion Plate. 
 
 7. Lock Casing. 
 
 8. Leg, left-hand, for lock casing. 
 
 9. Leg, right-hand, for lock casino-. 
 
 10. Indicator. 
 
 11. Opal Glass, for indicator. 
 
 12. Arm, for indicator. 
 
 13. Sejiaphore Ring. 
 
 14:. Semaphore Blade (rubber). 
 
 1.5. Clip, for blade. 
 
 16. Semappiore Casting. 
 
 17. Backlight Casting. 
 
 18. Ring, for backlight casting. 
 
 19. Arm, for shield. 
 
 20. Shield, for indicator. 
 
 21. Signal Post, 2}<" pipe. 
 
 22. Screw Jaw, 5,<i^"xl5/s" pin, for semaphore rod. 
 
 23. Vertical Rod, x^" diam., eye 5,'^", for semaphore. 
 
 24. Screw Jaw, '/^''^xl" pin, for indicator rod. 
 
 25. Rod, j4" diam., small jaw }4" xiy^" pin, for indicator, 
 
 26. Spring, for motion plate. 
 
 27. Balance Lever. 
 
 28. Pin, 1"x7", for balance lever. 
 
 29. Bolt and Nut, 5/$" k'.'>j,4", for counter weight. 
 
 30. Counterweigiit, 10 lbs. 
 
 31. Lever, for indicator. 
 
 32. Semappiore Shalt, varies in length according to the number of indicators. 
 
 33. Spiaet, 3/|" diam., for indicator levers. 
 
 34. Tap Bolt, }4"x7i", for lamp bracket. 
 
 35. Tap Bolt, yi" ^l]4", for fastening lock casing legs. 
 
 125 
 
No. 
 
 36. 
 37. 
 38. 
 39. 
 40. 
 41. 
 42. 
 43. 
 44. 
 45. 
 46. 
 
 47. 
 
 48. 
 49. 
 50. 
 51. 
 52. 
 53. 
 54. 
 55. 
 
 DWARF SIGNAL WITH INDICATORS. -(Continued.) 
 
 Tap B(jlt, 3 8"xli.^", for fastening lock casino-. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 3y^" xlj4", for fastening shield support and clamp. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, J;4"x3^", for stopping counterweight. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, ^i" ^ "g", for fastening back light ring. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, y^"x\", for fastening semaphore ring. 
 
 PLATE 57. 
 
 Pin, %' 
 Pin, 5/8' 
 Pin, %' 
 Pin, 5/8'' 
 Pin, 5/8' 
 Bushing 
 
 xl", for screw jaw No. 24. 
 
 xl5/8", for screw jaw No. 22. 
 
 xlVa", for jaw No. 25. 
 
 xl/", for driving semaphore casting No. Ki. 
 
 xl/", for indicator lever No. 31. 
 
 /" diam., for indicator shaft No. 33 ; this varies in length, depending on the 
 number of indicators. 
 
 Roller, tV'xI", for lever pin No. 45. 
 
 Bushing, 3//'x/", for separating indicator arms No. 12. 
 
 Bushing, /"x3/8", for separating indicator arm No. 12 from semaphore casting No. 16. 
 
 Washer, 5/8", for pins No. 44 and 45, and semaphore shaft No. 32. 
 
 Washer, /" special, for semaphore shaft No. 32. 
 
 Split Cotter, tV"-n3" for balance lever pin No. 28. 
 
 Split Cotter, /"xl/", for pins Nos. 42 and 44, and for shafts Nos. 32 and 33. 
 
 Split Cotter, JV"x1", for pins Nos. 41, 43 and 45. 
 
 Lock Piece. 
 
 Single Arm Dwarf Signal. 
 
 56. Co.MBiNED Base and Post Casting. 
 
 57. Bearing, for semaphore. 
 
 58. Lamp Bracket. 
 
 59. Bearing, for crank. 
 
 60. Crank. 
 
 61. Backlight Ring. 
 
 62. Backlight Casting. 
 
 63. RuiiBER Dlsc. 
 
 64. SEiiAPHORE Casting. 
 
 65. Clip, for blade. 
 
 66. Semaphore Rint;. 
 
 67. Semaphore Blade (rubber.) 
 
 126 
 
SINGLE ARM DWARF SIQNAL.-(Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 57. 
 
 68. Semaphore Shaft. 
 
 69. Spring, for semaphore shaft. 
 
 70. Roller St.wd. 
 
 71. Double Luo., for motion rod. 
 
 72. Spring Plape, for motion rod. 
 
 73. Vertical Rod, i," diam., 5 x" eye, for semaphore. 
 
 74. Screw Jaw, ^2" ^ l'^^" pin, for semaphore rod. 
 
 75. Spring, for motion rod. 
 
 76. Motion Rod. 
 
 77. DRiviNci Pin, for motion rod. 
 
 78. Tap Bolt, ^4" ^l/i", for bottom of lamp bracket. 
 
 79. Tap Bolt. ^ 2" ^1^ s". for top of lamp bracket. 
 
 80. Tap Bolt, ^^/'xl", for fastening crank bearing. 
 
 81. Tap Bolt, v/'xyg", for setting crank bearing. 
 
 82. Bolt and Nut. 3,s"x2". ) 
 
 ,- For double lug No. 71. 
 
 83. Bolt and Nut, 3 8"x13,::^". ) 
 
 84. Bolt and Nut, ^4"x1", for fastening semaphore and backlight rings and rubber blade 
 
 and disc. 
 
 85. Split Cotter, V8"xiy8", for semaphore pin, backlight pin and roller shaft. 
 
 86. Split Cotter, 3^V"x1", for screw jaw. 
 
 87. Clip, for rubber disc. 
 
 S8. Washer, special, 5's", for semaphore and backlight pins. 
 
 89. Se.maphore Pin. 
 
 90. Rivet, y^" x-2^i", for driving pin No. 77. 
 
 91. Backlight Pin. 
 
 92. Bottom Roller, for stand. 
 
 93. Top Roller, for stand. 
 
 94. SiiAFT, 5/s" X ?>j4", for roller stand. 
 
 95. Tor.shjn Block, for semaphore spring. 
 
 127 
 
PLATE 58. 
 
 \j^^|f 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 IK 
 
 >-4 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 
 19 
 
 21 
 
 128 
 
Self Compensating Pot Signal and Low Pot Signal. 
 
 PLATE 58. 
 
 A. Self CoMPENSATiNt; Pot Sk;nal. — This signal has in times past been widely used, and 
 
 there is still some call for it ; there is no direct connection between the head 
 and the counterbalance lever which operates it, and a considerable latitude is 
 therefore possible in the stroke of the mechanism. This fact renders it possible 
 to operate the signal by wire. 
 
 B. Low Pot Signal. — It is intended that this signal shall be connected directly with a 
 
 side track switch or derail where the unimportant character of the location does 
 not seem to warrant the expense of a separately controlled signal. It is the 
 smallest of all signals as shown, but may be built higher if desired. 
 
 < 
 
 < 
 
 S o t, 
 
 Sao 
 < sm 
 
 H O 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Head. 
 
 2. Weic;ht. 
 
 3. Bolt and Nut, y's" ^?>/4", for fastening weight to counterbalance lever. 
 
 4. Counterbalance Lever. 
 
 5. Double Shackle. 
 
 6. Turned Pin, 1" x 5", for supporting counterbalance lever. 
 
 7. Split Cotter, y:l"^2}4", for fastening pin No. 6. 
 
 ' 8. Steel Siiaet, 1^8"x1^K"' ^'^ which head No. 1 is supported. 
 
 9. Base. 
 
 10. Roller. 
 
 ' n. Set Screw, y."xl", for fastening head No. 1 to shaft No. 8. 
 
 12. Tap Bolt, ^" x 1", for holding shaft No. 8 in place. 
 
 13. Bolt and Nut, yl"yi-y4.", for end of counterbalance lever. 
 
 1 14. Turned Pin, 5/^" xlS/s", and cotter, jii" ^ I'^/s", for fastening double shackle. 
 
 f 15. Tap Bolt, l-g" x 3-^", for fastening vanes to heads. 
 
 I 
 
 [ 10. Inside Vane. 
 
 ! 17. Outside Vane. 
 
 18. Dowel Pix, I/2"x-/^"> for fastening head No. 19 to shaft No. 20. 
 
 19. Head. 
 ^ 20. Shaft. 
 
 21. Cast Iron Bearing, for shaft No. 20. 
 
 22. Base. 
 
 129 
 
PLATE 59. 
 
 130 
 
Lamps. 
 
 PLATE 59. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND LETTER. 
 
 A. Square Semaphore Lamp, N. Y. C. & H. R. R. R. 
 
 B. Round Semaphore Lajip, one of the styles used on the Pennsylvania R. R. 
 
 C. Distant Signal Lamp, Chicago & Northwestern R'y. 
 
 D. Semaphore Lamp, ^''xV" square, left-hand. 
 
 E. Square Semaphore Lamp, sliding door. 
 
 F. SouARE Semaphore Lamp, swine door. 
 
 G. Round Semaphore Lamp, sliding door. 
 H. Round Semaphore Lamp, swing door. 
 
 I- ) These lamps are used either for switch targets or for our Electric Banner Signal. 
 J_ { They are interchangeable and have the same socket. 
 
 K. ) Pot Signal Lamps, — They differ principally in the method of fastening them to the 
 L. \ pot signal. 
 
 M. Main Line Semaphore Reflecting Lamp. 
 
 N. Dwarf Signal Reflecting Lamp. 
 
 O. Indicator Lamp. 
 
 P. Illuminated Semaphore Lamp. 
 
 ^M 
 
PLATE 60. 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 ^1 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 t 
 
 18 
 
 132 
 
Lenses and Burners. 
 
 PLATE 60. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. CoNXAVE C(_irrl'i;atel) Lens, b" diam. 
 
 2. Plain Glass, made in all sizes and colors. 
 
 3. Concave Corrugated Lens, b%" diam. 
 
 4. Flat Corrugateh Lens, 5" diam. 
 
 5. Concave Corrc(;a'it-:i> Lens, ,j" diam. 
 
 6. Bull's Eve, 2" diam. 
 
 7. Convex Corkucated Lens, fio s" diam. 
 
 8. The Leader Burner and CHIMXE^^ 13 g" wick. 
 
 9. The X. L. Burner .vxd Chiaixia', ."i ,\" wick. 
 10. Perfection Burner axd Chrmnev, 1" wick. 
 IL Zenith N(_). 2 Burner, l" wick. 
 
 12. Zenith No. 1 Burner, 5-j.;" wick. 
 
 13. American Diaaiond Bi;kner, 5 .s" wick 
 
 14. Dresser Burner, 5 ^" wick. 
 
 15. COLLENDER BuRXER, 5 ,s" wick. 
 
 16. Savage No. 1 Burner, 5 y" wick. 
 
 - In ordering state the color that is required. 
 
 - No chimney. 
 
 133 
 
PLATE 61. 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 CVl 
 
 iC^ 
 
 '34 
 
Standard Cabin for Saxby & Farmer Improved 
 
 Interlocking Machine. 
 
 PLATE Gl. 
 
 T^HIS style of cabin is the result of many years practical experience in the inter- 
 locking field ; it combines cheapness with convenience, stability and appear- 
 ance. By the use of the outside stairway the available space both on the first and 
 second floors is greatly increased, while the outside door of the lower floor may 
 be kept locked, and the room used as a store-room. The foundation timbers of 
 the " lead-out " here form the first floor, and since no trap doors are possible or 
 necessary the parts directly beneath the machine are always open to inspection 
 and adjustment. 
 
 A. Vertical Section through the lower door. 
 
 B. Vertical Section through the lower rear corner. 
 
 C. Vertical Section through the lower front corner. 
 
 D. Vertical Section through the upper floor and lower part of upper windows. 
 
 E. Vertical Section through the eaves. 
 
 F. Horizontal Section through the upper windows and corner post. 
 
 135 
 
PLATE 63. 
 
 136 
 
Two Special Forms of Cabins. 
 
 PLATE G3. 
 
 T^HESE cabins are intended for large plants, and may either of them be built of 
 
 wood, iron, brick or stone. 
 
 The overhanging cabin is intended to be placed between tracks where the 
 space is limited ; such a cabin may be seen on Plate 37. 
 
 The ba)' \vindow provides a place for the train director of a large terminal, who 
 is surrounded by his instruments, and is enabled to see in each direction. An 
 application of this idea will be found on Plates (',7 and 120. 
 
 1 ->,: 
 
PART II. 
 
Table of Contents. 
 
 PART II. 
 
 THERE IS AN ALPHABETICAL INDEX IN THE BACK OF THE BOOK. 
 
 How TO Order, ......... 
 
 Interlocking Machine, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Interlocking Machine, Mechanical, Photograph of, in Cat.in 
 
 Jersey City Terminal, Pennsylvania Railroad, View of Interlocking Machine in Cabin, 
 
 Switch Valve and Cylinder, Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking, 
 
 Jersey City Ter.minal, Pennsylvania Railroad, View of Tracks and Signals 
 
 Patents, Electro-Pneumatic System, ......... 
 
 Double Point Switch and Lock Movement, Electro-Pneumaitc, 
 
 Signal Valve and Cylinder, Electro-Pneumatic, ...... 
 
 Signal Circuit Breakers, Electro-Pneumatic, ....... 
 
 Signals, Electro-Pneumatic, ........... 
 
 Push Button Machine, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Central Railroad of New Jersey, Automatic Block Signals, 
 Direct Acting Electro-Pneumatic Switch A^alve and Cylinder, . 
 Condensing Appliances, ............ 
 
 Storage Batteries and Governing Devices, ....... 
 
 Electric Generator, ............ 
 
 Switches for an Electric Current, ......... 
 
 Automatic Engine, ............. 
 
 Pipe Fittings for Electro-Pneumatic System, ....... 
 
 Switch Lock, Electro-Pneumatic, .......... 
 
 Philadelphia Terminal, Philadelphia & Reading Railroad, View in Train Shed 
 Slot, Electro-Pneumatic, ........... 
 
 Slot, Electric, .............. 
 
 Patents Relating to Electric Signaling, .... ... 
 
 Tools for Electric and Electro-Pneumatic Work, ...... 
 
 Electrical Testing Instruments, .......... 
 
 Wires, Electric Conducting, ........... 
 
 Circuit Breakers for Switches and Signals, ....... 
 
 Philadelphia Terminal, Pennsylvania Railroali, View of Tracks and Signals 
 Trunking for Wire and Pipe, Oak Stake and Guide for Pipe, 
 Automatic Block Signaling, Description of, . . . 
 Battery Housings and Relay Box, ..... 
 
 Track Circuit, Parts Relating to, ..... 
 
 Union Electric Banner Signal and Union Electric Target Signal, 
 Union Electric Disc Signal, ..... 
 
 Stewart Avenue, Chicago, Plan of Tracks and Signals, 
 
 Union Lock and Block System, 
 
 Union Block Instrument, Parts of. 
 
 Union Electric Lock, Parts of. 
 
 Electric Lock for Stevens Machine. 
 
 Relays, ...... 
 
 Philadelphia Terminal, Pennsylvania Railroad, Arrangement of Instruments in C 
 
 at 17th and 31st Streets, 
 St. Louis Union Terminal, Plan of Tracks and Signals, 
 Boston Terminal, Boston & Maine Railroad, View of Interlc 
 Lightning Arresters and Circuit Controllers, 
 Union Depot, Kansas City, Plan of Tracks and Signals, 
 Multiple Push Button Instrument, 
 Drop Indicator, 
 Disc Indicators, 
 Semaphore Indicators, 
 Train Describing Instruments, 
 Track Instrument, . 
 
 iCKiNG Machine, 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 141 
 
 142 to 155 
 
 147 
 
 151 
 
 150 to 162 
 
 150 and 213 
 
 163 
 
 164 to 171 
 
 172 to 175 
 
 170 and 177 
 
 178 to 185 
 
 180 to I'M 
 
 101 
 
 192 and 193 
 
 194 and 195 
 
 106 and 197 
 
 198 and 199 
 
 200 and 201 
 
 202 and 203 
 
 204 and 205 
 
 206 to 208 
 
 209 
 
 210 to 212 
 
 214 to 216 
 
 217 and 261 
 
 218 to 220 
 
 220 and 221 
 
 222 and 223 
 
 224 to 226 
 
 227 and 273 
 
 228 and 229 
 230 to 234 
 
 234 and 235 
 
 236 and 237 
 238 to 248 
 
 240 and 241 
 
 249 
 
 250 to 253 
 
 254 to 257 
 
 258 to 260 
 
 262 and 263 
 264 to 284 
 
 277 
 
 281 
 
 285 
 
 286 to 290 
 
 291 
 
 292 and 293 
 
 294 to 290 
 
 290 to 301 
 
 300 to 305 
 
 300 to 311 
 
 312 and 313 
 
 140 
 
How to Order. 
 
 to' 
 
 e 
 
 1 N ORDERING material for repairs, if single parts only are needed, they will be 
 found illustrated on the Plate devoted to the arrangement to which they belong 
 while on the page or pages following a descriptive list is given If a stuffing 
 box for the Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking Switch Cylinder is wanted, it should b 
 ordered as "No. 4, Plate 71," which is all the description that is needed, since 
 only one kind of stuffing-box is made for the Switch Cylinder. A Main Cylinder, 
 however (see the note at the top of page 161), is made in several sizes, and the 
 order in that case must read " No. 1, Plate 71, 6" inside diameter," or whatever 
 size is needed. 
 
 It would ha\-e been impossible to describe all of the combinations of parts, 
 but we are able to promise that anyone wishing to order certain assemblages, such 
 as an "Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking Switch Cylinder with valves complete" may 
 do so in the coniidence that all of the parts naturally belonging to that combination 
 will be sent. 
 
 To order successfully, state the number of the part, the Plate on which it is 
 illustrated, and, if it is made in more than one form, give the particular kind that 
 is wanted; also state whether the shipment is to be made by express or freight. 
 
 In a field so new as signaling is in this country, it follows that a considerable 
 amount of experimenting will be done, and during the life of The Lhiion Switch & 
 Signal Company many devices have been tested, which, on experience, have been 
 considerably altered or abandoned for something better. We do not illustrate or 
 describe any of these original forms, but beg to assure our patrons that the patterns 
 are kept in stock and that we shall take pleasure in filling orders for any broken 
 or worn-out parts, upon being furnished Avith an adequate description, or the part 
 which it is desired to replace. 
 
 Our facilities for shipment are unusually complete, owing partly to our loca- 
 tion, which is eight miles east of Pittsburg, directly on the line of the Pennsylvania 
 Railroad and in close proximity to the Baltimore & Ohio and Pittsburg cv Lake 
 Erie Railroads. 
 
 We have a private telegraph office in our works, the address of which is 
 SWISSVALE, Pa. 
 
 141 
 
PLATE 63. 
 
 142 
 
The Electro=Pneumatic Interlocking Machine. 
 
 PLATES G.3 AND 64. 
 
 "T^HE forces at work in the electro-pneumatic interlocking system are, as the 
 name implies, electricity and compressed air, the former being used to control 
 the latter, which is derived from compressors that are located at some convenient 
 point. The external appearance of the machine that contains the levers is shown 
 on Plate 63*, a view looking directly down upon the machine on the upper part 
 of Plate 6-i, and a rear elevation of the machine showing what is commonly called 
 the spring combination on the lower part of Plate (34, 
 
 The row ot upper levers that appear in elevation on Plate 6o, and in plan 
 on the upper half of Plate 64, are called the switch levers, and serve to make and 
 break the circuits that connect the main battery with the switch valves (described 
 on page 157). The row of lower levers are called the signal levers, and make and 
 break the circuits that connect the main battery with the signal valves (described 
 on page 173). Both the switch and signal levers move from left to right and vice 
 versa; but the switch levers have only two positions, the one on the left being 
 called normal, the one on the right, reversed; the normal position of the switch 
 levers corresponds to the position of the switches as shown on the plans of tracks, 
 Plate 110, etc.; the reversed position of a lever, to the other position of a switch. 
 As regards the signal levers the case is cjuite different, for each of these levers has 
 three positions, the one in the centre being normal and both of the others reversed. 
 It is therefore possible to operate several signals which may govern trains running 
 in different directions, from the same lever, with a considerable reduction in the 
 number of levers in a machine as the result; the normal position of the signal 
 lever, which is vertical, corresponds to the horizontal (danger) position of the signal, 
 while a signal lever which has completed its movement either to the right or the 
 left will be followed by an inclined (safety) semaphore on one of its respective 
 signal posts. Connected with each signal and switch movement is a circuit breaker, 
 from which wires are run, each to a magnet (No. 47, Plate 66), which by means 
 of its armature stem, operates the latches (Nos. 30, 31, 32, Plate 6(')). The function 
 of these latches is to delay the final completion of a lever's throw until after the 
 signal or switch shall have reached its extreme position; their application may be 
 seen on the bottom and top edges respectively of the upper and lower halves of 
 Plate 64 ; the method of placing the switch indication box is shown on Plate 72 
 {see also Nos. 36 and 37, Plate 73), and of the signal circuit breaker on Plate 75 
 (see also Plate 100). 
 
 * This machine is located at the Union Station, St. Louis, Mo. 
 
 143 
 
PLATE 64. 
 
 144 
 
THE ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC INTERLOCKING MACHINE.-(Continued.) 
 
 PLATES 68 AND (U. 
 
 By preventing- a lever from reaching- its extreme position until the switch or 
 signal that it controls has previously completed its movement, the interferences 
 established by the interlocking- are maintained and all of the other levers involved 
 in the combination are kept locked fast until such time as the lever that is being- 
 moved has completed its course. To each of the levers is attached one end of a 
 horizontal shaft, which runs from the front to the back of the machine, and has 
 fastened to its other end, first a beveled gear, that eng-ag-es with another beveled 
 gear, fastened to the upper end of a vertical shaft on the back of the machine ; 
 and, second, the cjuadrant which engages with the indication latch above mentioned; 
 the c^uadrants and beveled gears are illustrated on Plate (iH, Nos. 20 to i'5, where 
 it will be seen that, in the case of the signal levers, the (piadrant and beveled gear 
 form two pieces, while with the switch levers these parts are combined in one piece, 
 bipon the horizontal shafts are also mounted small pinions, which work in racks 
 formed on the under side of the interlocking bars and drive the bars back and forth 
 with the niovement ot a lever; just above the lever shafts are placed the brackets 
 that contain the cross locks, as well as the interlocking bars, both of which lie in 
 the same horizontal plane. 
 
 We shall not give a detailed description of the work performed by the inter- 
 locking (which, except that it is only half the size, is exactly the same as that 
 used upon the Saxb)' & Farmer Improved Machine), but must content ourselves 
 with saying that its object is to prevent the movement ot any lever until certain 
 other levers are in certain specified positions. The relation which exists between 
 the indication latches, the levers and the interlocking is now established, since they 
 depend upon the same shaft, and any movement of it will involve all three. 
 
 The vertical shafts. No. 5it, Plate (i(i, are encased in hard rubber rollers that 
 bear on their surfaces the semi-circular contact bands, No. luy, Plate Gb ; on a 
 hard rubber base. No. H, Plate fi6, are mounted the angular contact springs, Nos. 
 no to 115, Plate (mS, whose ends project outward, and depending on the position 
 of the rollers, touch either their surfaces or the various semi-circular bands that they 
 carry. The appearance of this part of the n-iachine may be seen on the lower half 
 of Plate «4. At one end of the machine the angular springs are all connected with 
 the main battery; at the other end they separate and go to the several switch, lock 
 and signal magnets. If now, in any combination, one ot the rollers should happen 
 to be in the wrong position, the contact between the semi-circular and angular 
 springs would be broken and no current would reach the magnet ot that line from 
 the battery ; this provides a perfect check on the action of the mechanical inter- 
 ns 
 
THE ELECTRO=PNEUmATIC INTERLOCKING MACHINE.— (Continued.) 
 
 PLATES 63 AND 64. 
 
 locking which has been described as controHing the movement of the levers, and 
 
 these two features form a remarkable safeguard airainst any troubles which mi^rht 
 
 &' 
 
 arise from ignorant or careless interference. 
 
 We have now given a general description of this machine, which the space 
 at our disposal forbids us from extending, but it would not be well to dismiss the 
 subject entirely without calling attention to some of the extraordinary results that 
 have been secured by its use. It is economical in the highest degree from a main- 
 tenance stand-point, since even with the largest machines, such as those illustrated 
 on Plates 63, 67 and 126, it has never been necessary to employ more than one 
 lev^erman at a time, and in no case has this man ever been pushed to an extremity. 
 This arises from the very slight exertion required to mo\'e the levers, and the 
 promptness with which the apparatus at the switches and signals responds to the 
 impulses that are transmitted to it from the main battery, a promptness which it 
 will be easily seen is not affected by the distance from the cabin at which these 
 parts may be stationed. This makes it possible to operate signals and switches 
 at any convenient distance, since the effort required to move a lever does not vary 
 with the amount of apparatus connected with it, as is the case with ordinary 
 mechanical machines. The reduced size and weight of the machine also recom- 
 mends it for use at large terminals where the available space is apt to be limited. 
 
 The separate parts are illustrated on Plates 66 and 68. 
 
 PLATE 65. 
 
 This Plate illustrates the usual internal appearance ot a cabin that contains 
 a mechanical lever machine of large size. From four to six men at a time are 
 necessary for throwing the levers, and they, as may be seen, are dressed in over- 
 alls and wear heavy leather mittens. Compare this Plate with Plate 67, which is 
 from a photograph of an Electro-Pneumatic Machine that performs about the same 
 amount of work, and is operated by one leverman. 
 
 The difference in the kind and amount of labor performed by the operators 
 is very apparent. 
 
 146 
 
PLATE 65. 
 
 147 
 
PLATE 66. 
 
 p 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^^#^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 W 
 
 n^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 f«PK« 
 
 r^ 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 -- 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 ■^ . 
 
 ^ V 
 
 
 V . . 
 
 <^" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iCS^ 
 
 
 F 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 l;li3 14 
 
 !9 2 
 
 I 
 
 24 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 ]j (14) 
 
 il7 ,g« 20 25M. 
 
 28 
 
 34 
 
 35 36 
 
 # 
 
 lililliiill'SJ'V .'.. 
 
 32 
 
 4 4 
 
 46 
 
 CCS 
 
 KsaiEJ* 
 
 -^ 
 
 ■ 47 
 
 II 
 
 €>■* 
 
 48 
 
 I oainmiiBniK 
 
 ? 
 
 52 
 
 feteiSfa S3 
 
 ar" 5 7 
 
 SB 
 
 I 
 
 I 59 
 
 64 
 
 65 
 
 62 
 
 63 
 
 148 
 
Eiectro=Pneumatic Interlocking Machine. 
 
 LARGE PARTS. 
 
 PLATE 66. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Anisle Iron (dift'trent lengths), for joining the legs No. ',) longitudinally. 
 
 2. CiiANNKi, Iron (different lengths), for supporting the rubber plate, No. 11. 
 
 3. Front Pl.\tk. 
 
 4. Back Plate. 
 
 5. MiDOLE Beakinc. 
 (i. Column. 
 
 7. Intermediate Bar, for stiffening machine transversely. 
 
 ,s. Rubber Roller Bearinc;. 
 
 y. Leg. 
 
 10. Table Br.vcret. 
 
 n. Rubber PL.\rE, for contact strips. 
 
 12. Binding Post Board. 
 
 18. Long Switch Lever. 
 
 14. Short Switch Lever. 
 
 15. Latch, for long switch lever. 
 
 16. Latch, for short switch lever. 
 
 17. Brass Washer, for No. IS. 
 
 18. Switch Le\er Handle. 
 
 19. Signal Lever. 
 
 20. Signal Quadrant. 
 
 21. Signal Le\'lr Handle. 
 
 22. Brass Washer, for No. 21. 
 
 23. Mitre Gear, for signal shaft No. 53. 
 
 24. Switch Quadrant and Mitrl Gear. 
 
 25. Mitre Gear, for No. 57. It runs in Nos. 23 and 24. 
 
 26. Switch Lever Nu.mi:i;r. Black figure. 
 
 27. Signal Lever Nu.\ir.i;R. Red figure. 
 
 28. Switch Levicr Seg.mI'-.nt. 
 
 29. Indication Lat(Ti Bracket. 
 
 30. Long Switch iNDicA'rioN Lat< ii. 
 
 31. Short .Switch Indication Latch. 
 
 32. Signal Indication Latch. 
 
 33. Support, for track model. 
 
 34. Circuit Shifter Bar, extends the whole length of the machine. 
 
 149 
 
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC INTERLOCKING MACHINE. LARQE PARTS.— (Continued.) 
 
 No. 
 
 35. 
 3(i. 
 37. 
 
 3y. 
 
 39. 
 40. 
 41. 
 42. 
 43. 
 44. 
 45 
 
 46. 
 
 47. 
 48. 
 49. 
 50. 
 51. 
 52. 
 53. 
 54. 
 55. 
 56. 
 57. 
 58. 
 59. 
 60. 
 61. 
 62. 
 63. 
 64. 
 65. 
 
 PLATE 66. 
 
 Mica Insuj.atiox. ) 
 Fir.RE Insui.atk IX. ^ 
 CiKcurr Siiii'TKR Base. 
 
 For No. 34. 
 
 ;- For No. 37. 
 
 Phosphor ISroxzi-; Coniact Dlsc. 
 
 Cn<cuiT Shikter Ckaxk. 
 
 CiRciHT Shii'ter Arm, with fibre point. 
 
 Short Si'Rix(;. 
 
 L(iX(; Si'RixTG. 
 
 Akarvture. 
 
 Ar^rvture Stem and Nut. This piece is made in three lengths to go with either Nos 
 30, 31 or 32. 
 
 JAW, for joining No. 45 to either Nos. 30, 31 or 32. 
 
 Macnet. 
 
 Magnet Bushing. 
 
 Nut, for No. 48. 
 
 Locking Bar Bracket, 
 
 Locking Bar (made in different lengths). 
 
 L(jCKiNG Driver. 
 
 Signal Lever Shaft. 
 
 Switch Lever Shaft. 
 
 Collar, for No. 54. 
 
 Support, for No. 11. 
 
 Extension Piece, for No. 59. 
 
 Collar Clamp, for joining Nos. 57 and 59. 
 
 Rubber Roller axd Shaft. 
 
 Rubber Base, for signal circuit breaker. | These are made both as a 1-way and 5-way. 
 
 Brass Ground Strip, for No. 60. \ ^ l-^ay is shown. 
 
 Phosphor-Bronze Contact Spring, Platinum Point. ) 
 
 „ ^ „ ^1 For No. 60. 
 
 Pliosph(_)R-Bronze Contact Spring, Platinum Disc. ) 
 
 Iron Strip, for supporting No. 12. 
 
 Cf.ivER, for No. 50. 
 
 PLATE 67. 
 
 A view of the Electro-Pneumatic Machine in service at the Terminal of the 
 Pennsylvania Railroad at Jersey City. One man only is required to operate this 
 machine. 
 
 A train director sits in the bay window surrounded by his instruments. 
 
 Other views of this place are shown on Plates 52, 70 and 95. 
 
 150 
 
PLATE 67, 
 
 151 
 
PLATE 68. 
 
 8 
 
 m 
 
 9 
 
 15 
 16 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 40 
 
 to 
 
 17 
 18 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 41 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 19 
 20 
 
 14 
 
 21 
 
 26 
 
 I 
 
 3« 
 32 
 
 .33 
 
 42 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 45 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 46 
 
 55 
 
 65 
 
 56 i 57 
 
 J 
 
 58 59 ji ■ 60 61 
 
 62 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 50 
 
 51 
 
 52 
 
 53 
 54 
 
 63 1 64 
 
 f 75 
 
 fee I 67 ? 68 69f fro 71 1 72! 73? 74! 
 
 I 76 |77 |78 79 80 O 81 | 82 © ^^ 
 
 8 8 -B^a:^ 
 
 90 91 
 
 107 
 
 04 @ 85 #86 ® 88 
 
 ST" OMWWO 89 
 
 96 
 
 r" f 
 
 92 93 ™ 
 
 101 ^q2 
 
 106 
 
 an @ 
 
 .ymu^ 
 
 116 
 
 152 
 
Electro=Pneumatic Interlocking Machine. 
 
 SMALL PARTS. 
 PLATE 68. 
 
 Note. — Where no particular reference is made to any Plate in the text below it is to 
 be understood thac Plate 6S is intended. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 1 to I'.T inclusive. Different forms of LoCKiNf; Drios. In ordering, state whether they 
 are to be 3 ,s" or fV" thick. 
 
 2H. Sample Cross Lock, 3^"xi'i^". This part must usually be specially made for the 
 place it is to fit. 
 
 1*7. Trunnion. State whether it is to carry one or two tappets. 
 
 28 to 33 inclusive. Different forms of Tatpets. 
 
 34. End Le\er, for transmitting the motion from the switch lever quadrant to the 
 track model. 
 
 3.5 to 38 inclusive. Different forms of Levers, for track model connections. 
 
 39. BiNDiNi; Post, for main controlling circuits. It fits onto No. \-2, Plate (i6. 
 
 40. Binding Post and Screw. (This was formerly used in the place of No. 39. It 
 
 should be ordered only for repairs of machines built previous to January, 
 LS94.) 
 
 41. BiNDiNi; Post and Screw, for Nos. 34 and flO, Plate H6. 
 i-2. Sprino, for No. 43. 
 
 f 43. Slee\e, for No. 19, Plate Rfi. 
 
 44. Pin, for No. 43. 
 
 4.5. Pin and Nut, for Nos. 13 and 14, Plate fi6. 
 
 46. Guide .Screw, for Nos. If) and K;, Plate 66. 
 
 47. Cap Screw and Nut, 3,^" xl^^,", for fastening No. 7 to No. 5, and No. 7 to No. 
 
 9, Plate t]P,. 
 
 48. Cap Screw and Nut, .^x" x I", for fastening No. 2 to No. 9, Plate 66. 
 
 49. Cap S(.rew and Nut, '_,."x1", for clamping No. 58, Plate i\(}. 
 
 50. Cap Screw and Nur, '4"x3,/,.", for clamping No. 52, Plate (56. 
 
 5L Cap Scriav, 3, m" x -^-+". for fastening No. 1 to No. 9, and No. 2 to No. 8, Plate 66. 
 
 52. Cap Scpew, 3,x"x2'/4", for fastening No. 29 to No. 4, Plate i\(\. 
 
 53. Machine Screw, 3s" x -^4". for fastening Nos. 3 and 4 to No. 7, Plate 66. 
 
 54. Rivet, l4" x "x", for fastening No. 64 to No. 2, and for joining two pieces of 
 
 No. 1, Plate 66. Rivets are used on one end of a piece, and screws on 
 
 the other. (See No. 57.) 
 5.5. Machine Screw, 3^;" x 1 2-;'.2, for fastening No. 12 to No. 64, Plate 66. 
 56. Machine Screw, 58"x10-24, for fastening No. 92, Plate 68, to No. 52, Plate 66. 
 
 ^53 
 
S ) 
 
 
 ELECTRO'PNEUMATIC INTERLOCKINQ MACHINE, SMALL PARTS.— (Continued.) 
 
 No. PLATE 68. 
 
 '57. Machine Screw, 5/^s" x i4;"-20, for joining two pieces of No. 1, Plate (ifi. Screws 
 are used on one end of a piece and rivets on the other. (See No. 54. ) 
 
 58. Taper Screw, li's" x li>-;:12, for fastening Nos. 23 and 25 to Nos. 53 and 57, 
 Plate GG. 
 
 5;>. Taper Screw, 1x-§"x 12-32, for fastening No. 20 to No. 53, and No. 24 to No. 
 54, Plate 6(). 
 
 GO. Set Screw, 14" x 10-24, for fastening No. 55 to No. 54, Plate G6. 
 
 61. Set Screw, i4;"xS-32, for fastening No. 43, Plate GS, to No. 10, Plate 06, and 
 
 No. 21, Plate GO, to No. 44, Plate 68. 
 
 62. Machine Screw, 1i/8"x6-32, for fastening Nos. 30, 31 and 32 to No. 29, Plate 66. 
 
 63. Machine Screw, 1"x 12-32, for fastening track model board to No. 33, Plate 66. 
 
 64. Machine Screw, 78"x2-60, for fastening No. 103, Plate 68, to track model 
 
 board. 
 
 i\^. Machine Screw, 34;" x 12-32, for fastening No. 11 to No. 2, Plate 66. 
 
 66. Machine Screw, i^"x 12-32, for fastening No. 28 to No. 3, Plate 66. 
 
 67. Machine Screw, ;^^"x 10-32, for fastening No. 37 to No. 34, Plate 66. 
 
 68. Machine Screw, 3,8"x12-32, binding screw for No. 39, and for fastening No. 56 
 
 to No. 11, Plate 66. 
 
 M.\ciiine Screw, 5/^" x 12-32, for fastening No. 50 to Nos. 3, 4 and 5, Plate 66. 
 Machine Screw, 3.3" x 6-32, for fastening No. 46 to Nos. 30, 31 and 32, Plate 66. 
 1. Machine Screw, -i\" x 6-32, for fastening Nos. 61 and 63 to No. 60, Plate 66. 
 
 72. Machine Screw, ;^|"x6-32, for fastening No. 65 to No. 50, and for clamping 
 
 No. 41, Plate i\i\. 
 
 73. Machine Screw, ]/{." ^4:-b'>., for fastening Nos. 99 and 100 to Nos. 34, 35, 36, 37 
 and 38. 
 
 74. Machine Screw 3./^" x 4-40, for lug on No. 24, Plate 66. 
 
 75. Machine Screw, ;^4;"x4-40, for setting Nos. 35, 36, 37 and 38 on No. 104, also 
 
 for top of Nos. 79 and 98. 
 
 76. Wood Screw, 3/j^"-#9, guide for spring on No. 34. 
 
 77. Woui) Screw, 3/^"-#3, for fastening Nos. I(l9, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116 
 
 and 117 to No. 11, Plate 66. 
 
 78. Wool) Screw, j^"-#G, for fastening No. 39. 
 
 79. Screw Pivot, for Nos. 34, 35, ;i(; and 3S. 
 
 SO. Nut, %"-^\2, for No. 3S, Plate GG, and No. 4(», Plate 68. 
 
 81. Rivet, t\;"x.>,s", for No. 89. 
 
 82. Washer, f,/'- .-;'/' for No. 39. 
 
 83. Washer, ],{■"-%", for No. 38, Plate 66, and No. 40, Plate 68. 
 
 84. Washer, i\"-]i", for No. 38, Plate 66. 
 ,^5. Washer, t\"-i'o", for No. 38, Plate 66. 
 S6. Copper Washer, ia"-j/8", for No. 75. 
 
 J 54 
 
 69 
 7(1 
 
 h 
 i 
 
h 2 
 o 
 
 
 ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC INTERLOCKING MACHINE, SMALL PARTS.-(Continued.) 
 '^°- PLATE G8. 
 
 87. Brass Roii.kr, for No. 40, Plate CO. 
 
 88. Pin, for Nos. 87 and li;>,, Plate Cs, (Used also as a key for Nos. 40 and 41, 
 
 Plate ()(').) 
 
 89. Spring, for Nos. 1 .r) and IG, Plate CO. 
 yO. Pix, for Nos. 18, 14 and 25, Plate CO. 
 
 91. Ri\'KT, for Nos. 1 to LT) inclusive, and for No. 27. 
 
 9-2. Key, for No. ri2, Plate 00. 
 
 9o Key, for Nos. 15 and Ki, Plate CO. 
 
 94. RuiiiiER BusHJXc, W-]4": for No. 88, Plate 00. 
 
 95. RuuiiER Bushing, %" -^k'', for No. 87, Plate 00. 
 
 90. Rui;i;er Point, %''xj4", for No. 08, Plate CO. 
 
 97. Rur.r.KK Bushing, i4"-3,s", for No. 98. 
 
 98. Binding Post, for No. 47, Plate 00. 
 
 99. ) 
 
 ( Connecting rods (any lengrth), for Nos. 34, 35, 30, 87 and 38. 
 1(10. ) ^ \ J b /^ ' - - 
 
 101. Sleeve, for joining two pieces of No. 100. 
 
 102. Staple, for cruidinsf Nos. 99 and 100. 
 
 103. Piece gf Track used on Model. If the part wanted is to be movable a special 
 
 hole must be drilled in the end to receive No. 1(»4. 
 
 104. Shaft, on which is mounted a piece of No. 103, and either of Nos, 35, 30, 37 
 
 or 38. 
 
 105. Spring, for No. 104. 
 
 100. Support, for fixed pieces of No. 103: mounted on No. 04. 
 
 107. Resistance Coil, made with resistance = y^,, 1 or 2 ohms, therefore specify which 
 
 is required. 
 
 108. Copper Wire, in gutta-percha insulation; any length. 
 ri09. Band, for No. 59, Plate 06. 
 
 110. Spring, for alternate rollers. ) 
 
 C Signal circuits. 
 
 111. Spring, for adjacent rollers. ) 
 
 112. Valve Magnet Sprinc; 
 
 , For switch movement circuit. 
 113. Lot K Magnet Spring. 
 
 r FoRiMs OF Springs, for signal circuits. 
 
 114. 
 115. 
 
 110. LoN(;nuDiNAL Strii', made in two thicknesses, #21 and #24, Brown & Sharpe 
 gauge. 
 
 117. Cross Strip. 
 
 155 
 
PLATE 69. 
 
 1^6 
 
Eiectro=Pneumatic Interlocking- Switch Valve and 
 
 Cylinder. 
 
 PLATE 69. 
 
 T^HE arrangement illustrated in section and plan on the opposite page is the 
 
 medium through which a switch or movable frog is controlled and operated 
 from an Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking Machine. The device is connected with 
 the machine by three electric wires, one going to each of the magnets ; the pressure, 
 which is constant in the valve chamber, is derived from the main air pipe through 
 a branch -^4 " pipe, while its presence on one side or the other of the main cylinder 
 is directed by the relative positions of the two outside magnets, which lie upon 
 either side of the lock magnet. 
 
 The lock magnet acts as a check upon the performance of the outside or 
 valve magnets ; the valve is an entirely independent part, which is always touched 
 by, but not fastened to, the valve pistons on each side of it. 
 
 The operation is briefly as follows, the lever of the interlocking machine 
 being in one of its extreme positions : 
 
 A slight movement of the lever forms an electric circuit through the lock 
 magnet, which when excited opens the lock exhaust, and permits the air pressure 
 to raise the lock piston, and consequently the lock pin from its seat on the valve. 
 When the lock-exhaust port is closed the pressure remains the same on each 
 side of the lock piston, since there is an uninterrupted passage from the valve 
 chamber to the inside of the lock piston ; but the opening in the face of the lock 
 piston is much smaller than the exhaust port or the one connecting the valve 
 chamber with the lock cylinder, therefore, when the lock-exhaust port is opened 
 the escape of the pressure is more rapid from the inside of the lock piston than 
 its admission, which results m a preponderance of pressure on the face of the lock 
 piston, that overcomes the action of the large spring contained in the lock piston, 
 and continues so long as the lock-exhaust remains open ; the valve is now 
 released, and susceptible of being acted upon by the valve piston. As was 
 previously stated, the pressure is constant in the valve chamber ; it is also constant 
 in the passage from the valve chamber to the small space which contains a spring, 
 shown in section directly beneath the magnet on the right. From this space the 
 air is admitted to the valve cylinder by a small pin valve, which also controls the 
 exhaust, and is the extension of the armature stem. 
 
 To return to the interlocking machine ; a further movement of the lever 
 discharges one of the valve magnets, permitting the escape of the pressure from 
 
 157 
 
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC INTERLOCKING SWITCH VALVE AND CYLINDER.— (Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 69. 
 
 its relative valve cylinder, and excites the other valve magnet, admitting the 
 
 pressure to the valve cylinder on that side ; this operation results in the shifting 
 
 of the valve. During this part of the lever's movement the lock pin has been 
 
 raised, but upon a further progress of the lever the lock magnet is discharged, 
 
 the lock pin is forced out by the strong spring contained in the lock piston, and 
 
 upon the completion of the valve's journey, seats itself upon the other side, there 
 
 to remain until the whole process is repeated in the other direction. 
 
 The object of this combination is to hold the valve in a certain position 
 until all of the conditions are secured which make it proper that a change shall 
 take place ; in short, no movement of the valve can occur unless the lock magnet 
 is held charged through the electric contact on the interlocking machine. 
 
 The shifting of the valve results in alternately connecting the valve chamber 
 with one of the passages to the main cylinder, and in connecting the other passage 
 with the common exhaust. 
 
 The relation between the main piston and the device which is connected with 
 the track itself is illustrated on Plate 72. 
 
 The separate parts of the valve and cylinder are shown on Plate 71. 
 
 PLATE TO. 
 
 A general view of the tracks and signals controlled by cabins 1, 2 and 3 of 
 the Pennsylvania Raih-oad at jersey City. 
 
 This is an Electro-Pneumatic plant, and comprises both interlocking and auto- 
 matic block signals. Other views of the same installation are shown on Plates 52, 
 1)7 and !J5. 
 
 158 
 
PLATE 70. 
 
 159 
 
PLATE 71. 
 
 t 
 
 45 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 49 
 
 
 0^ 
 53 
 
 54 
 
 55 
 
 56 
 
 57 
 
 58 
 
 59 
 
 60 
 
 Gfii 
 
 61 
 
 6S 
 
 63 
 
 ^ 
 
 64 
 
 65 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 r6o 
 
Electro=Pneumatic Interlocking; Switch Valve and 
 
 Cylinder. 
 
 PLATE 71, 
 
 /^YLINDItRS arc made .V, i;" and cu" inside diameter, therefore in ordermg 
 Nos. 1, 2, 8, s, IH, 17, is, I'o and lM oi\c the diameter of cylinder which they 
 
 are to ht. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Mai\ Cvi.i\1)i:k. 
 
 ■2. Back Cvi.indkr Hkak. 
 
 0. Fk(i\t Cvi,im>i:k Hkah, 
 
 4. Stuffim; Bii\. 
 
 5. Jam Nut, for stufhnu^ box. 
 
 6. T Head B<mt am. Nit, '-"xl.^^" / 
 
 _ -T- D t" , /' i" I^"'' fastenino- cylinder heads to cylinder, 
 
 1. T Ai' Boi/r, '2 >; 1 '2 1 
 
 8. FiKKK Gasket, for cylinder lieads. 
 '.). TuKNEii Prx, for jaw No. ](). 
 
 10. Screw Jaw, for piston rod No. 1:.'. 
 
 11. Jam Nui, for screw iaw No. lo. 
 
 12. PiSTdX R(ii). 
 
 13. Leather PArKiN(,. 1 
 
 14. Spring. , For stuffing bo.x. 
 
 15. Cast Iron Busiiinc,. 
 
 16. Le.vther Packjn(,, for main piston No. LS. 
 IT. Main Pis'i'dx Rinc. 
 
 18. Main Piston. 
 
 19. Shee'I' Iro.n Washer, for main piston. 
 
 20. M.viN Pis ION F^i iiT.ow 1:1;. 
 
 21. Steer Sprinc; F()I,].(j\\ i-:i<, for main jfistcjn. 
 
 22. Switch VaiaI'; Seat. 
 2;-'). SwncH Vae\ 1-: Boon. 
 
 24. Brass Hex. N r r, for main pist(jn head, i\'o. 18. 
 
 25. Air Inlet. 
 
 26. Tar Buli, yi" >^-<y2", f<n- j(jinin- Nos. 1, 22 and 2M, 
 
 27. Yoke. 
 
 28. Tap Bolt and Ja.m Nut, j/'x2'4", for No. 27. 
 
 29. Head, for valve bod)' No. 2.'!. 
 
 30. Fibre Gasket, for end of xalve bod\\ 
 
 161 
 
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC INTERLOCKING SWITCH VALVE AND CYLlNDER.(Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 71. 
 
 31. FiijKi: Gasket, for packing valve seat and valve body Nos. 2:3 and 23. 
 
 32. Valve Piston. 
 
 33. Brass Follower. 
 
 34. Steel Slkini; F(.)Llowek. For valve piston. 
 
 35. Leather Packing. } 
 
 36. Cap, for lock cylinder No. 37. 
 
 37. Lock Cylinder. 
 
 38. Lock Piston. 
 
 39. Si'RiNCr, for lock cylinder. 
 
 40. Magnet. 
 
 41. Magnet Shield. 
 
 42. Armature. 
 
 43. Inside Magnet Cat. 
 
 44. Outside Magnet Cap. 
 
 Numbers 45 to (37 are much exaggerated in size when compared with numbers 1 
 to 44. 
 
 45. Armature Stem. 
 
 46. Pin Valve. 
 
 47. Spring, for pin valve. 
 
 48. Fibre Gasket, for air inlet No. 25. 
 
 49. Leather Packing, for inside of valve body No. 23. 
 
 50. Lead Gasket, for piston rod No. 12. 
 
 51. Lead Gasket, for ports in main cylinder No. 1. 
 
 52. Brass Washer, }^"-^/i", for binding screw No. 57. 
 
 53. Stueeing Box Bushing, for valve body No. 23. 
 
 54. Brass Bushing, for air ports in main cylinder No. 1. 
 
 55. RuiiLiER Bushin(;, for binding screw No. 57. 
 
 5(). L<oN Machine Screw, :^y"x8-32, for magnet case No. 40. 
 
 57. Bindin(; Screw, H'' -^ 1 2-32, for magnet No. 40. 
 
 58. Brass Taper Screw, ^"xI/^"-24, for plugging construction holes in valve body No. 23. 
 
 59. Brass Taper Screw', square head, 5s"x3,^"-18, for plugging oil hole in No. 2. 
 6<». Brass Taper Screw, square head, yV" xtc,''-18, for plugging oil hole in No. 3. 
 
 61. Brass Screw Hex. Head, guide for pin valve of cap No. 36. 
 
 62. Brass Screw, Square Head, guide for side pin valves. 
 
 63. Saddle. ) 
 
 C For valve seat No. 22. 
 
 64. Slide Valve. ) 
 
 65. Dust Strainer, for air inlet in valve body No. 23. 
 
 66. Brass Spring, for stuffing box bushing No. 53. 
 
 67. Packinc; Nut, for valve body No, 23. 
 
 162 
 
Patents Relating- to the Electro=Pneumatic System. 
 
 NAME. 
 
 GEO. WESTIXCIIOLSE, Jr., 
 
 H. TIEDEN AND F. S. (lUERIJER 
 
 H. TIEDEN 
 
 GEO. WESTINGIIOUSE, Jk 
 
 GEO. WESTINGHOUSE, Jk 
 
 GEO. WESTL\C;H0L'SE, Jk 
 
 GEO. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr 
 
 GEO. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr 
 
 0. GASSETT, . 
 
 O. GASSETT, Rr-issue, . 
 
 0. GASSETT, Re-issue, . 
 
 F. S. GUERP.ER, . 
 
 F. S. GUERKER, . 
 
 GEO. AVESTINGIiOUSE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WESTINGHOUSE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WES1'JN(;H0USE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WESTIN(;H0USE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WESTIN(;H0USE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WESTENGHOUSE, Jr., 
 
 GEO. WESTIN(;H0USE, Jr, 
 
 J. G. SCHR]<:UI)ER, 
 
 J. G. SCHki:Ul)ER, 
 
 GEO. WT<:STJN(;H0USE, Jr, and j. G, SGHREUDE 
 
 J. G. SCHREUDER, 
 
 j. G. SCHREUHER, 
 
 JOHN p. COEEMAN, 
 
 JENS G. SCHREUDER, 
 
 DATE. 
 
 Eebruarv 
 
 February 
 
 April 
 
 April 
 
 April 
 
 August 
 
 August 
 
 August 
 
 October 
 
 January 
 
 January 
 
 March 
 
 January 
 
 February 
 
 February 
 
 March 
 
 March 
 
 March 
 
 March 
 
 March 
 
 March 
 
 April 
 
 November 
 
 Januar\' 
 
 DeCEMI!ER 
 
 vR, February 
 July 
 July 
 
 SePTKAD'.I'.R 
 
 Skptei\h:er 
 
 1, 18SI 
 lo, 1S81 
 12, 1881 
 20, 1881 
 2(i, 1881 
 
 2, 1881 
 9, 1881 
 
 2:;, 1881 
 
 3], 1882 
 
 8, 1884 
 
 8, 1884, 
 
 6, 1883 
 
 20, 1884, 
 
 1, 1887 
 
 8, 188? 
 1, 1887 
 1, 1887 
 1, 1887 
 1, 1887 
 1, 1887 
 
 15, 1887 
 
 5, 1887 
 
 27, 1888 
 
 15, 1889 
 
 9, 1890 
 10, 18!il 
 
 19, 1892 
 
 20, 1892 
 18, 1S94 
 18, 1894 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 237,149 
 237,787 
 240,054 
 240,628 
 240,629 
 245,108 
 245,592 
 240,053 
 206,957 
 10,434 
 10,435 
 273,680 
 292,748 
 357,109 
 357,296 
 358,518 
 358,519 
 358,520 
 358,521 
 358,713 
 :!59,303 
 30(1,038 
 :!93,590 
 3'.I0,239 
 442,339 
 440,159 
 4:9,225 
 479,006 
 526,179 
 520,328 
 
 and others. 
 
 103 
 
PLATE 72. 
 
 
 i I'ri^ "Tum^, i" ^-^ 
 
 164 
 
The Double Point Switch and Lock Movement. 
 
 PLATE 73. 
 
 T^HE two arrangements illustrated on the upper portion of Plate 72 are the 
 •^ same in principle but differ in appearance, from the fact that the top one is 
 used at switches, and is a "simple" movement, while the bottom one, which is 
 designed for operating movable frogs, is what is known as a "tandem" movement. 
 The method of locking the simple movement is quite plainly shown in the part 
 of the plate already referred to, and in the lower part of the plate, which gives a 
 general idea of how the movement is located at a switch, and also shows the 
 appearance, in the upper right hand corner of the cover, that is used to protect 
 the movement from snow and dirt. The locking of the tandem movement is con- 
 cealed from view, but may be understood by referring to Nos. ho and 31, Plate 73, 
 which are built upon the slide bars, and when the movement is in one of its 
 extreme positions, enter slots that are cut out of the lock bar. 
 
 The method ot making the detector-bar connections is also shown on the 
 lower part of Plate 72. 
 
 The mode of operation is as follows : with the movement in its normal or 
 reversed position the detector bar will be lowered, the switch will be locked and 
 the roller No. 8, Plate 73, which is supported between the slide bars will rest 
 at the end of one of the surfaces on the crank No. 3, Plate 73. Upon a move- 
 ment of the slide bars the roller will at first be carried along the surface of the 
 crank without any effect upon the position of the switch ; at the same time the 
 detector bar will begin to rise and the lock will be ^vithdrawn. As soon as the 
 switch is unlocked it will begin to move and upon the completion of its journey 
 will be again locked, while the detector bar will have been lowered to its position 
 of rest at the other extremity of its stroke ; the return passage of the movement 
 takes place in exactly the same sequence. 
 
 Both the simjjle and tantiem movements are permanently connected with the 
 rails by a tie plate No. 11, Plate 74. 
 
 The indication box, Nos. 3(; and 37, Plate 73, which is referred to in the 
 description of the Fdectro-I^neumatic Machine, is shown on one end of each of the 
 movements on Plate 72. It is oj^erated by a small dog, No. s<.», Plate 73, which 
 is fastened to tlie upper slide bar of the movement, and which upon the completion 
 of its passage in either direction strikes a projection that is built upon the indica- 
 tion box slide bar. No. 108, Plate 73, forcing it along and making the temporary 
 contact necessary to operate the indication latches in the machine. An arrange- 
 ment of springs and levers in the indication l)ox prevents any movement of its 
 parts except when it is actuated by the dog, as above described. 
 
 A list of the parts will be found upon Plates 73 and 74. 
 
 i6s 
 
PLATE 73. 
 
 9. 
 
 93 
 
 
 8? 
 
 94 95 
 
 83 
 
 96 97 
 
 84 
 
 85 
 
 99 
 
 i08 
 
 110 112 
 
 (14 lis 
 
 36 87 
 100 10! 
 
 f 
 
 83 
 
 89 90 91 
 102 103 104 
 
 107 
 
 C ' 'C 
 
 109 ( 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 115 
 
 1)7 
 
 118 
 
 119 
 
 !20 122 124 126 
 
 121 123 125 '27 
 
 1 66 
 
Double Point Switch and LocI< Movement and 
 
 Relative Parts. 
 
 OS 
 
 PLATE 73. 
 SMALL PARTS. 
 
 ^„ ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 1. r.ASE. 
 
 ■2. Boi.T AM) Nut, --^"xlo", for fastening No. 1, Plate 78, to No. 1, Plate 74. 
 
 o. Switch Crank. 
 
 4. Switch Craxk Stud. 
 
 5. Side Rullek. 
 
 6. Stud, for No. ft ; used at locking end of No. 1. 
 
 7. Stcd, for No. 5 ; used at indication end of No. 1. 
 
 8. Oi'ERATixi; RoLEER ; bears against No. 8, and is placed between Nos. l;> and 14. 
 
 9. Stud, for No. S. 
 
 10. Lock Pin, with countersunk holes ; placed in center of No. 18. 
 
 11. Lock Pin, with plain holes; placed at end of No. 18. 
 
 12. Lug. Placed between and at each end of Nos. 18 and 14. 
 18. Top Seide Bar. 
 
 14. Bottom Seide Bar. 
 
 15. Straight Cap. Placed on indication end of No. 1, when no indication bo.\ is 
 
 used, and on one of the bases. No. 17, in a tandem arrangement. 
 
 10. Oee.set Car. Placed on indication end of one of the bases, No. 17, in a tandem 
 
 arrangement, when no indication box is used with the tandem. 
 
 17. B.\se. 
 
 1!S. Switch Crank. 
 
 1!). Switch Crank Stud. 
 
 20. BoET AND Nut, -}{l" ^6^4", for fastening locking end of No. 17, Plate 73, to 
 
 timber No. 1. Plate 74. 
 
 21. BoET AND Nut, X^" xi'/', for fastening indication end of No. 17, Plate 78, to timber 
 
 No. 1, Plate 74. 
 
 22. .Side Roeeek. 
 
 .Studs ' Used at locking end of No. 17. 
 
 24. I for 1 Used at indication end of No. 17, in connection with No. If). 
 
 I 
 
 25. j No. 22. Used at indication end of No. 17, in connection with No. 1(1 or No. 8('>. 
 
 2(1 Oi'ERAiixG Roeeer; bears against No. is, and placed between Nos. 32 and ,">8. 
 
 27. Stud, for No. 20. 
 
 28. Lu(;. Placed at each end of and between Nos. 32 and 3>."). 
 
 21). Strii', for joining locking ends of two Nos. 17, in order to form a tandem. 
 
 80. Urit:r Locking Peati:. Placed on No. 8,2. 
 
 81. Lower Locking Plate. Placed on N(x 8,;i. 
 
 82. Ui'i'ER Slide Bar. 
 88. Lower Seide Bar. 
 
 167 
 
DOUBLE POINT SWITCH AND LOCK MOVEMENT AND RELATIVE PARTS.— (Continued.) 
 
 No PLATE '73. 
 
 34. Rah, Brace. Made in many different sizes to suit the kind of rail. 
 
 35. Rail Brace Peate. Placed on the tie plate, No. 11, Plate 74, back of No. 
 34, Plate 73. 
 
 36. Inpicatkin Box. 
 
 37. Cover, for No. 3(1. 
 
 38. Washer, for Nos. 4 and IH. 
 
 39. Washer, for Nos. 2, 20 and 21. 
 
 40. Washer, for No. 46. 
 
 41. Washer, for Nos. 6, 23, 24 and 4S. 
 
 42. Piece oe Detector Bar. 
 
 43. Splice. 'j 4 bolts and 4 rivets are used in each of 
 
 44. Srlice am. r)RiviN(; Piece Combined, i' these. (See Nos. 86 and 95.) 
 
 45. Driving Piece. 
 
 « 46. Stud, for No. 45. 
 
 47. Rail Clip. This is made in many different sizes to suit the section of rail. 
 
 48. Stud. ) 
 
 I 
 
 49. Sliort Hook B(jlt and N l' r. ]- P"or No. 47. 
 
 i 
 
 ?■ 1 50. Long Hook Bolt and Nrr. I 
 
 51. Link. 
 
 52. Sprinc;. 
 
 53. Sprin(; Clamp. (One half on))- is shown.) 
 
 54. Cap, for No. 55. 
 
 55. Pipe Guide. 
 
 56. Eve Rod. /The driving rod is fonned of these two parts joined by a piece of 
 
 57. S(T<EW Jaw. \ 1" P'P^- 
 
 58. Adjustaple Link. This is used to connect the movement with the switch and 
 with the detector bar. 
 
 59. Rocking Sieve r Arm. 
 
 60. Piece ok Hexagonal Rocking Siiaei. 
 
 61. Bolt and Nut, i/l"x7", for joining Nos. 62, 63 and 68. 
 
 62. Cap, for No. 63. 
 
 63. Journal I^ox. 
 
 64. Intermediate Journal. 
 
 o 
 
 ) 
 
 < 
 
 X 
 
 3 
 
 u 
 
 O I 
 
 * J 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 o 
 i- 
 
 2 65. End Iournai. 
 
 < 
 
 Oi 
 
 66. Set Screw and Jam Nut, for No. 65. 
 
 H 67. Set Screw and [am Nut, for Xo. 59. 
 
 ^ 68. Plate, for No. 63. 
 
 69. Locking Bar, with adjustable jaw. 
 
 1 68 
 
DOUBLE POINT SWITCH AND LOCK MOVEMENT AND RELATIVE PARTS.~(Continued. 
 
 ^°- PLATE 73. 
 
 70. Fr()x\t Rod. 
 
 71. Lkkt-Hani> Foot. 
 
 72. Bolt axd Nut, 5,s"xl>3,s", for fastening Nos. 7] and 78 to switch rail. 
 7o. Rtc.ht-H.vnii Foot. 
 
 74. Turned Ptn, for Nos. 57, r)<S, BH and 7(), 
 
 75. Crank Stand. 
 7(). Pin, for No. 75. 
 
 77. " T " Crank. | 
 
 ^ -^ , In orderincr either of Nos. 77, 78 and 79, give the distance 
 
 ib. C<iMrENSA'nN(; Lkvek. 1.111 1 , 
 
 irom end holes to center holes. 
 
 79. Bell Crank. [ 
 
 8(». Dog, for operating No. 108, bolted to Nos. !?> and .">2. 
 
 SI. S(jUARE Head Rivet, for indication end of Nos. 32 and 38. 
 
 82. Square Head Rivet, for indication end of Nos. 1?> and 14. 
 
 88. Bolt and Nuts, j4"^'i}i". for locking end of Nos. 18 and 14. 
 
 84. Bolt and Nut, j4"x^/4", for joining Nos. 54 and 55. 
 
 S5. Bolt and Nut, ^3"x15/'8", for joining two pieces of No. 58. 
 
 86. liiiLT (Rivet Head) and Nut, for fastening one half of Nos. 48 and 44 to No. 42 
 
 (see No, 95). 
 
 87. Tap Bolt, :^^s"^H"' for No. 80. 
 
 88. Stud, for connecting No. 51 to No. 42. 
 
 89. Washer, :/l"-l%", for No. 8s. 
 
 90. Nut L(jrK, for Nos. 49, 50 and 72. 
 
 91. Ni:t Lock, for No. 61. 
 
 92. Rivet, ^" x 3>^", for joining Nos. 28, 82 and 88. 
 98. Rivet, r^"x2^", for joining Nos. 12, l.'! and 14. 
 
 94. Rivet, i^"x1><", for fastening No. 85, Plate 78, to No. 11, Plate 74. 
 
 95. Rhet, j4"x'iy:l", for fastening one half of Nos. 4:'. and 44 to No. 42 (see No. 86). 
 
 96. Rivet (Buttox Head), ^"xli^;", for fastening No. 45 to No. 42. 
 
 97. Rivet, i^"x1I/x", for fastening No. 10 to No. 18. 
 
 98. Rivet, 3 's" x 1 '4", for fastening Nos. 80 and 81 to Nos. 82 and 88, and for fastening 
 
 (Plate 74), No. 10 to No. n. 
 
 99. Si'Lit Cotter, ,'',,"x4", for fastening No. 76 into No. 75. 
 
 100. Split Cotter, :,''/' x 2 1/4", for Nos. 4 and 19. 
 
 101. Split Cotter, rV" x 1 34:", for Nos. 6, 28 and 24. 
 
 102. Si'LiT Cotter, i'n"xl3x", for Nos. 46 and 4s. 
 
 103. Split Cotter, ,\t"x1i^", for No. 74. 
 
 104. Split Cotter, ■i'^" xiys", for No. 88. 
 
 169 
 
< 
 
 DOUBLE POINT SWITCH AND LOCK MOVEMENT AND RELATIVE PARTS — Continued.) 
 
 No- PLATE 73. 
 
 105. Right-Hand Rubber Block, for contact sprinor. 
 
 100. Lkft-Hani) Rui'.bf.r Block, for contact spring. 
 
 i 1()7. RuiiBER Bl(.)CK, for wire inlet. 
 
 108. Slide Bar. 
 
 Q 109. Side Sbrinc,, for No. 108. 
 
 110. Top Plate. 
 
 111. Securing Strip, for No. 110. 
 
 112. Center Jaw, for No. 108. 
 
 113. Side Jaw, for No. 10;». 
 
 114. Contact Rciller, with rubber bushing. 
 o 115. Brass Hex. Nut, 10-32, for No. 123. 
 ^ 116. Hasp, for No. 37 
 
 117. Link. Fits into Nos. 108 and 112. 
 
 lis. Rigpit-Hand Contact Spring. 
 
 119. Left-Hand Contact Si>RiNf;. 
 
 120. Rivet, fV'x/s", for joining Nos. 30 and 37. 
 
 121. Dowel Pin, for joining Nos 112 and 117 to No. 108. 
 
 122. Brass Washer, aV'-iV", for No. 12G, 
 
 123. Stud, for fastening No. 114 to No. 108. 
 
 124. Square Head Screw, i<"x 12-32, for No. 110. 
 
 125. Machine Screw, 5,s"x12-32, for fastening- Nos. 105 and 106 to No. 36. 
 
 126. Machine Screw, p^'x 12-24, for fastening Nos. 118 and 119. 
 
 127. Machine Screw, A" x 8-32, for fastening No. 109. 
 
 LARGE PARTS. 
 
 PLATE 74. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Oak Plank, 4"x12", for supporting movement. State whether wanted for a simple or 
 
 tandem movement. 
 
 2. Cylinder Cover. 
 
 3. Lid, for No. 2. 
 
 4. Cover, for tandem movement. 
 
 5. Cover, for simple movement. 
 
 6. Casting, for lower end of Nos. 4 and 5. 
 
 i. 
 
 Cas'iing, for end of No. 2 that is joined to Nos. 4 and f 
 8. Castdng, for upper end of No. 2. 
 ',). Rim, for end of Nos. 4 and 5 that is joined to No. 2. 
 
 10. Switch Raw, Slh>e Plate. 
 
 11. Tie Plate:. 
 
 170 
 
PLATE 74. 
 
 171 
 
PLATE 75. 
 
 172 
 
The Eiectro=Pneumatic Signal Valve and Cylinder. 
 
 PLATE 75. 
 
 T^HE arrangement shown here is extremely simple, and is the one most com- 
 monly used on all main line semaphore posts, whether for interlocking or block 
 signaling, when the operating force is compressed air. In the case of interlocking, 
 the magnet is connected with the lever of an Ellectro-Pneumatic Machine, see page 
 143 depending upon the position of which it is excited or discharged. With a block 
 signaling plant the home signal magnet is connected with the track relay (see 
 description attending Fig. D, Plate I(i8), which performs the office of making or 
 breaking the circuit through the signal batterv. 
 
 The air from the compressors passes through the pipe marked "pressure," 
 following the course shown by the arrows until it reaches the chamber that encloses 
 a spiral spring, where it remains constant; from this point its course is controlled 
 by the position of the armature stem, which, when the magnet is excited, closes 
 the opening at its lower end, just below the passage marked exhaust; at the same 
 time it opens the port just above the spring and permits the air to follow the 
 passage on the right, downward, where it enters the cylinder and acts upon the 
 piston, that, through its rod overcomes the force exerted by the counterweight and 
 its lever (see Plate 78), and clears the signal. The discharge of the magnet 
 reverses the position of the valves, upon which the counterweight forces the piston 
 up and the air out through the exhaust passage with a danger signal as the result. 
 It is evident from this that a failure of the current or the pressure must have as 
 its effect a constant danger signal. 
 
 A list of the separate parts will be lound upon page 175. 
 
 173 
 
PLATE 76. 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 ©o6o 
 
 Si 
 
 36 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 35 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 il 40 I 
 
 174 
 
Parts of EIectro=Pneumatic Signal Cylinder. 
 
 PLATE 76. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Door. 
 
 2. Case. 
 
 ,S. Maonkt Cai'. 
 
 4. Maonkt Cii\i:k. 
 
 5. Vaia'e BoL)^•. 
 fi. CvLixnKK. 
 
 7. Air Inlet. 
 
 8. Eli;u\\, Six ia Dkorees. 
 
 9. Tap Bolt, ^^''xlU", for joining cylinder to case and valve body to cylinder. 
 
 10. Magxet Sill ell. 
 
 11. Armature. 
 
 12. Magnet. 
 
 13. Piston Head. 
 
 11. Piston Follower. 
 
 15. Turned Pin, 5,s"x178", for jaw No. 1(5. 
 
 IG. J.vw, for piston rod. 
 
 17. Piston Rod. 
 
 IS. Fibre Gasket, for cylinder. 
 
 19. Rubber Gasket, for lower inside face of cylinder. 
 
 20. Leather Piston Paokixo. 
 
 21. Steel Si'RIN(; Follower. 
 
 22. Armature Stem axd Nut. 
 2.3. Pin Valve. 
 
 24. Brass Slrino, for pin valve. 
 
 25. Bi\DiN(; Post Scriav and Jam Nut. 
 
 26. BiNDiN{; Post and Nut. 
 
 27. Brass Washer, f/'-^i", for binding- post. 
 
 28. Rubber Bushing, for wire holes in case. 
 
 29. Rubber Bushin(;, for binding post. 
 
 30. Maciiixe Scri;w, ^^"x12-.32, for ground wires on cylinder. 
 
 31. Brass Washek, ^''-'/i", for screw No. ,",(). 
 
 32. Circuit Breaker Pin and Nut, for jaw No. 1(1. 
 
 33. Dust Strainer, for air inlet. 
 
 34. Brass Rin(;, for dust strainer. 
 
 35. Dowel Pin, used between cylinder and case. 
 3P). Valve Plug. 
 
 37. Fibre Rin(;, for air inlet. 
 
 38. Split Cotter, -/^-''xS", for joining cover with case. 
 
 39. Brass Oil Plug. 
 
 40. Brass Air Bushing, for valve body. 
 
 175 
 
PLATE 77. 
 
 fc 
 
 ^J 
 
 E^ 13: 
 
 Ky??? 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^fe^£r 
 
 TW^ 
 
 G^U 
 
 P^MJa; 
 
 TBI 
 
 n 
 
 ^FUidt 
 
 
 H 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 Q 
 
 5 fr 
 
 09 
 
 |,0 
 
 14 
 
 ^^1 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 OS 
 
 176 
 
Electro=Pneumatic Signal Circuit Breal<ers. 
 
 PLATE 7 7. 
 
 A. Single Circuit Brkaki:k. 
 
 B. Double Circuit r)Ki':AKi:R. 
 
 C-H. Six Different Ari-;a\(;i;mi;n'is df Ci intact Srrincs. 
 
 Figures A and B are placed upon the bottom part of the c)'Hnder of an electro- 
 pneumatic semaphore signal, as may be seen by referring to Plate 75 ; they perform 
 substantially the same office as does Fig. C, Plate lOu, when used in connection with the 
 electro-pneumatic home signal. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base, for Fig. A. 
 
 2. Base, for Fig. B. 
 
 3. Thumb Screw, 3_^"x 10-32. ~] 
 
 i. Nut, %"-^2. ]^ P^or Nos. r> and 7. 
 
 5. Washer, i4"->^". j 
 
 6. BiNDixc; Post, with platinuni contact point; seen on left-hand in Figs. C, D and E. 
 
 7. Binding Post, without contact point ; seen in Figs. ¥, G and H. 
 
 8. Cap Screw, 3_|_" x -,"'/'-] s, for setting Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 9. Rubber Bushing, '^"-jy", for openings in legs of Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 lU. Rubber Di.iwee Pin, for adjustment of Nos. 11, 12, 13 and 14, to the legs of Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 11. Fibre Ln^uea'iu in, placed between the legs of Nos. 1 and 2 and Nos. 12, 13 and 14. 
 
 12. Shown in Figs. C and P'. '\ Different forms of Pikisbhek Bronze Gintact Sbrings; 
 
 13. Shown in Pigs. D and G. ]- in ordering state whether or not it is to be used 
 U. Shown in Figs. E and H. J ^^''^h the loop No. 15. 
 
 15. Shown in Figs. F, G and 11; Phosbher Bronze Lodr. 
 
 16. Fibre Insuea'i ion, for bottom of Nos. 12 and 14. 
 
 17. EscuTcnE(_)N Pin, for fastening No. IG. 
 
 18. Socket, for top of Nos. 13 and 14. ] 
 
 19. Bushing, for No. 18. 
 
 20. Rod that extends from the signal cylinder 
 
 down to Nos. 13 and 14. 
 
 See Fies. P), E, G and H. 
 
 177 
 
PLATE 'J 8. 
 
 178 
 
T 
 
 EIectro=Pneumatic Semaphore Signals. 
 
 PLATE 78. 
 
 HERE is here illustrated on a large and small scale the general method of 
 
 applying the signal cylinder, see Plate 75, and of connecting it with the 
 semaphore blade. 
 
 There are three general methods of mounting these signals, any one of which 
 is equally applicable to block signaling or interlocking plants : First, on a straight 
 post, as shown by the figure on the left ; next, on a bracket post, as shown by the 
 figure on the right, and, lastly, on a bridge which spans several tracks, and on 
 which each post is supported directly over the track which it governs. 
 
 From an inspection of the bracket post it is evident that the cylinders do 
 not occupy any room which might be needed for other purposes, and it is there- 
 fore possible to increase the number of signals on a post to an indefinite extent 
 by simply adding 7 feet to the length of the post for each additional signal. 
 
 A new form of iron signal post is described on page 185. 
 
 The signal cylinder is described on page 173, a list of its parts is given on 
 page 175, and the post fittings are given on page 181. 
 
 179 
 
PLATE 79. 
 
 23 
 
 ,4J| 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 I 
 
 28| 
 
 ' I 
 I 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 o 
 
 34 
 
 35, 
 
 o 
 
 36 
 37 
 
 o© 
 39 
 
 fli^a^^K^; 
 
 O 
 
 i8o 
 
Semaphore Post Fittings for Electro=Pneumatic Main 
 
 Line Signals. 
 
 PLATE 79. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. H(j.ME Signal Bladk (Ash). 
 
 2. Distant Sicinal Blade (Ash). 
 
 3. Piece of Ladder. 
 
 4. Ladder St.vv (different lengths). 
 
 5. Sejlvphore Casting (used in connection with a back hght). 
 
 6. Back Light Ring. 
 
 7. Back Light Casting. 
 
 S. Bearing, for shaft No. ',). 
 
 9. Shaft, for Nos. ;! and 7. 
 
 10. Se^lvphgre Casting (used when no back light is required). 
 
 11. Ring, for Nos. 5 and 10. 
 
 12. Plain Glass, for Nos. ."i, 7 and 10; made in different sizes and colors. 
 
 13. Bolt and Nut, ''^"yiS", for fastening Nos. 8 and 14 to semaphore post. 
 
 14. Bearing with Fixed Pin, for No. 10. 
 
 1."). Link avith Screw J.\av, for connecting No. 21 to signal cylinder piston ; see No. 16, Plate 7fi. 
 
 16. Lamp Bracket. 
 
 17. Counteraveigiit. This is made both as a 40-lb. and 56-lb. weight. 
 
 18. Bolt and Nut, 5,s"n4", for fastening No. 17 to No. 21. 
 
 19. Counterweight Lever Stand. 
 
 20. Lac; Screw, 3_^"x4", for fastening No. 19 to semaphore post. 
 
 21. Counterweight Lea'er. 
 
 22. A'ertic.vl Sir;NAL Rod aaith Screw Jaw; in ordering give distance between centres of holes. 
 2.3. La(; Screw, }4" x'-}}^", for fastening Nos. 4 and 16 to semaphore post. 
 
 24. Bolt and Nut, 3;s"x1i/", for fastening- Nos. 1 and 2 to Nos. 5 and 10. 
 
 2.5. Bolt and Nut, J2"n]", for joining Nos. 3 and 4. 
 
 26. Bolt and Nut, ^i"x};{", for end of No. 21. 
 
 27. BoL'c ani) Nut, ^.^." xlj4", for fastening- No. 6 to No. 7. 
 
 28. Bolt and Ni't, ^^".xl'.s", for fastening No. 11 to Nos. 5 and 10. 
 
 29. Turned Pin, 5/s"x2tV', for screw jaw on No. 22 ; used in connection with link (No. 42, 
 
 Plate 100), of signal circuit breaker. 
 
 30. TuRNEL) P;n, 5/,s"x]7's", for jaw of No. 15. 
 
 31. Turned I^in, 5 s" x 1 '''^", for screw jaw on No. 22 ; used onl)' when no circuit breaker 
 
 is connected with signal. 
 
 32. SpLur Cotter, ^/'x\%", for Nos. 29, 30, 31 and ends of No. 9. 
 
 For ends of No. 9. 
 
 33. Nut, s^". / 
 
 34. Washer, 3/". S 
 
 3.5. Split Co'itlr, v-"x2". ) „ . ^^ , 
 
 '- Por pms on Nos. 14 and 1'.). 
 
 36. Washer, ] ". \ ^ 
 
 37. Spitt Co'J'ier, ^f./' xm". / . ,, , 
 
 - For pms on Nos. 5 and 1(1 
 
 38. Washer, 7,s". \ 
 
 39. Washer, l4", for No. 13. 
 
 ■ i8i 
 
PLATE 80. 
 
 182" 
 
Electro=Pneumatic Dwarf Signal. 
 
 PLATE 80. 
 
 HIS signal bears a strong external resemblance to our mechanical dwarf signal. 
 
 In the illustration the valve cover has been removed, exposing to view the 
 valve, the magnet, and the air-pipe connection. 
 
 The whole arrangement is remarkable for its compactness, and for the fact 
 that the piston is lixed, while the cylinder itself performs the movement. 
 
 T 
 
 No. ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 1. Post. 
 
 2. C.\p. 
 
 ?,. Lamp Bk.vcket. 
 
 4. SEM.vriioRE C-\sTiX(;. — This is the common form ; there are several others to suit special 
 
 R. R. standards. 
 
 5. Rubber Semaphore Disc. 
 (i. Irox Plate, for No. f). 
 
 7. Se>e\pH()RE Rixi;, for holding- glass. 
 
 S. Rup.ber Bl.vde. 
 
 9. Irox Pl.\te, for No. 8. 
 
 10. Back Licitt Castixg. 
 
 11. Back Liciit Rix(;. 
 \i. SE^E\PII(lRE Shaet. 
 
 13. TuRXED Pix, 5^"xl5/;^", and cotter ^-.s" x -)^", for joining Nos. 12 and 14. 
 
 14. Yertic.vl Sigxal R(jo. 
 
 1.3. M.\EX Si'REXG ; it encircles No. 14. 
 
 16. Screw Jaw, for No. 14. 
 
 17. TuRXED Pix, ^.^^'xli^", and cotter '-s"x.)4", for joining Nos. 1(3 and 28. 
 
 18. Val\'E Cover. 
 
 19. Circuit Breaker Cover. 
 
 20. Base, for magnet and valve. 
 
 21. Fibre Gasket, for packing Nos. 20 and 29, and Nos. 27 and 28. 
 
 22. Gas Pipe, l^'^x^i^", for joining Nos. 20 and 2;-]. 
 
 23. PisTox .VXD Follower Nut. 
 
 24. Sprix(; Foeujwer. 
 
 25. Leather Packix(,. 
 
 26. PisTox Follower. 
 
 27. Cylixdek. 
 
 28. CvLixDER Head. 
 
 29. Valve Body. 
 
 30. Union. 
 
 183 
 
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC DWARF SIGNAL.— (Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 80. 
 
 ?)1. Union Nut. 
 
 i>2. Uniun Swivel. 
 
 33. Circuit Breaker Base. 
 
 34. Circuit Breaker Lever. 
 
 35. Magnet. 
 
 36. Armature. 
 
 37. Magnetic Shield. 
 
 38. Outside Magnet Ccner. 
 
 39. Inside Ma(;net Cover. 
 
 40. Hex Nut, fs". for end of No. lL\ 
 
 41. SiTTT Cotter, tV'xIi^", for ends of No. 12. 
 
 42. Hex Nut, %" , jam nut for Nos. 14 and 16. 
 
 43. Washer, 5/3", for No. 40. 
 
 44. Washer, %" , for No. 42. 
 
 45. Bolt and Nut, 3 g" ^1/4"- for joining Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 46. Bolt and Nut, l^" xiy^", for joining Nos. 4, 5 and 6 ; Nos. 4 and 'T ; Nos. 4, 8 and 9. 
 
 47. Bolt and Nut, J4"x1", for joining Nos. 10 and 11. 
 
 48. Cap Screw, 3 s" :>i I ^i" , for joining Nos. 20 and 29, upper iioles. 
 
 49. Car Screw, 3 g" x ^■' _^," , for joining Nos. 20 and 33. 
 
 50. Tar Bolt, y2"xl", for joining Nos. 1 and 3. 
 
 51. Car Screw, %"x3/^"^ for joining Nos. 1, 18 and 19. 
 
 52. Car Screw, 3 8"x1I/<", for joining Nos. 1, 20 and 27, lower holes. 
 
 53. Taper Machine Screw, 5's" xi'/'-24, for oil hole in No. 28. 
 
 54. Binding Screw, if x 12-32, for No. 35. 
 
 55. RuBRER Bushing, t,'V"x3,s", for No. 54. 
 
 56. Brass Washer, ^-/'x}4", for No. 54. 
 
 57. Binding Post, for No. 33. 
 
 58. Binding Post Nut, 14' "-32. 
 
 59. Binding P(_)st Screw, 78"x1u-32. 
 
 60. RuRPER BusHiNc;, i/j^"x3,ji", for No. 57. 
 
 61. Armature Stem and Nut. 
 
 62. Pin A'alve. 
 
 63. Sn-iiNt; eor No. 62. 
 
 •64. Contact Spring, platinum point, for circuit breaker. 
 
 65. Contact Spring, platinum disc, for circuit breaker, 
 
 6(;. M.vchine Screw, 1i4"x 10-32; stop for No. 34. 
 
 67. Spring ; it encircles No. (U]. . , 
 
 68. Shaet, for joining Nos. 33 and 34. 
 
 69. Adjusting Screw and Nut, for No. 34. 
 
 184 
 
The Electro=Pneumatic 
 
 Iron Main Line Semaphore 
 
 Post. 
 
 PLATE 81. 
 
 T^HIS post is intended to provide a 
 more permanent arrangement than 
 can be secured by means of the wooden 
 post that is now in general use. The 
 valves and cylinders are placed at the 
 bottom of the post, and are connected 
 to the semaphore castings by means of 
 vertical rods that are enclosed in the 
 post itself; these rods not only serve to 
 force the signals to the clear position 
 but assist the counterweic!.'ht in restorincr 
 them to the danger position. All of 
 the moving parts are enclosed, and are 
 thoroughl)' protected from frost and dust. 
 The external appearance of this post 
 speaks for itself 
 
 185 
 
PLATE 83. 
 
 1 86 
 
The EIectro=Pneumatic Push=Button Machine. 
 
 PLATE 83. 
 
 T^HIS device is intended for work in connection with distributing yards where 
 
 interlocking is not required, but where a large number of movements must 
 be performed in rapid succession. The two rows of buttons called respectively 
 NoRiNiAL and Rex'ersed correspond with the levers of an interlocking machine 
 and are connected, each one, with one of the valve magnets shown on Plate 85. 
 Through pressing a button on the upper or normal row the switch is made to 
 change its position, first, by discharging the opposite valve magnet, at the same 
 time opening the exhaust on that side of the piston ; and, second, by charging the 
 valve magnet with which the button is connected, thus admitting the pressure to 
 that side of the piston. Pressing in a normal button on the machine forces out its 
 corresponding reversed button, and vice versa, since the two buttons, relating to a 
 switch are joined at the back of the front board by a walking beam, which is 
 pivoted at its centre. 
 
 The row of indicators which appear above the push buttons are in electric 
 communication with the switches and the surrounding track; the appearance of an 
 indicator informs the operator either that the switch has not completed its throw 
 or that the neighboring track is occupied by a car. Since in practice the operator is 
 provided with a schedule of the movements that will be required to distribute a 
 train, he is able to follow the course of the different cars by the successive appear- 
 ance and disappearance of the indicators. 
 
 Of the two figures on Plate 82, the upper one illustrates the machine closed 
 up as it appears when ready for use ; the lower one shows the glass front removed 
 from before the indicators and the push-button board lowered. 
 
 A list of the parts will be found on page ISO. 
 
 187 
 
PLATE 83. 
 
 8 
 
 20 
 
 25 
 
 31 
 
 i 
 
 21 
 
 I 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 .^^I^F 
 
 
 T 
 
 10 1^ 
 
 IT 
 
 18 
 19 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 26 
 32 
 
 27 
 
 33 
 
 8 ^ 3^ 
 
 3 5 
 
 37 
 
 ,^ i'i 3 6 
 
 .1 
 
 I 
 
 40 
 
 39 
 
 • 44 
 
 42 
 
 4 3 
 f 45f 
 
 46 O 48¥ 5^1 
 
 49 I 
 
 47 O 50 I 52 
 
 i8S 
 
Parts of Electro=Pneumatic Push Button Machine. 
 
 PLATE 83. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. End Bearing, for lid ; made both as a right and left-hand, a left-hand is shown. 
 
 2. Guide, for No. 3. 
 
 3. Lock Pin. 
 
 -i. Spring. ) 
 
 ' For No. 3. 
 
 5. Knoi;. \ 
 
 6. Bracket, for No. 7. 
 
 7. Suri'ORTiNG Strir, for lid. 
 
 8. Leet-Hani) Swivel Plate. ) 
 
 r Fits into No, 1. 
 
 9. Right-Haxl) Swivel Plate. ) 
 
 10. Piece oe Ground Strip, for No. 17. 
 
 11. Hanging Piece, for supporting case. 
 
 12. Walkini; Beam. 
 
 13. RnLLER for No. 12. 
 
 14. DiAVEL Pin, for No. 13. 
 
 15. I AW, fits into No. 21 and connects with No. 12. 
 
 16. Rupber liUSiiiNG, for No. 15. 
 
 17. Bracket, for No. 12. 
 
 18. Spring, for No. 19. 
 
 19. Stop Pin, for No. 12. 
 
 20. Cap, for No. 21. 
 
 21. CvLiNDER, for Nos. 22 and 23. 
 
 22. Cellul(;id Push Button. 
 
 23. Hard Rl:i;per Push Button. 
 21. Connec'ping Bar, for line wires. 
 
 25. Contact .SpRiNii. 
 
 26. Strip, for joining two of No. 25. 
 
 27. Ground Strip, for No. 32. 
 
 28. Piece oe Insulated Wire. ) ^. , , . , 
 
 - Give length required. 
 
 29. Pie(;e oe Wiri;, in rubber tube. ) 
 
 30. Magnet Bracket. 
 
 31. Back Strap, for No. 32. 
 
 32. Pair oe Magnets. 
 
 33. Shaft, for No, 'Ao. 
 
 34. LndicatoIv Numper, fits into No. 35. 
 
 35. Armature. 
 
 189 
 
PARTS OF ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC PUSH BUTTON MACHINE.— (Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 83. 
 
 36. BiNDiNc. Post and Screw. 
 
 37. Brass Washer, i/"-^". ) 
 
 y For Nos. 3fi and 39. 
 
 38. Hexagonal Nut, i^"-32. ) 
 
 39. Brass Screw, If/' x }{"-:i2, for fastening No. 17 to the lid. 
 
 40. Machine Screw, if" x 6-32, for joining Nos. 12 and 17. 
 
 41. Machine Screw, tV"x6-32, for fastening No. 15 to No. 12. 
 
 42. Machine Screw, A" x 10-32, trunnion for No. 33. 
 
 43. Machine Screw, :^-8"x8-32, for fastening Nos. 31 and 32 to No. 30. 
 
 44. Machine Screw, i-^"x 12-32, for fastening No. 7 to Nos. 1 and 6. 
 
 45. Machine Screw, I/("x6-32, for fastening wires to No. 24. 
 
 46. Copper Washer, j\"-3/s", for No. 45. 
 
 47. Brass Washer, J^'-^g", for No. 48. 
 
 48. Brass Rivet, for joining two pieces of No. 7. 
 
 49. Wood Screw, #6 flat head, for Nos. 8 and 9. 
 
 50. Wood Screw, #6 round head, for No. 25. 
 
 51. Wood Screw, #7 round head, for fastening No. 30 to the case. 
 
 52. Wood Screw, #8 flat head, for Nos. 6 and 11. 
 
 PLATE 84. 
 
 Newark Bay Draw Bridge, Central Railroad of New Jersey, protected by the 
 Electro-Pneumatic Automatic Block Signaling System. This system covers the 
 line between Jersey City and Bound Brook, a distance of 30 niiles. 
 
 190 
 
PLATE 84. 
 
 191 
 
PLATE 85. 
 
 '■^ ^v/ *!«; ' s V ^. I, - I - „^ !»^o 4v 
 
 'i. 
 
 ,-,!**»? 
 
 'J^ 'SnVKt; 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 7 
 
 •'V 
 
 ■^vw&saw* ^. -A'^ 
 
 
 >-' V 
 
 
 O 
 
 192 
 
Direct Acting Electro=Pneumatic Switch Valve and 
 
 Cylinder. 
 
 PLATE 85. 
 
 T^HIS arrangement is used in connection with tlie Pneumatic Pusli Button Macliine 
 (Plate 82), for the purpose of throwing the switches in distributing yards. 
 The Plate (No. 10) is placed upon the ties, parallel to the rail, while the piston 
 (No. 9), projects through the bridle rod of the switch, which is bent up for the 
 purpose of receiving it. The arrangement of the valves is the same as on the 
 Electro-Pneumatic Switch Movement (Plate 69), with the exception of the lock 
 cylinder and magnet, which are here dispensed with, and are replaced by the Cap 
 (No. 3). Two wires torm the connection with the machine, one being run from 
 each ot the buttons on the machine to its corresponding valve magnet on the 
 movement. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. 
 
 6. 
 
 7- 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 11. 
 
 12. 
 
 13. 
 
 14. 
 
 15. 
 
 16. 
 
 17. 
 
 18. 
 
 19. 
 
 20. 
 
 21. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 for the parts of the switch valve see plate ooo. 
 
 Valve Seat. 
 
 Brass Bushing, for connecting- valve seat with valve body. 
 
 Cap (Screw), for replacing lock cylinder in valve body. 
 
 Fibre Gasket, for inner ring of No. 1. 
 
 ScREAV Stud and Nut, for joining Nos. 1, 11 and valve body. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, 5/s"x15/s", for joining Nos. 10 and 11. 
 
 Brass Oil Plug, }4"y^Vs\ for Nos. 1 and 11. 
 
 Piston Rod and Four Nuts. 
 
 Piston Head. 
 
 Foundation Plate. 
 
 Cylinder. 
 
 Fibre Gasket, for joint between Nos. 1 and 11. 
 
 Leather Packing. 
 
 Guide Ring. 
 
 Follower. 
 
 FoLLoAVER Nut. 
 
 Jam Nut. 
 
 Packing Nut. 
 
 Leather Packing, f- For the Stuffing Box. 
 
 Follower. 
 
 Follower Spring, j 
 
 - For the Piston Head. 
 
 J 
 
 193 
 
PLATE 86. 
 
 194 
 
Condensing Appliances. 
 
 PLATE 86. 
 
 A. Main Reservoir. — This is placed usuall)' between the compressor and the condensing 
 
 coil (Fig. E), and is intended for collecting and retaining the condensed water 
 which is precipitated from the air that leaves the compressor hot ; a draw-ofT 
 cock is shown at the bottom o-f the reservoir on the left. 
 
 B. AuxiLiARV Reservoir. — The compressed air is taken from this directly to the signals 
 
 and switches. It holds the final water of condensation so that nothing but prac- 
 tically dry air shall enter any of the cylinders. In practice, an auxiliary reservoir 
 is located at each switch movement and at the foot of each signal post. As it 
 is placed underground the draw-off cock is on top, and is connected with the 
 bottom of the reservoir b)' a pipe through which the water is forced into the 
 atmosphere by the air pressure. 
 
 C. Flexible Connection with Union. — Used between the auxiliary reservoir and the switch 
 
 movement. 
 
 D. Oak Box and Cover. — For containing the auxiliary reservoir. As this is placed under- 
 
 ground it is made very strong but entirely without finish. 
 
 E. Condensing Coil. — The coil is located in any convenient spot, not too far from the 
 
 compressor, but always in an exposed place and in the main pipe line. It is not 
 always made exactly in this form, but is usually designed for the work it is to 
 perform and the situation it is to occupy. 
 
 195 
 
PLATE 87. 
 
 " 'ifi^xfsaiiuo-*.™*- \~ 
 
 O 10 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 «!»»«> 
 
 13 
 
storage Batteries and Governing Devices. 
 
 PLATE 87. 
 
 A. Four Cell Storage Battery, of the size and number of elements usually employed 
 
 in the Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking system. 
 
 B. AuTO^L-^TIC Switch. 
 
 C. Resistance Coil. 
 
 D. Five Plate. 1 
 
 E. Seven Plate. 
 
 F. Nine Pl.vte. 
 
 G. Eleven Plate. 
 
 Elements of different sizes ready for placing in a jar. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Positive E lenient. 
 
 2. Negative Element. 
 
 3. Jar. 
 
 4. Outside Strip. ~] 
 
 I 
 
 5. Separating Strip. J- Hard rubber. 
 
 I 
 
 6. Bottom Strii'. j 
 
 7. Lead CoNNECTiNf; Piece, for joining Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 8. Specially Insulated Copper Wire ; give length required. 
 
 9. Alu.minum Screw Rod. 1 
 
 10. Aluminiwi S(,>u.\kE Nut. ;- F"or fastening Nos. 7 and 8 to Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 11. Aluminum Washer. J 
 
 12. Lower Cui-. / 
 
 ,• Used as insulators for No. ?>. 
 
 13. Upper Cui'. 
 
 197 
 
PLATE 88. 
 
Generator for Charging Storage Batteries. 
 
 PLATE 88. 
 
 'T^HE Electric Generator used by us in connection with the Electro-Pneumatic 
 
 Interlocking and Block Signal Systems, for the storage of electrical energy 
 is illustrated on Plate S8, and is a Multipolar Direct Current Generator manu- 
 factured in Pittsburg by the Westinghouse Electric & Manufacturing Co. 
 
 This type of machine is built in sizes varying between 1 horse-power and 
 5,000 horse-power in the best manner and of the best material. 
 
 The multipolar principle renders it possible to drive the generator by a belt 
 or connect it directly with the engine shaft. It is self-oiling, self-exciting, self- 
 regulating, and after having been started entirely self-attendant. 
 
 The machine is reversible on its bed-plate and can be run equally well in 
 either direction. The supports for the bearings are cast in one piece with the 
 lower half of the field, a construction which gives great strength and rigidity to 
 the bearings and secures the utmost possible freedom from vibration. 
 
 The armature is of the drum type ; the core is built up of thin discs of soft 
 iron, punched around their circumference with semi-oval holes. These holes form 
 grooves which extend parallel to the shaft the entire length of the armature ; in 
 every groove are placed tubes of insulating material, through each of which is run 
 a stranded cable or copper wire. 
 
 While we use these generators only for the charging of storage batteries, the 
 current which they deliver may be used for driving electric motors of all kinds as 
 well as for running incandescent and arc lights. 
 
 199 
 
PLATE 89. 
 
 200 
 
Switches for an Electric Current. 
 
 PLATE 89. 
 
 A POSITIVE and reliable switch for directing the current derived from a dynamo 
 ^^ or storage battery is an essential part of the Electro-Pneumatic System, and 
 on the opposite page we illustrate three sizes of a kind that we manufacture at 
 our works for this purpose. 
 
 They are particularly substantial in construction, and may be of any desired 
 size from a 1-way as shown up to an indefinite number. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND LETTER. 
 
 A. 4-Way Switch. 
 
 B. 2-AVav Switch. 
 
 C. I-VVav Switch. 
 
 201 
 
PLATE 90. 
 
 202 
 
Automatic Engine. 
 
 PLATE 90. 
 
 T^HIS engine is manufactured by the Westinghouse Machine Co., and is one 
 
 from which we have secured most satisfactory results in connection with 
 driving an electric generator. It is of the simplest construction, entirely automatic 
 in its action, and may be connected to a generator, either by a belt or directly 
 through its shaft, while, owing to its form, the very least amount of floor space is 
 needed. 
 
 The external appearance of the engine may be seen on the upper portion of 
 Plate 90, while something of its internal construction may be gathered from the 
 lower portion of the same page. The central cylinder contains the valve, while 
 the two outside cylinders contain the pistons which work in opposite directions 
 and are so constructed as never to stop upon the center. 
 
 The lower chamber contains the cranks, the eccentric and the governor ; it is 
 in practice partly filled with oil, which is thrown about by the motion of the 
 engine, and thoroughly lubricates all of the internal parts. 
 
 So simple and reliable is this engine that it is possible to run it for months 
 at a time with a minimum of attention, other than the shutting off and turning 
 on of the steam. 
 
 These engines are built in sizes ranging from 5 to 250 horse-power. 
 
 203 
 
PLATE 91. 
 
 204 
 
Pipe Fittings for Electro=Pneumatic System. 
 
 PLATE 91. 
 
 A. Gate Valve. 
 
 B. Flange Unio 
 
 C. Expansion Joint, see Nos. 21 to 2*; 
 
 1 
 
 B. Flange Union, see Nos. 17, 18, 19 and 20, may have either 4 or .5 bolts. [- 
 
 1 Used with 2" 
 and y" pipe. 
 
 No. 
 1. 
 
 2, 
 
 3. 
 4. 
 5. 
 6. 
 
 i. 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 11. 
 12. 
 13. 
 14. 
 
 15. 
 16. 
 17. 
 18. 
 19. 
 20. 
 21. 
 22. 
 23. 
 24. 
 25. 
 26. 
 
 Made to fit Nos. 1 to 5. State whether the piece is to be gal 
 vanized or not. 
 
 '■) 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 Piece of 3" Pipe. 
 
 Piece of 2" Pipe. 
 
 Piece of 1" Pipe. J- State whether the pipe is to be galvanized or not. 
 
 Piece of 3/^" Pipe. 
 
 Piece of ^i" Pipe. 
 
 Hook, for supporting 3/2" pipe. 
 
 A guide for pipe placed on stakes is shown on Plate 102, No. 10. 
 
 Plain T. 
 
 Reducing T. 
 
 Sleeve. 
 
 Plain Elbow. 
 
 Street Elbow. 
 
 Plug. 
 
 Reducing Bushing. 
 
 Plain Cock. 
 
 Cock, with union. 
 
 Union. 
 
 Flange, the nut fits against this. 
 
 Flange, the bolt head fits against this. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, for joining Nos. 17 and IS. 
 
 Copper Gasket, for packing Nos. 17 and IS 
 
 cvlinder. 
 
 Piston. 
 
 Guide Rod and Nuts. 
 
 Guide Co)t,ar. 
 
 Stuffing Box Ring. 
 
 Nut. 
 
 Asbestos Packinc;. 
 
 205 
 
 Used with Nos. 3, 4 and 5. 
 
 Relating to B only. See note with Fii 
 B, above. 
 
 Relating to C only. 
 
PLATE 92. 
 
 r^%,r 
 
 
 26 
 
 T 
 
 27 
 
 2 9 1 3 2 
 
 ^P 3 
 
 i 
 §28 ^ J 31 
 
 3 3 
 
 W 34 
 |3 = 
 
 lYmro 
 
 £i 
 
 20 
 
 10 
 
 -15 
 
 16 
 
 
 @ 
 
 
 241 
 
 25 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 37 
 
 36 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 4-0 
 
 41 
 
 206 
 
Electro=Pneumatic Switch Lock. 
 
 PLATE 93. 
 
 T^HIS device is used on outlying switches in connection with the Pneumatic 
 Block Signal System. It is a positive facing point lock, operated by com- 
 pressed air, and is made to lock the switch by the entrance of a train to the second 
 block section in the rear, and does not release the switch until the train has passed 
 out of the section in which the switch is situated. If a train, occupying the main 
 track, has reached a switch controlled by one of these locks, wishes to enter the 
 siding, a plunger, ^\•hich is a part of the apparatus, and which mechanically operates 
 the valve, must be depressed in order to unlock the switch. On the contrary, when 
 a train which is on the siding \\'ishes to come onto the main track, an attempt to 
 mov'e the switch stand in the ordinary manner must be made ; if it be found fast, 
 the effort must be temporarily abandoned, since the fact that the switch is locked 
 indicates that an approaching train has advanced beyond the distant signal relating 
 to that section, or, in other words, tar enough to be endangered by an open switch. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 2. Ex I) Cap, for base. 
 
 3. Lid df Co\'er. 
 
 4. Cover. 
 
 5. Padlock. 
 
 6. Fibre Gasket, for face of cylinder. 
 
 7. cvli.vder. 
 
 8. Steel Lock .Sprixc. 
 
 9. Lock. 
 
 10. PisT(.)X Head. 
 
 n. Leather Pistox Pa( kixc. 
 
 12. Brass Pistox P'ollower. 
 
 13. Pluncer. 
 
 14. Ma(;xet -Shield. 
 
 15. Aralvi'URE. 
 
 16. Pll'X(;er Base. 
 
 17. Mac net. 
 
 18. Valve B()D^■. 
 
 207 
 
ELECTRO=PNEUMATIC SWITCH LOCK.— (Continued.) 
 I^o. PLATE 93. 
 
 19. Union Coui'Ling. 
 
 20. Swivel, for union coupling. 
 
 21. Nut, for union coupling. 
 
 22. Tap Bui.t and Nut, ^-^''xli-^", for joining base No. 1 and cylinder No. 7. 
 
 23. Tap Bolt anu Nut, 3 8"xl3g", for joining base No. 1 and end cap No. 2. 
 
 24. Tap Bolt, 3/s"x1i/j;", for joining cylinder No. 7 and valve body No. 18. 
 
 25. Tap Bolt, 2/^"y.}>/l", for joining base No. 1 to cover No. 4. 
 
 26. Ar-mature Stem and Nut. 
 
 27. Pin Valve. 
 
 28. Spring, for pin valve. 
 
 29. Binding Screw, t|-"x 12-32, for electric wires on magnet. 
 
 30. Rubber Bushing, for magnet bindino- screw. 
 
 31. Brass Washer, 54"-^-^", for magnet binding screw. 
 
 32. Screw, for binding post. 
 
 33. Binding Post. 
 
 34. Rubber Bushing, ^^''xSs", for binding post. 
 
 35. Contact Spring with Platinum Point. 
 
 36. Contact Spring with Platinum Disc. 
 
 37. Hex Nut, for joining piston No. 10 and follower No. 12. 
 
 38. Brass Spring, for plunger No. 13. 
 
 39. Mic.\ Insulation, for contact springs Nos. 35 and 36. 
 
 40. Steel Rivet, for joining lid No. 3 to cover No. 4. 
 
 41. Brass Machine Screw, I'^y^" xi'2-?y2, for holding spring No. 38 in plunger No. 13. 
 
 Note. — A lock bar is used with the device which is illustrated on Plate 73, No. 69. 
 
 PLATE 93. 
 
 A view of the large train shed of the Philadelphia ^Kr Reading R. R. at Phila- 
 delphia. Particular attention is called to the starting signals that are suspended 
 from the bottom chord of the portal, for they show how easy it is, in the Electro- 
 Pneumatic System, to place a signal wherever it is wanted. On Plate 31 is given 
 a plan of the tracks at this place. 
 
 208 
 
PLATE 93. 
 
 20Q 
 
PLATE 94. 
 
 :io 
 
The Electro=Pn€umatic Slot. 
 
 PLATE 94. 
 
 T^HIS device, like the l^lectric Slot, Page 215, is for the purpose of making the 
 clearing- of a semaphore contingent upon the condition of the track which it 
 controls. It is used in connection with an advance home signal that is operated 
 from a Saxby & Farmer Machine, which is embraced within the limits of an 
 Electro-Pneumatic Block Signal System, and must therefore be semi-automatic in 
 its character. 
 
 This is accomplished by making the vertical signal rod in two parts, which 
 shall be joined when the track in advance is unoccupied by any train, but which, 
 when the track circuit is interrupted, will separate the semaphore from the counter- 
 weight lever ; if the signal should be cleared at the time, it will sjo to the dany-er 
 position automatically, while if it should be in the danger position \vhen the change 
 takes place, no reversing of the lever in the machine will affect the signal at all, 
 for the bars Nos. M and 5 will only slip by each other. 
 
 The signal wires from the machine are connected with the counterweight 
 lever in the ordinary way, while the latter is joined to the lower slot bar (No. 5) 
 by the link (No. ('>). The upper slot bar (No. ;-() is connected with the semaphore 
 casting by the vertical signal rod (No. 4) to which also is joined the distant signal 
 circuit breaker by its link (Pig. C and No. 48, Plate lOU). The slot bars lie within 
 the case (No. l) to which is attached the cylinder (No. ]('>), carrying upon its 
 outer end the valve body (No. l'l') ; this, in turn, supports the magnet (No. I'l;), which 
 when charged closes the exhaust by means of the armature stem (No. ;!<;) and pin 
 valve (No. o7), and opens the passage between the cylinder and the pressure pipe. 
 If the signal is at danger, the lever in the cabin normal, and the track in advance 
 unoccupied, the magnet will be charged, the piston (No. l.'!) will be forced out 
 against the upper slide bar, the dog on \vhich will be pressed into a corresponding 
 recess on the lower slide bar. Reversing the lever in the cabin will now result in 
 a clear si'>mal, which will continue so until the lever has been restored to its 
 normal position, or, until a train occupies the track in advance, which by cutting- 
 out the slot magnet, will open the exhaust port of the cylinder ami l:)y removing 
 the pressure, cause the strong spring (No. 14) to retract the piston; this will allow 
 the two slide bars to separate and permit the semaphore casting to fall; the last 
 condition described is shown on the upper part of Plate 1)4, except that the 
 balance lever is also in the position which it occupies when the lever in the 
 machine is normal. The parts are illustrated on the next page. 
 
 211 
 
THE ELECTRO.PNEUMATIC SLOT. (Continued. , 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 , ^ PLATE 94. 
 
 1. Cask. 
 
 -'. Cover. 
 
 ;}. Upper Slide Bar. 
 
 4. Vertkae Sicxal Ron. 
 
 5. Lower Slide Bar. 
 
 6. Link. 
 
 7. Bolt and Nut. (^^"^^H"' for fastening No. 22; 3 a" x 4:7s". for Nos. 8, 9 and 10. 
 Q T ,,XT,. , * f" orderincr, state which is required. 
 
 9. Medium. |- Anti-friction slide bar rollers. 
 
 10. Short. | 
 
 11. Roller, for jaw on No. 13. 
 
 12. Pin, 3s"x2j:^.", for joining- Nos. 11 and 13. 
 
 13. Piston Rod. 
 
 14. Si'RiX(;. I 
 
 -, - c r, I'or Piston Rod. 
 
 lo. SToi' Bushing. \ 
 
 IB. Cylinder. 
 
 17. Fibre Gasket, for packing between Nos. 1, 16 and 22. 
 
 In. Piston. 
 
 li). Follower Nut. 
 
 20. Leatlier Packino. 
 
 21. Sprin(. Follower. 
 
 22. Valve Body. 
 
 23. Union. 
 
 24. Union Nut. 
 
 25. Union Swn'EL. 
 
 2<i. Mac.net. Give resistance required in ohms. 
 
 27. Ar.mature. 
 
 28. Lnside. / 
 
 ^ c May^net Caps. 
 
 29. Outside. ) 
 
 30. Cap Screw, 3 8"x1", for fastening No. 2 to No. 1. 
 
 31. Brass Taper Oil Pli'(... 
 
 32. Iron Maohixe Sckew, .i ,s" ■"< 8-32, set screw for No. 26. 
 
 33. Brass Machine Screw, l 
 
 34. Brass Washer. i For connectint: electric wires to ma<'net 
 
 35. Hard RurbI';k Bushing. J 
 
 36. Armature Stem. 
 
 37. Pix Valve. 
 
 38. Spring, for No. 37. 
 
 39. Split Cotter, .jV' x 5/,s", for No. 12. 
 
 PLATE 95. 
 
 A view of the tracks and signals at the Pennsylvania Railroad Terminal, 
 Jersey City. See also Plates 52, 67 and 70. 
 
 212 
 
PLATE 05. 
 
 -^i ^^ 
 
PLATE 90. 
 
 214 
 
The Electric Slot. 
 
 PLATE 9G. 
 
 T^HIS instrument is for the purpose of automatically parting the connection 
 
 between a mechanical signal and its lever m an interlocking machine. It 
 is usually done by means of a short piece of track circuit, in which case the 
 magnet (No. 1(>) of the slot, corresponds to the signal magnet of Fig. D, Plate 108. 
 At other times the rupture is caused by tlie breaking of a different circuit, but the 
 action which causes die rupture in this device is always an electrical one. 
 
 When the magnet (No. IC) is charged, it attracts and holds the armature bar, 
 No. 14, which in turn forces the lever (No. Oj under the dog (No. 7) and against 
 the slot rod (No. <;) that slides in, but is not fastened to the case (No. 1). The drop 
 arm (No. 17) is pivoted to the counterweight lever base (No. 22) and its other end 
 is fastened to the rod (No. <;), while to the middle hole of the drop arm is joined 
 the vertical signal rod. If now the counterweight be raised by means of the inter- 
 locking lever, the case, the slot rod, the drop arm, and consequently the vertical 
 signal rod will be forced up, resulting in a clear signal. By discharging the slot 
 magnet, the dog (No. 7) which is fastened to the slot rod, is enabled to force its 
 way past the lever, and in that way permits the drop arm to fall, carrying with it the 
 signal itself and the vertical signal rod, which on its return slides through the loop 
 (No. 4) but leaving the counterweight and the case with all its parts still raised, 
 The signal cannot again be cleared without first restoring the counterweight by 
 means of the interlocking lever to its normal position. 
 
 This device makes it impossible for an operator to fasten down his signal 
 and through carelessness permit two trains to enter the same block. 
 
 The vertical signal rod, the counterweight lever, and its weight are of the 
 ordinary character, and will be found illustrated on Plate 79. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Case. 
 
 2. Si'RiNG, for No. 14. 
 
 3. Anti-macnetic Plate. 
 
 4. Loop ajnd Nut. 
 
 5. Guide Plate. 
 
 6. Slot Rod. 
 
 215 
 
THE ELECTRIC SLO I. (Continued.) 
 '^'^ PLATE 96. 
 
 7. Doo. 
 
 S. TuKNEii V\\, s^"x-2^/s". and Cottkr, for fastening; No. f) to No. 1. 
 
 9. Lever. 
 
 10. Jau. 
 
 11. TuRNEU Pl\, i/'x.h", and Cotter, for fastening Nos. 9 and 10 to No. 1. 
 {•J. Cover Pi..\te. 
 
 \:i. RuiU'.ER CiA.sKEi, (or No. \2. 
 
 14. Armature Bar. 
 
 15. AR^rA'|■uRE. 
 
 16. Pair oi Maonet.s. Give resistance required in ohms. 
 
 17. Drop AR^R 
 
 18. LaR(;e Sprex'o. 
 
 19. Smaei Sit<in(; 
 
 20. Sprinl; Bearinc. 
 
 ■21. BoET ANMi Nu'i, 7^"x:)". for fastening Nos. 18, 19 and l'() to No. 22. 
 
 22. CouNTERWEKinr Lever Base. 
 
 28. Stud, i^" x AM" . for fastening No. 17 ttj No. 22. 
 
 24. Washer, ij^", for No. 2::'.. 
 
 2.0. .Stei>. I"x4'2", and Cotter, for fastening counterweig'ht lever to No. 22. 
 
 2H. VVaseier, 1", for No. 25. 
 
 27. i..\R(;E Roller, for No. 9. 
 
 28. Rivet, f,/' x 1 Vg", for No. 2 7. 
 
 29. Ri\et, -A"x 114", for No. 7. 
 .HO. Saeale Roller, for No. 9. 
 
 ?A. Rivet, V.x" x 1 i-s", for No. 'M). 
 
 32. Turneo Ptn, ^j^"x-1^\", and Cotter, for No. 14. 
 
 V,^\. Hexaoox Nut, 3x""1<;. for No. Ki. 
 
 ?A. Machine Screw, ,; x" -^ 1 "--J-. for fastening Nos. 12 and 1.'! to No. 1. 
 
 H5, Screw and Nui, 14" x 8-82, for fastening No. ;i to No. 1. 
 
 'M\. Machine Sirew, i_,."x 10-24. for joining Nos. 14 and 15. 
 
 :\~. Machine .S(rk\\, 3 x" x ^-•''-. for inside wires (screws into N\). ;;9 ). 
 
 ;',8. Washer, A" x tV", for No. ;i7. 
 
 89. B(jL'i- AiXH Nui, ->^." x I/|"-;;2, for outside wires. 
 
 40. ISr.ass Washer. | 
 
 41. Ml A Washer. ; I" or No. 89. 
 
 42. IxUl'.BER BUSHINC. 
 
 48. Rivet, for fastening No. 2 to No. 1. 
 
 216 
 
Patents Relating to Electric Sig^naling. 
 
 ^AME. 
 
 S. C. HKNDRICKSOX, . 
 H. \V. SP.\N(;. 
 
 0. (lASSETT AND I. FISHER, 
 O. GASSKTT, ... 
 
 (). GASSKIT 
 
 (). GASSF/r I' ,\Ni> \ FISHEK, 
 (). GASSl-'/FT AND F MSHER, 
 O. GASSE'F T, .... 
 
 C. J. MEANS 
 
 O. GASSETT 
 
 F FFSHER 
 
 C. J. MEAXS, .... 
 
 \V. R. S\RES 
 
 \V. R. SVKES 
 
 (). (lASSE'FT AND F FISHER, 
 
 F FISHER 
 
 F FISHER 
 
 (). (GASSETT, .... 
 (>. GASSETT, .... 
 F. F. Fr)FE, .... 
 C. H. J.\CKS()N, 
 
 0. GASSET'I' 
 
 C. J. MEANS 
 
 C. A. SCOT'F, .... 
 
 W. ROBFNSGN, 
 
 O. (FASSE'FT, .... 
 
 (). GASSE'F'F 
 
 GEO. \\'ESTIN(;iJ()FiSE, Jk , 
 
 O. GASSETT, . 
 
 S. C, HENDRICKSON, . 
 
 <). (iASSET'F ANi. F I'TSHER, 
 
 C. A. SCOTT 
 
 DATE. 
 
 
 I>T,i;ki;AKN 
 
 5, 
 
 FS78. 
 
 ( )L'Tc.)ni.,l; 
 
 15, 
 
 isrs, 
 
 May 
 
 4, 
 
 1880. 
 
 J U N 1 
 
 F 
 
 1880, 
 
 1 UNF. 
 
 8, 
 
 1880^ 
 
 SEPTE.MTiF.I.; 
 
 'il. 
 
 1S80, 
 
 < )l'l'( i\\h\R 
 
 yii, 
 
 1880. 
 
 OCTORF.R 
 
 3H, 
 
 1880, 
 
 NOVEMKER 
 
 !), 
 
 18S0. 
 
 NOVEMKEK 
 
 -23, 
 
 18S0, 
 
 December 
 
 i , 
 
 1880. 
 
 March 
 
 22, 
 
 1881, 
 
 April 
 
 2(1, 
 
 1881, 
 
 May 
 
 10, 
 
 1881, 
 
 June 
 
 28, 
 
 1881, 
 
 Auoust 
 
 30, 
 
 1881, 
 
 AUGUSl' 
 
 :-!0, 
 
 1S81, 
 
 August 
 
 30, 
 
 1881, 
 
 1 anuarv 
 
 ;> 
 
 18S2, 
 
 Ferruarv 14, 1882, 
 
 Apru. 
 
 4, 
 
 1882 
 
 April 
 
 18, 
 
 1882, 
 
 May 
 
 2, 
 
 1.S82, 
 
 ( )CT0I'.FR 
 
 •SI, 
 
 1S82, 
 
 Ni i\EMi;i'. |< 
 
 r, 
 
 1882, 
 
 NovEMiii'i; 21, 1882, 
 
 No\'EMi;i':i.; 21, 1SS2, 
 
 jANCAk\ K;, 1.S83, 
 
 April IF, 1883, 
 
 April 1?, 1SK3, 
 
 April 17, 1S83, 
 
 July 31, 1883, 
 
 [toniiinitJ nil Page 2CF) 
 217 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 199,97: 
 208,995 
 227,102 
 228,187 
 228,455 
 232,344 
 233, (;12 
 233,74(i 
 234,315 
 234,707 
 235,145 
 239,107 
 240,622 
 241,241; 
 243,544 
 246,304 
 246,486 
 246,492 
 251,8(i7 
 253,762 
 255,998 
 256,797 
 257,233 
 266,904 
 26 7,259 
 267,97k 
 26 7,9 79 
 270,867 
 276,021 
 276,038 
 276,138 
 282,229 
 
PLATE 97. 
 
 !I8 
 
Special Tools for Electric and Electro=Pneumatic Work. 
 
 PLATE 97. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Track Dkillino Maciiim-;, principally used for making holes to receive detector bar 
 
 rail clip bolts. 
 
 2. Drill, for No. 1. 
 
 'A. Track I3Kn,[jNG Machine, used for making track wire holes; for drill, see No. 42. 
 
 i. Wrench, specify whether it is wanted for No. 1 or No. 3. 
 
 5. Oil Can, for Nos. 1 and 8. 
 
 Ck Plyers, for handling line wire. 
 
 7. Copper BATTER^' Cullender. 
 
 8. Hard Rubiier Battery Syringe. 
 
 9. Adjustable Wrench, a very convenient tool, made in various sizes, therefore state 
 
 size of nuts for which it is wanted. 
 
 10. Wrench, for stuffing box and for lock cylinder. ) , ,• , 
 
 I On switch valve and cylinder. 
 
 11. Wrench, for piston jam nut and piston head nut. ) 
 
 12. Wrench, for foundation bolts on switch cylinder, and for magnet cap and air inlet on 
 
 signal cylinder. 
 
 13. Wrench, for j^oke and cylinder head bolts on switch valve, and for magnet base bolt 
 
 on signal cylinder. 
 
 14. Wreni:h, for oil plugs on switch cylinder. 
 
 15. Wrench, for bolts on signal cylinder circuit breaker. 
 
 16. Wrench, for oil plug and pin valve guide on signal cylinder. 
 
 17. Wrench, for armature stem nut and for pin valve guides on switch valves. 
 
 18. Wrench, for armature stem nut, and binding post nuts on signal cylinder. 
 
 19. Wrench, for 3-:^" lag screw. 
 
 20. Wrench, for ^4" bolt. 
 
 21. Wrench, for y^" lag screw. 
 
 22. Wrench, for }4" bolt, long shank. 
 
 23. Wrenclt, for }4" bolt, short shank. 
 
 24. Wrench, for 3^" bolt. 
 
 2.5. Pin Wrench, for signal cylinder follower nut. 
 
 26. Pin Wrench, for switch valve piston packing nut. 
 
 27. 3/8". 1 
 
 28. %". [- Screw-drivers, black walnut handles. 
 
 i)Q _3_" 
 
 -J<7- 111 • J 
 
 30. T Head Screw-driver, ^". 
 
 31. Special Double Screw-driver, /". 
 
 32. Eye Bolt, for removing switch valve piston, 
 
 219 
 
SPECIAL TOOLS FOR ELECTRIC AND ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC WORK. iContinued.; 
 No. PLATE 97. 
 
 33. Re-tai'Ering Tooi,, for signal armature stem, 
 
 34. Re-skatinc Tool, for armature stem seat in switch valve. 
 
 35. RE-sEAriN(; Tool,, for pin valve seat in switch valve. 
 
 36. Guide, for No. 35. 
 
 37. Guide, for grinding pin valve into seat of switch movement lock cylinder, and into 
 
 valve seat of signal cylinder. 
 
 38. Guide, for grinding pin valve into seat of switch valve. 
 
 39. Re-tai'ERiN(; Tool, for switch valve armature stems. 
 
 40. Re-seating Tool, for armature stem seat in signal valve. 
 
 41. Re-,seatini; Tool and Guide, for pin valve seat in signal cylinder. 
 
 42. IDrill, for No. .'1 ; give size in ordering. 
 
 43. Drift, yg"-'/^" >^ 3", for general use. 
 
 Various Electrical Testing Instruments. 
 
 PLATE 98. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND LETTER. 
 
 A. Voltmeter. 
 
 B. Ammeter. 
 
 C. Mil-ammeter, 
 
 D. Galvanometer, 
 
 K. ) [ Two forms suitable for testing the specific gravity of storage and 
 
 ,- Hydrometers r -^ i <,^ • 
 
 p I \ gravit)' batteries. 
 
 G. Magneto 
 
 H, Voltmeter, for storage batteries. 
 
 I. CoNNECiiNG Piece, for Fig. H. 
 
 120 
 
PLATE 98. 
 
 (("W*";"!*— T"- — ~Vi 
 
 ii)/f^:m^.ii^im^ ' 
 
 221 
 
PLATE 99. 
 
 ^*^^^mim^^ 
 
 ■\ 
 
 
 6 
 
 "<.,,««v,,««.,,.»„ 
 
 ^gmi^^^mm^^jw^mmnm^m- 
 
 ^J ^^^S — 7 
 
 ' 
 
 9 10 
 
Different Kinds of Conducting Wires. 
 
 PLATE 01). 
 
 No. 
 
 ]. 
 
 4. 
 5. 
 f). 
 
 7. 
 
 S. 
 
 'J. 
 
 10. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 Akmorei) C.viii.E, specify in ordering- the number and size of wires that it is to contain. 
 
 Insulated Cable, 5 conductors. 
 
 IxsuLATEi) Calee, 4 conductors. 
 
 Insulated Cable, 3 conductors. 
 
 Insulated Cable, i' conductors. 
 
 Insulated Cable, 1 conductor. 1 Give size of wire required. 
 
 CoMBouxD Insulated Wire. 
 
 Flexible Electric Luait Wire. ; 
 
 Braided Oefice Wire. I 
 
 Galvanized Iron Line Wire. i 
 
 223 
 
PLATE lOO. 
 
 ^^^j 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 u 
 
 M 
 
 
 15 
 
 56 
 
 17 
 
 2A 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 ^5 
 
 ,23 
 
 26 
 ^7 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 31 
 
 4S 47 
 ? 
 
 48 
 4 9 
 
 50 
 
 224 
 
Switch and Signal Circuit Breakers. 
 
 PLATE 100. 
 
 A. Single Switch Circuit 1:)Reakek. 
 
 B. DnUKLE SwiT(.Il ClRCLir BREAKER. 
 
 Both A and B are placed upon the cross-tie near the point of a switch to 
 which they are joined by the rod (No. 11) and the chp (No. 12). They are 
 iisuall)' connected witli the track circuit in such a wa)' as to break tlie circuit 
 whenever the switcli is not set for the main route. Fig. C may also be used 
 for this purpose if desired. 
 
 C. Signal Circi^it Breaker. — This form is sometimes placed upon an electro pneumatic 
 
 signal pole and is connected with the counterweight lever of the home signal 
 through the link (No. 42) shown below. The circuit controlling the distant signal 
 maofnet is then led throuoh Fiof. C, and is broken whenever the home sio-nal, 
 immediatel)' in advance of, or the home signal on the same post with the distant 
 signal, stands in the danger position. Fig. C is also placed upon a mechanical 
 signal pole for controlling the circuit leading to an electric slot upon another 
 signal pole, and it may, in addition, be used for breaking any circuit that depends 
 upon the position of a semaphore signal. If desired, it may be used in place of 
 Fies. A and B. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 I 1. B(jx. 
 
 r, 
 
 J: 2. CfjVER. 
 
 7- . 
 
 ^S I 3. Tal Bolt, 3,4," x i/l" , for oil hole in Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 4. Shaft, for cams. No. 20, and crank. No. 14. 
 
 .3. RuLRER B.vsE, for two contact strips. 
 
 6. RuRRER I^ASE, for One contact strip. 
 
 7.. Box. 
 
 8. Cover. 
 
 9. Shaft, for cams No. 20 and crank No. 14. 
 
 10. RuRRER Base, for contact strips. 
 
 11. Rod and Ja.m Nu'J's, for connecting A and B with track. 
 
 12. Rail Clii'. 
 
 13. Bolt and Nut, 3,,s"xiy;", for fastening No. 12 to track. 
 
 14. Crank. 
 1.5. Stud, i^", and Cotter, for No. 14. 
 
 I 16. Washer, 3,^", for No. 15, 
 
 PC . 
 
 J z 
 
 h 
 
 
 h 
 
 Z -, 
 
 P z 
 
° 
 
 z I 
 
 
 54"xl2-?>2, for fastening Nos. 5, 6 and 10. 
 
 Double. 
 Long. 
 1^ Short. 
 
 a< a 
 
 ^ 30. 
 hi. 
 p2. 
 ' 33. 
 
 SWITCH AND SIGNAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS.— (Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 100. 
 
 f U. Bolt and Nut, 3s"xo;4", for fastening No. 2 to No. 1, and No. 8 to No. 7. 
 
 IS. Ring, for holding Nos. -i and 9 in place. 
 
 !■ 19. Rivet, for No. 18. 
 
 20. Cam. 
 
 21. Set Screw, l_^_" x 'H)~:\'2, for No. 20. 
 I 22. Rivet, for No. 23. 
 
 23. RuiiDER Roller, for No. 20. 
 
 24. Machine Screw, 
 
 25. j 
 
 26. M^nospiK.iR Bronze Contact Springs. 
 
 27. ! 
 
 28. Rurber Bushing, f(i-"-5/8", for wire holes In Nos. 1 and 7. 
 
 29. Rivet, for fastening No. 14 to Nos. 4 and 9. 
 Machine Screw, H"x 12-24, for wires on Nos. 25, 26, 27 and 45. 
 Washer, sV-tV, for No. 30. 
 Box. 
 Cover. 
 
 34. Journal. 
 
 35. Rltbp.er Base, for contact strips. 
 
 36. Shaft. 
 
 37. Rubber Roller. 
 
 38. Crank. 
 
 39. Stul), 5 ,s", and Cotter, for No. 88. 
 
 40. Washer, 5/,s", for No. 39. 
 
 41. Turned Pin, 5 8"x2tu", and Cotter, for connecting No. 42 with the counter- 
 weight lever on a semaphore post. 
 
 42. Link, with two eyes. 
 
 43. Link, with eye and screw jaw. 
 
 44. Turned Pin and Cotter, for jaw on No. 43. 
 
 45. Phosphor Bronze Strip. State whether contact strip or roller strip is required. 
 
 46. Wood Screw, 3 3"-#2, for fastening No. 45 to No. 35. 
 
 47. M.vcHiNE Screw, 5/g"x 14-20, for fastening No. 33 to No. 32. 
 
 48. Machine Screw, 5/s"x 12-32, for fastening No. 35 to No. 32. 
 
 49. Tap Bolt, I/2" x i^."-20, for fastening No. 34 to No. 32. 
 
 50. Rivet, for fastening No. 37 to No. 36. 
 
 PLATE 101. 
 
 A view of the tracks and signals at the Philadelphia Terminal of the Penn- 
 sylvania Railroad, looking from the end of the train shed. See also Plates 22, 31, 
 120 and 122. 
 
 z 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 < 
 
 ?26 
 
PLATE 101 
 
PLATE 102. 
 
 9A 9c 
 
 ■4, 
 
 (t----i 
 
 A A 
 
 10 
 
 II 
 
 ^28 
 
Trunking for Wire and Pipe. Oak Stake and Guide 
 
 for Pipe. 
 
 PLATE 103. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Grooved Trunking, hole l"xl". 
 
 2. Grooved Trunking, hole l"x2". - For conducting wires. 
 
 3. Grooa'ed Trunking, hole l"xn". j 
 
 4. Grooved Trunking, hole 1^2" xl/^", for 3,^" pipe. 
 
 5. Grooved Trunking, hole 2 7-8" diam., for 2" pipe. 
 
 6. Grooved Trunking, same as No. 5, except additional hole for cable. 
 
 7. Grooved Trunking, hole i" diam., for 3" pipe. 
 
 8. Grooved Trunking, same as No. 7, except additional hole for cable. 
 r A. Plan of Single Piece. 
 
 9. 
 
 Tube Trunking, hole 4' 
 diam. 
 
 B. End View. 
 
 C. Small Scale Plan, showing method of connecting. 
 
 10. Pipe Guiije, consisting of strap, plate and 4 nails ; shown in position on top of No. 
 
 11, and used for 2" or 3" pipe. 
 
 11. Oak Stake, 3"x4"x.O', for supporting pipe run above ground. The guide shown 
 
 here must be ordered separately, if desired. 
 
 229 
 
PLATE 103. 
 
 C 4r^ 
 
 CLEAR DANGER. CAUTION DOUBLE 
 POST 
 
 CLEAR DANGER. CAUTION DOUBLE 
 POST. 
 
 4f=j 
 
 CLEAR DANGER CAUTION. DOUBLE POST. 
 
 FOULING P0IN1 
 
 -t » = e. I 
 
 TRACK RELAY 
 
 TRACK RELAY. 
 
 TRACK BATTERY ,_^^^^ , 3,^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 SIGNAL BATTERY 
 
 LINE I. TRAIN A 
 
 TRACK BATTERVJ 
 
 " m 
 
 !|[|||[| I SIGNAL MAGNET. 
 
 SIGNAL BATTERY 
 
 TRAIN B 
 
 jTinVT^WTTTvlipii I ^o^i^ 
 
 ^^mi\^r^ ^^\nr^^^^w^2^ 
 
 S.I. 
 
 S2 
 
 S3 
 
 LINE 2. TRAIN A 
 
 S.4 
 
 TRAIN B 
 
 S5 
 
 3 7 
 
 — 'Q- 
 si 
 
 LINE 3 Tf 
 
 S.2. 
 
 — 1@- 
 5.3 
 
 | j£ag^;a:Egi^1od L |g;i]^>__|^ 
 
 — '©/ 
 S4 
 
 TRAIN e 
 
 s.s. 
 
 3 7 
 
 D.2 H 2 
 
 D.3 H 3 
 
 D-* H.-* 
 
 QS H.5 
 
 D6 H 6. 
 
 □ 7. H7 
 
 LINE A. TRAIN A 
 
 "T^i^^3^aC ^a2_ 
 
 Ztligm^^l"?],^^- 
 
 — Ctv— OJ.) 
 0.1 HI. 
 
 02!^ H2 
 
 — ^# — c© 
 D.3 H.3 
 
 LINE 5. TRAIN A 
 
 0.4. H 4. 
 
 TRAIN B 
 
 D.5 H 5 
 
 D. 6 H^ 
 
 0.7 H.7. 
 
 [goia]^caa]o c^ EO]|> 
 
 ^gggsj^ss^fg^l gg»t Z! 
 
 D2. H.I 
 
 D3 H 2 
 
 D.-4- H 3 
 
 D.5 H 4- 
 
 —■#•©- 
 D.6. H.5 
 
 D.7 in. 6. D.sT H.7. 
 
 LINE 6. TRAIN A 
 
 g Tiay 
 
 — n 
 
 D.2. HI. 
 
 D.3 H.2 
 
 TUNNEL. 
 
 D.4 H 3 
 
 D5 HA 
 
 D6 H.5. 
 
 D.7 H 6 
 
 D B. H.7. 
 
 DR^] [BJUDGE. -B — 
 
 2.;o 
 
Automatic Block Signaling. 
 
 PLATE 103. 
 
 TT IS proposed to i;i\-c in this description a y,'eneral idea of the tracl^ circuit 
 principle, together with a few of its most important applications. In order to 
 do this most simpl)-, we have shown under the letters A, Ij and C at the top of 
 the plate the three signals which are appropriate for the purpose. These signals 
 differ in form and in the force which causes them to change their positions, but 
 the Signal Magnet, Fig. D, is common to all of them, and depending on whether 
 this magnet is excited or discharged rests the question as to what indication will 
 will be given by the signal ; the reasons for this are more particularly stated in 
 the description attending Plates 107, ion and 7S, which respectively illustrate Figs. 
 A, B and C. Suffice it to say here, that all of the home signals 1 A, 1 B, 1 C, are 
 referred to in the description relating to S 1, S 2, etc., H 1, H 2, etc., on Lines 1, 
 2. ;5 and -4 ; that all of the distant siu'nals 2 A, 2 B, 2 C are referred to in the 
 description attending I) 1, D 2, etc., on Lines ?. and 4; and that any of the double 
 posts o A, 'A B, 3 C are to be understood as being referred to in the description of 
 Lines 5 and G. 
 
 The simplest form of track circuit is illustrated in Fig. D, and consists of a 
 section of railroad, commonly called a " Block," the adjacent rails of which are 
 electrically connected by what are known as track wires, while the ends of each 
 block are insulated from the ends of the adjacent blocks by wooden splices or 
 other non-conducting material. At the farther end of each block is located a track 
 battery, consisting of one or two (seldom more) gravity cells which supplies the 
 current for the rails and the track relay. \Vhen the track is in its normal condition, 
 that is, no broken rails, all swatches set for the main route, and no train wdthin the 
 limits of the block, the current will flow from one pole of the battery through one 
 line of rails, thence through the track relay and the other line of rails to the other 
 pole of the track battery; should, however, a rail be broken, a switch misplaced, 
 or a pair of wheels be standing beyond the louling point on a side track or on 
 the main track itself, the current from the track liattery, which is very light, is 
 either diverted from, or prevented from reaching, the track relay, which, having a 
 comparatively high internal resistance, remains unexcited. The armature bar of 
 the track relay is pivotetl at one end, and at the other end presses against a 
 spring- and closes a contact when the track rela)- magnet is excited. The elos- 
 ine of this contact completes a circuit through the signal magnet and the signal 
 battery which has, as a final effect, the clearing of the signal. It therefore follows 
 
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNALING. -(Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 103. 
 
 that any interruption or diversion of the current from the course above described 
 
 will result in a danger signal ; since each signal is so constructed as to go to and 
 
 remain at danger in case the power which operates the signal fails, the reliance 
 
 that is placed upon properly constructed and maintained, automatic track circuit 
 
 signals by all of those who are concerned with them is easy to be understood. 
 
 Line 1. — In this arrangement a signal occupies the danger position until a 
 train enters the block in its rear, and then, if everything is safe on the block and 
 overlap in advance, assumes the clear position, which it retains until the first pair 
 of wheels passes the block insulation shown like this G — , near the foot of the 
 post, when it resumes the danger position and holds it under all circumstances 
 until the last pair of wheels has passed the overlap insulation, shown like this — ^ j— , 
 beyond the next signal in advance ; the signal may then be cleared by an approach- 
 ing train as in the first instance, but will otherwise remain at danger. Train A 
 having passed S 1 holds it at danger, but as it has entered the clearing section of 
 S 2, and nothing interferes in advance, S 2 is found in the clear position. Train 
 B having passed into the block of S 4 holds it, as well as S 3, whose block it has 
 not entirely left, at danger; under ordinary circumstances, S 5 should be in the 
 clear position since there is no train in advance of it, but in this case there is a 
 broken rail, shown like this — ( ) — , which serves the same purpose and holds S .3 at 
 danger, while for the same reason S i; is in the clear position, for in this arrangement 
 of circuits it is the interruption of the current in the block immediately in the rear 
 of a signal which first tends to clear that signal. This last feature, although at first 
 glance it seems to be singular, is entirely correct, since it is the cianger in advance 
 of a signal which it is supposed to indicate. In consequence of this condition, 
 train B will follow a well known rule; it will pause upon reaching S 5 and after 
 waiting a certain number of minutes will proceed with great care through the blocked 
 section until it reaches S (i, when its course will be clear; S 7 in this line is in the 
 danger position, because, although the track may be uninterrupted in advance, there 
 is nothing on the block immediately in its rear to cause it to assume the clear position. 
 
 Line 2. — Here the arrangement of circuits differs from that just described only 
 in the fact that the signals remain in the clear position at all times when there is 
 no interruption on the block and overlap immediately in advance. Train A having 
 passed S 1 holds it at danger, and finds S 2 at clear, because train B has passed 
 out of the section which controls that signal. Train B now occupies both of the 
 sections that control S ."> and S 4, and it therefore holds both of those signals at 
 danger; upon reaching S 5 train B must come to a stop, for the signal is at danger, 
 
 232 
 
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIQNALINQ.-(Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 103. 
 
 owing to the presence of a broken rail. After waiting a certain number of minutes 
 train B will proceed \vith great caution until it has reached S <;, Avhen it will con- 
 tinue with confidence under the assurance of a clear signal ; S 7 is seen to be in 
 the clear position, since, as already stated, the presence of a tram on the block 
 immediately in its rear is not necessary for clearing it in this arrangement. 
 
 Line ;]. — Under this system the ox-erlapping feature has been abandoned, but 
 is replaced by distant signals, which are located between 1,2U0 and li.uoo feet in 
 the rear ot the home signals, upon whose position they partially depend. In this 
 arrangement the signals keep the danger position until a train enters the section 
 immediateh' in their rear, as ^vas described in Line 1. dd'ain A having passed D 1, 
 H 1 and D 2 holds them at danger, but since the clearing section of LI 2 has been 
 entered, that signal stands at safety. Train B has entered the clearing section of 
 D and H 5, but a broken rail in advance of them holds them at danger, for 
 which reason train B will stop upon reaching H 5 and then proceed with care until 
 it reaches D G and H G, which are in the clear position. U 7 and H 7 naturally 
 stand at danger, since no train has entered the clearing section in their rear. 
 
 Line 4. — The signals shown here are located the same with reference to the 
 blocks as are those on Line P., but their usual position is at safety, as described 
 in Line 2, instead of being caused to assume that position by an approaching 
 train. Train A has passed D 1, Hi and D 2, and is therefore holding them at 
 danger, while H 2 is at clear, because train B has passed out of its territory, but 
 D 5 and H 5 are at danger, since there is a broken rail on their controlling block. 
 D 6, H G, D 7 and H 7 are clear, for the track ahead is intact and unoccupied. 
 
 Line 5. — Here the distant signal has been moved back, and now, instead of 
 being placed within 1,200 or 2,ooo feet of the home signal, upon which it depends, 
 is placed directly under and on the same post, with the next home signal in the 
 rear. On this line the signals are caused to assume the clear position by an 
 approaching train. Train A has passed D 2, H 1, and is approaching Do, H 2; 
 it has cleared H 2, but D 3 remains at caution, because train B has not passed out 
 of the block in advance of H •■■> in concert with which L) .3 works. It is evident to 
 train A, from the position of 1) ;;, that it may find H ;'. at danger, and speed is there- 
 fore reduced. Train B has found I) O at caution, for H 5 is confronted by a broken 
 rail ; but H -1 was clear, and train B is therefore proceeding, knowing that the 
 block it is in is clear, but that it may find a danger signal upon reaching H 5. 
 This proves to be the case, and train B must stop, wait the stated length of time, 
 and then proceed with great care until another clear signal is reached. 
 
 233 
 
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIQNALINQ. -(Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 103. 
 
 Line (i. — The arrangement of signals is the same on this line as on line 5, 
 but instead of being cleared by an approaching train they stand ordinarily in the 
 clear position, and only go to danger in the presence of danger. Train A holds 
 D 2, Hi at caution and danger, but finds H 2 clear. The reasons for this are 
 obvious ; D 3, however, being controlled b}' H 8, is at caution, for train B occu- 
 pies the block in advance of H .".. On reaching D 6, H 5, train B will come to a 
 stop, made necessary by the presence of a broken rail in advance of H 5; after a 
 pause train B will proceed with great care until it reaches D 7, H (i, which both of 
 them stand in the clear position, and consec^uently show that at least two blocks 
 are clear in advance. 
 
 Tunnel, Draw-Bridge, Junction. — These figures are given merely as sug- 
 gestions and to show some of the various applications of which the track circuit 
 automatic signals are susceptible. 
 
 Passenger Station. — Here the signals are cautionary, and for the purpose 
 of warning an approaching train on a double-track railroad that a train is occu- 
 pying the other track in front of the station. 
 
 We have not attempted to either illustrate or describe more than a very few 
 of the infinite number of arrangements to which the track circuit may be applied. 
 We, however, shall take great pleasure in estimating on or designing special circuits. 
 
 Battery Housings and Relay Box. 
 
 PLATE 104. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND LETTER. 
 
 A-A'. Wooden Battery Chute, for 2 cells. / This style is also made in sizes to contain 
 
 B-B'. W(jODEN Battery Chute, for 16 cells. \ 4, B and 8 cells. 
 
 C-C'. Iron Battery Well, capacity of 04 cells. 
 
 D-D'. Terra Cutta Battery Chute. 
 
 E. Iron Rela\' B(jx. We also manufacture wooden rela)' boxes of various styles ; in 
 
 ordering them it is only necessary to state for which relay on Plates 116, 117, 
 119, 121, 123 and 125 they are required. 
 
 ^34 
 
PLATE 104. 
 
 iili 
 
 t^r/f-p^ 
 
 r—-r;r~ -.^r^.-z.^i^--. 
 
 ^ 
 
 B 
 
 B 
 
 <QI 
 
 F 
 
 % 
 
 •4Uf/^ C TuR E D Bv 
 I HE U,IH ON 
 
 i I 
 
 \ 
 
 '.€>: 
 
 ¥ 
 
 FRONT VIEW. 
 
 D 
 
 r^ 
 
 \ \ 
 
 ¥ 
 
 Tr 
 
 SECTION rc. 
 
 
 \ 
 
 a 
 
 SIDE ELEVATION. 
 
 23s 
 
PLATE 105. 
 
 
 ,4 
 
 W?re™»»?" 
 
 -;JL 
 
 :a 
 
 .^•A-. 
 
 B 
 
 mKuaaaim>mmi!tim4i- j&Ak^^^a'a 
 
 i«^ *>*"-■■ 
 
 -.T 
 
 y^-Jim^iW^B^lji^ 
 
 '•^I 
 
 • 2 
 
 »^ig pj^!; jW ;S »;!!^ . ' ty^jK ; ^fjgs.M>y»tw 
 
 ^^*^!*«^!iiii»*c2sS; 
 
 ivmis 
 
 •< ^ . 3 ^. 
 
 p^pppppwppr- 
 
 D 
 
 o 
 
 95T 
 
 XSi.-. 
 
 I O I s 
 
 i> 
 
 .^^^^"^ 
 
 m/ 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 <ifM 
 
 f o 
 
 1 7 
 
 236 
 
Parts Relating to the Track Circuit. 
 
 PLATE 105. 
 
 A. IinXT, showing; track wire in place. In practice, two track wires are used at eacli joint. 
 
 one on each siile of the rails, 
 
 B. J(.>ix'r, showing splice wood insulation. Another method of insulating is by the use of 
 
 ordinar)' angle bars, separated from the rails by No. 3. Fig. B is, however, to 
 be preferred wherever it can be used. 
 
 No. 
 1. 
 
 0. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 11. 
 12. 
 
 i;i 
 u. 
 
 15. 
 16, 
 
 17. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 Inside Splice Wood. | In ordering, give the section and punching of the rail that 
 
 Outside Splice Wcud. \ they must fit. 
 
 Fii'.KE AxGLE Plate. 
 
 Bolt, 3/j^", and Nut, for fastening Nos. 1 and 2. In ordering, give required length 
 from inside of head to end of bolt. 
 
 'or raisme 
 
 the switch rail from the cross ties. 
 
 Fii;KE Em) Piece, for use in connection with Fig. B. 
 
 Washer, 3,/", ) 
 
 C For No. 4. 
 Fibre Bushing ) 
 
 WoniiEX Slide Plates ) 
 
 Iron Slide Plates. ) 
 
 j Two forms of the Zinc ^ 
 
 \ Element. 
 
 Cni'i'ER Element, 
 
 Ba'i'terv Jar. 
 
 Tiiu.MR Screw, for No. 11. 
 
 TiiuMR .Si'REW, for No. 10. 
 
 CoNNEC'J'iXG Slei-a E, for the 
 terminals at No. 1.']. 
 
 Enlar'.recl view of Wire and Rivet. This is used for two purposes : first as a Track 
 Wire, in Avhich case a rivet is used at each end; second, as a Connecting Wire, 
 where only one end has a rivet. In ordering, specify the length of wire and size 
 of rivet. 
 
 Parts relating to the battery only. 
 
PLATE 106. 
 
 "1 
 
 si 
 . ■ ^ 
 
 t&S 
 
 238 
 
The Union Electric Banner Signal and the Union Electric 
 
 Target Signal. 
 
 PLATE 106. 
 
 T^HESE signals differ only in the form of the trades by which the condition of 
 
 the track in advance is indicated to approachin-' trains; the livNNER Signal 
 is shown on the outside edges of the illustration as it appears in actual service, 
 the figure on the extreme left being in the danger position, while that on the 
 extreme right indicates safety; at times, however, a safety blade No. 10, Plate 108, 
 is added, which is seen while a signal stands in the position occupied by that on 
 the right, furthermore, if circumstances require it, the two shields Nos. :\ and 4, 
 Plate 108, are provided, which cover the back of the signal and lamp, hiding them 
 from the sight of trains approaching irom the wrong direction. 
 
 The Target Signal is illustrated on the upper middle part of Plate 106, but 
 since the post is exactly like that of the Banner Signal, it has been cut off in the 
 picture. Of the Target Signals, the one on the left indicates safety, the one on 
 the right danger, but these are not the only forms used with this signal, for 
 on Plate 108 (Nos. 13, 14, 15 and 16 j, will be found various arrangements for this 
 purpose. 
 
 The weight which operates all of these signals shows through the opening near 
 the bottom of the left-hand post, while the controlling instrument, likewise common 
 to all of them, is sho\\'n in its case at the top of the same post, and on a larger 
 scale, in the centre of the page. The doors Nos. 2 and 20, Plate 108, are kept 
 tightly closed when in service, as may be seen b}^ the appearance of the two 
 upper and the extreme right-hand signals. 
 
 A chain to \vdiich the operating weight is attached, passes over a sprocket 
 wheel that is mounted on the shaft whose square end projects from the face of 
 and near the bottom of the instrument ; by means of the crank No. 23, Plate 109, 
 which fits the shaft, the instrument is wound up. The signal magnets (referred to 
 in the description attending Pig. D, Plate lu,3) are located upon the upper right- 
 hand side of the instrument, and above the magnets, pointing to the left, is the 
 armature bar, which, as its free end is alternately raised and lowered by the charging 
 
 and discharging of the magnets, releases one oi the detent toes Nos. 53 and 54, 
 Plate 109, and holds the other raised. The office of the detent toes is to disengage 
 and then enoa^re the detent pawls Nos. 57 and 58, Plate 109, with the detent 
 crosshead No. 40, Plate 109, first releasing the crosshead, then permitting it to 
 make a quarter turn and finally hold it in its new position. The detent crosshead 
 
 239 
 
THE UNION ELECTRIC BANNER SIGNAL AND THE UNION ELECTRIC TARGET SIGNAL.— (Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 10(3. 
 
 is mounted upon a shaft which carries one of the train of gears that change the 
 vertical revolution derived from the weight, to the horizontal one necessary for the 
 signal itself 
 
 A round nut, whose office is to break the circuit to the signal magnets, when 
 the operating weight is nearly run down, is carried on the shaft that also carries 
 the before-mentioned sprocket wheel ; this nut is guided by a brass finger which 
 prevents it from rex'oh'ing, but forces it to move forward as the shaft is turned by 
 the falling of the weight. To the nut is fastened a hard rubber insulator, which, 
 just before the weight has reached its lowest point, passes between and separates 
 two contact springs through which the current to the signal magnet must go. 
 Since the magnets are necessarily charged before a clear signal can be shown, 
 this arrangement provides that the signal shall go to and remain at danger before 
 the power derived from the weight is exhausted. 
 
 The separate parts of these signals are illustrated on Plates 108 and 109. 
 
 The Union Electric Disc Signal. plate 107. 
 
 "T^HIS is our oldest form of signal, and is one which has been largely copied as 
 to its external appearance. The lamp which illuminates the signal at night 
 is provided with a powerful reflector, by means of which an extremely strong night 
 signal is furnished. One peculiar feature, which will recommend it to all practical 
 men, i-^ the fact that as the background is made of thin white cloth, the lamp 
 need never be removed for any purpose but to clean it. 
 
 The figure on the left illustrates the face of the signal as seen by an 
 approaching train ; the right-hand figure shows the rear of the case and the position 
 of the lamp. Of the two large scale figures the upper one is the safety position 
 of the disc; the lower one, the danger position. This disc is made usually of 
 thin red silk stretched upon a brass wire frame, that is fastened to, and revolves 
 with, the armature of the signal magnet. When the signal magnet is charged (as 
 illustrated by Fig. D, Plate 103), the disc is drawn up and disappears in the upper 
 part of the case, leaving the white background exposed; upon the breaking of 
 the circuit the disc falls by gravity and comes into view. By this it will be seen 
 that, unlike our other automatic signals, the magnets in this one not only control 
 but also furnish the power to move the signal. 
 
 240 
 
PLATE 107. 
 
 . ff-v'i 
 
 241 
 
PLATE 108. 
 
 ▼ ^ 
 
 m 
 
 242 
 
The Union Electric Banner Signal, and the Union 
 
 Electric Target Signal. 
 
 LARGE PARTS. 
 
 PLATE 108. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Case. 
 
 •2. Door of Case. 
 
 3. Shield, for back of banner ; this is made in different forms. 
 
 4. Shield, for back of lamp on banner signals. 
 
 5. Yoke. 
 
 6. Bell. 
 
 7. Rubber Gasket, for bell. 
 
 8. Baxxer axd Shaft. 
 
 9. Arm, for sheet iron safety piece No. lo. The safety piece is not always used, in which 
 
 case the arm is omitted. 
 
 10. Safety Piece (sheet iron), sometimes used in connection with the banner signal. 
 
 11. Shaft, for target signal. 
 
 12. Cross Arm, for sheet iron pieces Nos. lo, 14, 1.5 and 16. 
 
 13.1 
 
 )■ Different forms of sheet iron pieces used in connection with the target signal. 
 1.5. 
 
 16. J 
 
 17. Ladder, standard length is 13 ft. 6 in. 
 IS. Upper Sectiox of Post. 
 
 19. Middle Sectiox of Post. 
 
 20. Door of Post. 
 
 21. 100 LI!. Weight. 
 
 22. Bottom Section of Post. Standard length is 5' , but it can be made 10' long if desired. 
 
 243 
 
PLATE 109. 
 
 BBS 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 m 
 
 "(f 
 
 
 ^47 46 
 
 <> o"« 
 
 ^m " ^ 
 
 I f , f T f 
 
 •f„, J.. l„ ?... f== I: 
 
 f. T I 
 
 
 I.. » 
 
 4 9S 
 
 !.-,- fc 
 
 9 f) 1 9 7 " 9 ■ 1 
 
 10 1 1 " 2 
 
 103 104 '"^' 
 
 1 1 (: 118 13 IT.: 
 
 '10 111 
 
 113 114 
 
 US nv 
 
 O O ^Sto* '^3 
 
 iao 
 
 ■0 i::7^ •'■^ 
 
 1 ' G Si U' 7 
 
 i:lA 
 
 
 i"riaiif!(fi7 
 
 244 
 
The Union Electric Banner and Target Signals. 
 
 SMALL PARTS. 
 
 PLATE 109. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Gas Pipe, 3^' x U", filling; piece for No. i'. 
 
 ■2. Bolt and Nut, i3"xl5is", for fastening No. ;;, Plate lOS, to No. 5, Plate KlS. 
 
 8. Weather Strip. 
 
 4. RuiiBER Palkrxg, for No. 3. 
 
 5. Bolt anli Nut, i^'x-'Si-^", for joining No. IS, Plate 109, and Nos. 4 and 5, Plate 108, 
 
 (front): See No. b. 
 
 6. Tap Bolt, ir'x2i<", for joining (Plate lOS), Nos. 1, 17 and IS. 
 
 7. B(jLT AND Nut, Sg'xiy/', for joining No. 5, Plate los, to No. 1, Plate 108. 
 
 8. Bolt and Nut, j4"x:i", for joining No. 18, Plate 109, and No. 5, Plate 108, (back). 
 
 See No. 5. 
 
 9. Bolt and Nut, 3,8"x1", for fastening No, 10, Plate 109, to No. 1, Plate 108. 
 lU. Insulator Bracket. 
 
 11. Glass Insulator. 
 
 12. Bushing, for No. 6. Plate 108. ) 
 
 r Used only with Target Signal. 
 
 13. Bushing, for No. 15, Plate 1U9, ) ;> & 
 
 14. Strip, for fastening Nos. 2(3 and 31, Plate 109, to No. 1, Plate 108. 
 
 15. Weather Cap. 
 
 16. Leapj Washer, for No. 15. 
 
 17. Compensator Spring. 
 
 18. Upper Bearing, for No. 8, Plate 108. 
 
 19. Lamp Spindle. 
 
 20. Counterweight. 
 
 21. Counterweight Pulley. 
 
 22. CoUNTERWEIGiri' J AAV. 
 
 23. Winding Crank. 
 
 24. Ul'l'ER COMI'ENSATOR. 
 
 25. Lower Comi'ensator. 
 
 26. Front Frame Plate. 
 
 27. Connecting Piece, for Nos. 26 and 31. 
 
 28. Top Plate. 
 
 29. Vertical Shaft Bracket. 
 
 30. Stud and Nut, for fastening No. 31, Plate 109, to No. 1, Plate 108. 
 
 31. Back Frame Plate. 
 
 32. Main Shaft. 
 
 245 
 
THE UNION ELECTRIC BANNER AND TARQEI SIGNALS, SMALL PARTS. -iContinued.) 
 
 0.>. iviAIX LjEAR. 
 
 34. Ratchet Wheel. 
 
 35. Spr(_)civEt Wheel. 
 
 3(5. Blxdixc Collak, for No. 32. 
 
 37. Cn<cuiT I'Srkaker Nut, for No. 32. 
 
 31S. Guide, for No. ;;7. 
 
 3!». Vertical Shai-t. 
 
 4(». Detent Crossheah axe St(il Pexs. 
 
 41. Mitre Gear, 
 
 42. PiNiox, for No. 43. 
 
 43. Ixtermediate Shaet. 
 
 44. COUPLIXG CR(JS.SHEA1). 
 
 45. Stop Latch. 
 
 46. Circuit Breaker Caai. 
 
 47. D(_>oR Lc)CK. 
 
 48. DuoR Luck Spring. 
 
 49. D<M.)R Lock Escutcheox. 
 
 50. Door Key. 
 
 5L WixDixG Hole Escutcheox. 
 
 52. Door Knob oe Case. 
 
 53. Re.vr Detext Toe. 
 
 54. Front Detent Toe. 
 
 55. Stud and Nut, for Nos. 53 and 54. 
 
 56. Stul) and Nut, for Nos. 57 and 58. 
 
 57. Rear Detext Pawl. 
 
 58. Eront Detent Pawl. 
 
 5;i. Stop Pix, for Nos. 53 and 54. 
 
 60. RupRER TuPE, for No. 59. 
 
 6L Back .Strap, Stud axd Nut. 
 
 62. Magxeis. In orderiny, give the resistance required in ohms. 
 
 63. Armature. 
 
 64. Armature Bar. 
 
 65. Spectacle. 
 
 66. ALvGXEF Bracket. 
 
 67. Stud axd Nut, for No. 69. 
 
 68. ChAIX CiiUPLLXG. 
 
 69. Chain Roller. 
 
 70. Chaix, standard lenyth 27'. See Nos. 122 and 123. 
 
 71. Pjracket, for detent pawl spring. 
 
 246 
 
THE UNION ELECTRIC BANNER AND TARGET SIGNALS, SMALL PARTS. -Continued.) 
 
 No 
 -0 
 
 PLATE 109. 
 
 Bkac/ket, for armature bar sjjrini^'. 
 
 7:>. H AKi> Rl'i;i;i-,r Bask, for Nos. 1l'4 and 1-25. 
 
 74. Hakh RuiMiKR Bask, for Nos. 12('i and 127. 
 
 7.5. Cap Sokiav, i'/' x 1 i_,_", for joinini^' Nos. 2(1, 27, ol and 72. 
 
 7ti. Cap Screw, i^'c" x 3_,_", for joining- Nos. '2('>, 27 and .'il. 
 
 77. Car Scri-w, -{;/'\]". for clamping (Plate lOS) No. 1) to No. 8. 
 
 7s. Car Scri-av, ^.^''x ' /', for fastening No. (;i to No. (52. 
 
 71». Set Screw, .^s" >^ -^4". f'"' fastening (Plate U)S) No. 12 to No. 11. 
 
 8(1. Machixe Screw, 1 J," x 18-1(;, for fastening No. 45 to No. 2.S. 
 
 81. Maciuxe Screw, 34"x18-1(c for fastening (Plate 1(J8) .No. (> to No. 1, 
 
 82. Set Screw, .^.^" x '_,."-."i2, for joining Nos. 25 and 4i). 
 
 80. ?\Iacuixe ScRiAV, 5,s"xl2-24, for fastening (Plate 108) No. '.( to No. It), and for 
 fastening Nos. l:',, 14, 15 and 1(3 to No. 12. 
 
 >>4. Detexi' Plx axi) Nut, for No. 54. 
 
 85. Machixe Screw, 5,s"x12-24, for fastening No. 121 to No. 33. 
 
 Tkuxxiox Screw, for front J 
 
 r of No. (34. 
 Tri'xxiox Screw, for rear ) 
 
 8(3 
 87 
 
 88. Machixe Screw, 7,s"x 12-32, for fastening Nos. 29 and (irt to No. 2(3, and No. 
 
 74 to No. 2(;. 
 
 89. Machixe Screw, 3/,;" x 12-32, for fastening No. 71 to No. 2C), and No. 28 to Nos. 
 
 2(3 and 31. 
 
 90. Machixe S( rew, 5',s"x 12-32, for fastening No. 38 to No. 2(i, and No. do to No. (34. 
 
 91. Machixe Screw, -iV"x 12-32, for fastening No. 128 to No. 72. 
 
 92. Machixe Screw, '4" x 12-32, for fastening No. 129 to No. 71. 
 
 93. Machixe S(;rew, 5,s"xS-;',2, for joining Nos. 44 and 4('>. 
 
 94. Machixe Screw, V3"x.S-.",2, for No. 3(3. 
 
 95. Machixe Screw, 3,s"x8-32, for fastening Nos. ;; and 4, Plate 109, to No. 1, 
 
 Plate lOS, 
 
 9(3. Machixic S(;rew, ^/^" x x-:'<'2, for fastening Nos. 124 and 125 to No. 73i, and No. 
 130 to No. 53. 
 
 97. Machixe Screw, 3-3" x (3-32, for fastening No. 134 to No. 28. 
 
 98. Machine Scih.w, 3 ,s" x (;-.'i2, for fastening No. l.-w; to No. .';7. 
 
 99. Machixe .Sijrew, iV"x.S-.'!2, for ends of Nos. 55 and 5(3. 
 
 100. Washer, ^"-^", for No. 99. 
 
 101. Taper Pix, for No. 24. 
 
 102. Taper Pix, for No. 4(i. 
 
 103. Taper Pix, for No. 44. 
 
 104. Taper Pix, for joining No. 135 to No. (34. 
 1(35. Taper Pix, for No. 1!). 
 
 106. Shaet, for No. 21. 
 
 247 
 
THE UNION ELECTRIC BANNER AND TARGET SIGNALS, SMALL PARTS.— (Continued.) 
 
 No^ PLATE 109. 
 
 Y. \ K'T. Stop Pix, for aniKiture bar. 
 
 O J 
 
 " ( lOS. Ri\ ET, for joining Nos. 1 and 2, Plate los. 
 
 lOy. Phosphor Broxzp: Pix, for Nos. 12s and 131. 
 
 (' 110. Pix, for fastening Nos. 41 and 34 to shafts. 
 
 .■ I 111. Pix, for No. 4i>. 
 
 " j 112. Pix, for Nos. 57 and TiS. 
 
 I n;-'). Pin, for stopping No. 45 (driven into No. 28). 
 
 114. Ger^iax Sha'er Pix, for No. 120. 
 
 115. Binding P(.tsT Washer. 
 11(3. BiXDixG Post axd Screw. 
 117. BixDixi; Post Nut, ^^'-'^-l. 
 lis. Adjusting Screw and Nut. 
 
 liy. L(j(Tv Spixdle .\nd Nut, for No. 47. 
 
 120. Pawu, for No. 53. 
 
 121. Pawu, for No. 34. 
 
 122. Link. / 
 
 ^ f For chain. (See No. 70.) 
 
 123. Rivet. ) ^ 
 
 124. Ppiospiior Bronze Contact Spring with Puatinum Disc. ) For upper circuit con- 
 
 125. Phosphor Bronze Coxtact Spring with Platinum Point. ) troller. 
 
 126. Ger?iian Silver Contact Spring with Platinum Disc. ) For lower circuit con- 
 
 127. German Silver Contact Sprixi; avith Platinum Point. ) troller. 
 
 128. Armature Bar Spring. 
 
 129. Detent Pawl Sprixg. 
 
 130. Sprixg, for No. 120. 
 
 131. Sprixg, for No. 121. 
 
 132. Piece of Ixsulated Copper Wire. ^ 
 
 \ Any length. 
 
 133. Piece of Copper Wire ix Rubp.lr Tube. ) 
 
 134. Spring, for No. 45. 
 
 135. Detext Pix, for No. 64. 
 
 136. Hard Rurper Insulator, for No. 37. 
 
 137. Hard Rurper Insulator, for No. 125. 
 
 138. Brass Rivet, for No. 137. 
 
 PLATE 110. 
 
 This is a very important piece of work; it is one of the most difficult loca- 
 tions in the United States ; is used by the passenger and freight trains of five 
 different railroads and is further complicated by the presence of a drawbridge. It 
 is very doubtful if this plant could have been successfully interlocked otherwise than 
 through the Electro-Pneumatic System 
 
 248 
 
PLATE 110. 
 
 249 
 
PLATE 111. 
 
 250 
 
The Union Lock and Block System. 
 
 PLATES 111 AND 113. 
 
 nPHE external appearance of the instruments as mounted on a Saxby & Farmer 
 * Improved Interlocking Machine is shown on Plate 111, and the instruments 
 themselves on a larQ-er scale on Plate 112. 
 
 From Plate ill it will be seen that there is no mechanical connection between 
 the block instrument at the top of the machine and the levers, a particular in which 
 this one, which is entirely electric in its operation, differs, from all the old lock and 
 block systems; the electric locks are shown mounted over the interlocking of the 
 machine, and the back view exhibits the connection between them and the inter- 
 locking shafts. 
 
 The arrangement of four levers and two block instruments is the one com- 
 monly employed on double track railroads, whereby two blocks are controlled from 
 a cabin, one block in each direction; the levers numbered 2 and 3 operate the 
 home signals, which are directly governed by the block and lock instruments ; the 
 levers 1 and 4 operate the distant signals, which in their turn depend upon the 
 position of the home signals, through the interlocking on the machine. 
 
 In describing this system three cabins and trains moving in one direction 
 only will be considered, since the whole plan of operation may be explained through 
 them, and on double track the movement of trains in one direction does not 
 interfere in any way with the movement of trains in the other direction. The 
 cabins, which will be named A, B and C, each contain such a machine as is illus- 
 trated on Plate 111, and to simplify the description, the operation of the distant 
 signals will be ignored beyond the statement now, that they are not concerned in 
 the general scheme of the system but are included in the plan solely for the pur- 
 pose of facilitating traffic, and may be operated or not without in any way affecting 
 the relations which are established between the cabins. In our account, therefore, 
 we shall refer only to a certain lever in each cabin, which will always be lever 2, 
 and will control the entrance of trains to the block immediately to the right of the 
 cabin. 
 
 The elements of the system which will be noticed in this description are the 
 
 Cadix, Lever, Push Button, Lock Instrument, 
 
 Operator, Block, Brock Instrument, Signal, 
 
 and for convenience these terms will always be followed by the letter A, B orC, 
 which will indicate the particular block that they refer to. 
 
 A means of communication must exist between adjoining cabins, which may 
 consist of a bell-tap code, a Morse telegraph or a telephone. Operator B will be 
 able to communicate with both A and C, but tor block-signaling purposes no 
 
 2=;r 
 
PLATE 113. 
 
 ■^ C 2 
 
THE UNION LOCK AND BLOCK SYSTEM.— (Continued, i 
 
 PLATES 111 AND 113. 
 
 necessity exists for any connection between A and C. Since nothing in tliis system 
 is left to chance, a fixed course of action is necessary in order that trains may receive 
 permission to proceed ; that course we now propose to describe. 
 
 The levers A, B and C are assumed to be normal, all of the blocks are unoc- 
 cupied, and a train is approaching cabin A that wishes to enter block A. Operator 
 A now asks operator B to release him, which he partially does by grasping the 
 knob and pulling out the slide bar, plainly sho\vn at the base of the block instru- 
 ment; the result of this action is to clear the small semaphore at the top of block 
 instrument A, and partly establish a circuit through electric lock A, which operator 
 A completes by pushing a button with one hand (this button, by the way, is some- 
 times located on the fioor and is worked by the foot) at the same time that he 
 reverses lever A and clears signal A. The train now enters block A, and upon 
 passing signal A automatically restores signal A to the danger position through 
 the medium of an electric slot, the operation of which is fully explained on page 
 215; operator A then puts his lever in the normal position, where it is again firmly 
 locked. The same method is followed between cabins B, C, etc., throughout the line. 
 
 An important feature of the arrangement is the means employed to prevent 
 operator B from releasing operator A more than once between the passage of each 
 two trains. This is accomplished through the lifting of the plate on the block 
 instrument that is marked trmn in block. When block A is entirely clear, the instru- 
 
 LOCKED. 
 
 ment B exhibits the word Free, which indicates that operator B may pull out his 
 slide bar ; in doing this the card is raised to the position Locked, and so held 
 until a train has entered Block A, upon which it drops to the position Train in 
 Block, where it continues to hold the slide bar locked until the train has passed 
 cabin B and entirely cleared block A, when the word Free is again exhibited. 
 
 By the above it will be seen that the block instrument in a cabin exercises 
 no control over the machine in that cabin, but is connected with the electric lock 
 which is placed on the machine directly in its rear; that it is impossible to clear 
 a signal twice between the passage of any two trains ; and that a failure of the 
 electric current will result in tying up the operations and keeping the signals at 
 danger until its action is restored. 
 
 The use of the electric lock here illustrated is not confined to the lock and 
 block system, but is the one which we now use on all of our Saxby & Farmer 
 Improved Machines where electric locking is desired. 
 
 The parts of these instruments will be found on the next two following plates. 
 
 -'Sj 
 
PLATE 113. 
 
 60 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 
 38 
 39 
 
 63" ""' K^-^ 
 
 WZ # lea 
 
 65 66 67 68 
 
 70 
 
 4 
 
 
 71 
 
 72 
 
 T 
 
 ^''/ 73 
 4-3 4.4 / 
 
 -6 77 
 
 78 
 
 y 
 
 '45 
 
 46 
 
 80 * 92 ^^ 
 
 a-r 
 
 9 80 
 
 79 81 
 
 |o4- ftas eg 37 
 
 He 
 
 so 
 
 88 
 
 ■I 
 
 89 
 
 5! 
 
 -vi 
 
 52 
 
 t. 
 
 53 ■ 94- Bss iae " S'^ 
 
 -£f I^« 1^^ tioo|,oi 
 
 I I f f 
 
 1 I T » 
 
 106 107 "108 109 
 
 55 56 
 59 
 
 57 
 
 58 
 
 110 
 
 111 112 113 
 
 f T ^ ' 
 
 254 
 
Union Block Instrument. 
 
 PLATE 113. 
 
 No. ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 1. Shoulder. 
 
 2. Leg. 
 
 3. Right-Hand Mh.dle Bracket. J These are placed on the lockinir shaft of an inter- 
 
 4. Left-Hami MiHDLE BRACKET. \ locking machine for supporting No. 2. 
 
 5. Right-Haxd End Bracket. J These are placed on the ends of an interlocking ma- 
 
 6. Lhft-H,\nj> End Bracket \ chine for supporting No. 2. 
 
 7. Bolt Axi) Nut, ',"xl3«". ^ For fastening Nos. 3, 4, 5 and 6, Plate 113, to No. 1, 
 
 8. Tap Bolt, I," X -^^". \ Plate 114. 
 
 9. Cai' Screw, 3s"x43 3". J 
 
 ^ , ,, ,, i" For fastening- Nos. 5 and 6 to an interlocking: machine 
 
 lU. Cap Screw, ^z xI^h .\ ^ * 
 
 11. Base. 
 
 12. Slide Bar. 
 
 13. Slide Bar Knob. 
 
 14. Slide Bar Spring. 
 
 15. Brass Strap, for raising No. 2.5. 
 
 16. Main Fra.me. 
 
 17. Bracket, for No. 30. 
 
 18. Hasp, for slide bar end of No. 14. 
 
 19. Bracket, for No. 48. 
 2(). Back Stop Latch. 
 
 21. Pedestal. 
 
 22. Front Stop Latch. 
 
 23. Lndicator Frame. 
 
 24. Indicator Plate. 
 
 25. Indicator Arm. 
 
 26. RuiiBER Base, for back circuit breaker. 
 
 27. Rubber Base (upper), for front circuit breaker. 
 
 28. Rubber Base (lower), for front circuit breaker. 
 
 29. Rubber Base, for Nos. .50 and 51. 
 
 30. Brass Semaphore Plate. 
 
 31. Suppor-i-, for No. 23. 
 
 32. Upper Armature Bar. 
 
 33. Lower Armature Bar. 
 
 34. Upper Armature. 
 
 35. Lower Armature. 
 
 36. Magnets. In ordering a pair of magnets give the resistance required in ohms. 
 
 255 
 
No. 
 
 37. 
 38. 
 39. 
 40, 
 41. 
 42. 
 43. 
 44. 
 45, 
 46. 
 47. 
 48. 
 
 4;». 
 
 50. 
 
 51. 
 
 52. 
 
 53. 
 
 54. 
 
 55. 
 
 56. 
 
 57. 
 
 58, 
 
 59. 
 
 60. 
 
 61. 
 
 62. 
 
 63. 
 
 64. 
 
 65. 
 
 66. 
 
 67. 
 
 68. 
 
 69. 
 
 70. 
 
 71. 
 
 72. 
 
 73. 
 
 74. 
 
 75. 
 
 For No. 29, 
 
 UNION BLOCK INSTRUMENT.— (Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 113. 
 
 Back Strap, for No, 36. 
 
 Resistance Coil. In ordering give the resistance required in ohms. 
 
 Semaphore Magnets. In ordering give the resistance required in ohms. 
 
 Back Strap, for No. 39. 
 
 Armature, for No. 39. 
 
 Semaphore Counterralance. 
 
 Copper Wire, in rubber tube. Give length required. 
 
 Phosphor Bronze Rod, for joining Nos. 23 and 31. 
 
 Hard Ruep.er Guide, for Nos. 50 and 51. 
 
 Dowel Pin, for fastening Nos. 25, 66 and 67 to No, 70 and No. 32 to No. 89. 
 
 Sem.vphore. 
 
 Semaphore Spiaft. 
 
 Se:maphore Post. 
 
 Lower Contact Spring. 
 
 Upper Contact Spring. 
 
 Goose Neck Contact Sprini;, 
 
 Straight Contact Spring, with platinum disc. 
 
 Straight Contact Spring, with double platinum point, \ 
 
 Short Contact Spring, with platinum disc. 
 
 Short Contact Spring, with platinum point. 
 
 Long Contact Spring, with platinum disc. 
 
 Long Contact Spring, with platinum point, 
 
 German Silver Contact Spring, for No. 79, 
 
 Hasp, for base end of No. 14. 
 
 Shaft, for No, 22. 
 
 Roller, for No. 61. 
 
 -Shaft, for No. 20. 
 
 Split Cotter, irV" -^ -^/s", for Nos. 61 and 63. 
 
 Roller, for No. 63, 
 
 Socket, for No. 72. 
 
 Jaw, for No. 68, 
 
 RuiiBER Roller Circuit Breaker, 
 
 Latch Pin, for No, 25, 
 
 Shaft, for Nos. 25, 66 and 67, 
 
 Counterbalance. 
 
 Arm, for Nos, 66 and 71. 
 
 Long Binding Pc.ist. 
 
 Short Binding Post. 
 
 Binding Post Screw, ?4;" x 10-32, 
 
 - For No, 26. 
 
 '- For Nos, 27 and 28 
 
 .56 
 
b J 
 
 M 1 
 
 UNION BLOCK INSTRUMENT.- (Continued, i 
 No. PLATE 11.3. 
 
 76. Brass Wasiler, '/^"-i^", for Nos. 7.''i, 74, s I and 10^. 
 
 77. RuilKER Busiiixc, M"-3x". \ 
 
 ' ' l^or Nf). 7.-;. 
 
 7S. Hex. Nut, ^/^''-Ml'. \ 
 
 79. Adjustinc Screw am> Jam Nut, 1 Tj:^" x |0-,Hi', with platinum point. 
 
 SU. Ruitjer BusniN(,, for No. 71). 
 
 81. Bkass Bolt and Nlit, "s" x i_,_"-;;i;, for fastening .No. f)'.'* to N(^. 17. 
 
 82. Rui-UJER BusiiiNc, for No. 8 1. 
 
 88. Brass Washer, h"-f,i", for head of No. 81. 
 
 8J:. Latch, for No, .".2. 
 
 8.5. Laich, for No. ;>1 
 
 8H. Latch Sim^exc, for No. 85. 
 
 87. Steer Roleer, for No. 25. 
 
 88. BoE r AM) Nur, 2^-4" x l(i-;)2, for holding No. .Hs. 
 sy. Shaef, for Nos. ;')2 and :iS. 
 
 90. Hex. Nut, 3/,s"~16, for No. 21. 
 
 9L BoEr anj.i Nu'I', 7g" x 8-82 ; stop for No. ."i2. 
 
 92. Brass Washer, ',s"-ni". for contacts on No. 29. 
 
 98. PL.A-i E Terminal, for wire at No. 79. 
 
 f 94. Car Screw, y2" x y^"--20. for fastening No. Ki to No. 11. 
 
 95. M.vchrxe Screw, 5 ,s" x c^."-2(i, for fastening Nos. 15 and 18 to No. 12. 
 
 96. M.A.CHLXE -Screw, .^'s" x 10-24, for joining Nos. 86 and 87. 
 
 97. Machine .Screw, V4" x 1(i-24, for fastening No. 84 to No. 82, and No. 85 to No. 88. 
 9.S. Machexl Screw, 3.^" x 8-82, for fastening No. 2H to No. 1 H. 
 
 99. Trunxion Screw, ^//'x 12-82, for No. 89. 
 
 100. M.\( iiLXE Screw, 5/s" \ 12-82, for fastening Nos. 27 and 28 to No. 16. 
 
 101. Machixi: Screw, 5'8"x 12-24, for joining Nos. 12 and 18. 
 
 102. M.xcHiNE Screw, l4" ^ 12-24, for fastening Nos. 55, 56, 57 and 58 to Nos. 27 and 28. 
 108. M.vcHixL Screw, 5/s" x 8-82, for fastening Nos, 89 and 40 to No. 80. 
 
 104. M.wnixE Screw, ix"xl<*-82, for No. 71. 
 
 105. M.w.HLXE Screw, 3x"x12-;!2, for fastening No. 17 to No. Ui. 
 
 106. Maihrxi-: .S( riwv, 3x">;''^-82, for wire connections on Nos. 52, 58 and 54. 
 
 107. M.WHLXE Screw, 3 x" -^ 6-82, for wire connections on No. 29. 
 
 108. M.ACHiNE .Screw, i4"x6-;'i2, for fastening No. 49 to No. 80. 
 
 109. M.\< (IL\E .Screw, '.4" x 8-82, for fastening Nos. 52, 58 and 54 to No. 26, and for 
 
 wire connections on No. 81. 
 
 110. Machine S(R]:\v, i/^"x6-;i2, for fastening No. 29 to No. 80. 
 
 111. Ma( HiNE .S(REw\ .Ls" X 8-82, for fastening No. 80 t(j No. 17. 
 
 112 M.vcHLNE Screw, '4." x 6-82, for fastening Nos. 50 and 51 to No. 29. 
 
 118. M.\cHiNE Screw, '/8"x4-40, for fastening No. 86 to No. 88. 
 
 257 
 
PLATE 114. 
 
 ^^^■^•■-^Mfsi^^^ ^fim ^ti l'^ ;^^ 
 
 10 
 
 I 
 
 11 I 12 
 
 -asS^'^iiitim 
 
 3,T 1^' ^'0 
 
 27 
 
 43 
 
 28 
 
 3 3J 
 
 9 
 
 47 
 
 51 
 
 «! 
 
 38 
 
 44 
 
 52 
 
 ■^P 
 
 48 
 
 29 34 
 
 35 
 
 30 36. 
 
 a 
 
 45 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 46 
 
 49 
 
 53 
 
 I 50 
 
 15 ^^^ 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 26 
 
 13 
 
 154 61 
 
 f 
 
 T 
 
 64 
 
 57 
 
 58 
 
 65' 
 
 66 f 
 
 S9 67 I 
 *60 68? 
 
 258 
 
Union Electric Lock. 
 
 PLATE 114. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Ancle Ikon, iiKule in different len^tiis <iiul fastened td interlockin;,; machine, for sup- 
 
 porting No. ;i, Plate 114, and Nos. :!, 4, .5 and f., Plate li;}. 
 
 2. Biii.r AMI Nui', ,i,x"-^l". for fastening No. 1 to interlocking machine. 
 ;i C.\,si-Ir(>\ Rasi:. 
 
 4. Co\EK. 
 
 5. Boi.T AND Nut, .'.s">^1'4", for fastening No. :'> to Nd. 1. 
 
 6. Bk.\(Ki;t, for No. 7. 
 
 7. Shai r, for locking-circuit breaker. 
 
 8. L()CK].\(; Dog. 
 
 9. Apjust.vble Link. 
 
 10. Swivel, for No. '.). 
 
 11. TuRXLD Pix, i.<"x-j", and Cotter, Vs"x3^", for joining Nos. 10 and 1 -J. 
 
 12. Dkivek. 
 
 13. Cai' Screw axu Nut, 3, x"x2A:j^", for fastening No. 12 to shaft of interlocking machine. 
 
 14. RuiU'.EK Bam;, for locking-circuit breaker. 
 
 15. RuBMER Base, for indicator-circuit breaker. 
 
 16. Si'EUT.VrLE. 
 
 17. INI.VGNLis. Give resistance required in uhms. 
 IS. Armature. 
 
 I'J. AR^L\TURE Bar. 
 
 20. Lo(RiX(; LaT( iL 
 
 21. Brass Frami;, for No. 22. 
 
 22. Ceeluloii) SiM:i:r, for protecting indicator No. 27. 
 2o. Stuo, ><"x]'4", stop for No. '.(. 
 
 24. Pai)L(m;r, for fastening No. 4. 
 
 25. Screw Stud, .i ,s" ■"< 1 'i". f"'' joining Nos. s and ;». 
 
 2H. Screw Stuo, 3 i^" x 2 X-^" , for joining Nos. ;;, 4 and 20. 
 
 27. Ini)Ica'1'(ir, 
 
 28. Stuo, ^4"x7,s", for joining Nos. 7, S and 4'.). 
 
 29. Coi'Pi'R WiRi: IN RuRRER TiiRE. Give length re<|uired. 
 
 30. RuRiJER BusiiiNc, "^''-ak". insulatiou for wire passing through No. :',. 
 
 31. Bendin(; Screw. 
 
 32. Short Bindenc 1'ost. 
 
 33. LuNc; BiNiJiNc Pos'i. 
 
 34. Brass Washer, ^^''-'/z", for binding posts. 
 
 2 59 
 
UNION ELECTRIC LOCK. -(Continued.) 
 No- PLATE 114. 
 
 O.5. Hex. Nut, y_^."~:'rJ, for binding posts. 
 
 36. RuBBKR BusuiNc, V4."-3/>i", for binding posts. 
 
 37. Rubber R(.)eeek, .ix"x7s", for locking-circuit breaker. 
 
 38. Shaet, for No. 37. 
 
 39. Enl> Bearinc, for No. o8. 
 
 40. Dowel Pin, i,s"xl", for No. 39. 
 
 41. Centre Beakinc, for No. 3S. 
 
 42. Hasi>. I 
 
 I 
 
 43. Staple. ; For No. 24. 
 I 
 
 44. Key. J 
 
 45. Short Geralan Sil\er Coniai'i- Slrino. 
 
 46. Long Germ.'\n .Silver Contact Spri\(;. 
 
 47. Long Phositk.ir Bronze Conta(.:l Sprint,. 
 4S. Short Ph(.isphor Bronze Contact Sbrinm;. 
 
 49. Phosphor Bronze Lasteninc;, for No. 'JS. 
 
 50. CoNNECTiNc; Link, for Nos. 19 and 27. 
 
 51. Right-hani> Bracket, for No. 27. 
 
 52. Left-hand Bkacket, for No. 27. 
 I 53. Rod and Sit<ew Jaws, for joining Nos. 1 ;< and 20. 
 I 54. Trunnion Screw and Nut, 1 i^^" x i4;"-32, for supporting No. 19. 
 
 m j 55. Machine Screw and Nut, 3^" x lu-32, stop for No. 19. 
 
 I b6. Aljjustin(; Screw and Nut, for No. 19. 
 
 I 57. Cap Screw, ^/l" x y^" -'20 , for fastening No. 17 to No. 3. 
 
 z . 58. Cap Screw, ^/4" x y^"-20, for fastening No. 16 to No. 3. 
 
 " I 59. Machine Screw, -xj^" x ^^_"-20, for fastening No. 6 to No. 3. 
 
 I 60. Machine Screw, 34"xi4"-20, for fastening No. 18 to No. 19. 
 
 61. Machine Screw, 7^8" x 12-32, for fastening No. 14 to No. 3. 
 
 62. Machine Screw, }^"x 12-24, for fastening wires to Nos. 47 and 48. 
 
 63. Machine Screw, )^"x8-32, for fastening No. 15 to No. 3. 
 
 64. Machine Screw, j,8"x8-32, for fastening No. 15 to No. 16. 
 
 65. Machine S(T<ew, 14^" x 8-32, for fastening Nos. 47 and 48 to No. 14; for fasten- 
 ing wires to Nos. 45 and 46, and for fastening No. 21 to No. 4. 
 
 66. Machine Screw, 4x"x6-32, for fastening Nos. 45 and 46 to No. 15. 
 
 67. ScRE\\ Stud, 3 x" x 4-4o, for fastening No, 53 to Nos. 19 and 20. 
 
 68. Rivet, V'8"x4s", for fastening No. 42 to No. 4. 
 
 < - 
 
 260 
 
PATENTS RELATINO TO ELECTRIC SIONALIINQ. (Continued from Pag:e iil7.) 
 
 NAME. 
 
 C. A. S(;()TT, . 
 GEO. WESTINCiHOUSK, Jr.. 
 GEO. WES riNCUlOUSK, Jr. 
 C. A. SCOTT, . 
 
 (). (;assett, , 
 o. gassett, , 
 o. gassett, . 
 
 C. A. SCOTT, . 
 O. GASSETT, . 
 O. GASSETT, . 
 O. GASSETT, . 
 O. GASSETl', . 
 F. L. POPE, 
 C. H. JACKSON, 
 C. H. JACKSON, 
 C. .-V. SCOTT, . 
 F. L. POPE, 
 F. L. POPE, 
 C. A, SCOTT, . 
 j. ']■. HAMKAV, 
 J. r HAMBAY, 
 J. r. HAMBAY, 
 J. P. COLEMAN, 
 J. P. COLEMAN, 
 J. G. SCHREUDEK, 
 J. T. HAMBAY, 
 J. V. YOLING, . 
 S. H. STUPAKOFK, 
 S. H. STUPAKOFF, 
 E. H. (;OODMAN, . 
 
 J IILN 
 
 :u. 
 
 1883, 
 
 JUL\ 
 
 31, 
 
 1883, 
 
 July 
 
 31, 
 
 1883, 
 
 A UllUST 
 
 14, 
 
 1883, 
 
 AUOUST 
 
 U, 
 
 18S3, 
 
 AUOUST 
 
 14, 
 
 1883, 
 
 1)k(.em]ikr 1L 1883, 
 
 January 2i), 1884, 
 
 Januar\ 29, 1884, 
 
 JANUAR^ 29, 1884, 
 
 February 12, 1884. 
 
 February 
 
 20, 
 
 1884, 
 
 M arch 
 
 18, 
 
 1884, 
 
 May 
 
 6. 
 
 1884, 
 
 July 
 
 1, 
 
 1884, 
 
 July 
 
 s. 
 
 18H4, 
 
 August 
 
 13, 
 
 1884, 
 
 AUCiUST 
 
 12. 
 
 1884, 
 
 August 
 
 12, 
 
 1884, 
 
 November 2."i, 1884, 
 
 November 2.3, 1S84, 
 
 Novejiber 25, 1884, 
 
 May 7, 18S!i, 
 
 May 28, 1889, 
 
 December 9, 1890. 
 
 April b, 1892, 
 
 December 13, 1892. 
 
 April 11, 1893, 
 
 May 1G, 1893, 
 
 July 2.':i, 1893, 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 282,230 
 282,249 
 282,250 
 283,152 
 283,231 
 283,233 
 289,837 
 292,087 
 292,743 
 292,744 
 293,571 
 294,030 
 295,427 
 298,209 
 301,369 
 301,837 
 303,589 
 303,590 
 303,595 
 308,492 
 308,493 
 308,494 
 402,562 
 404,170 
 442,338 
 472,499 
 488,138 
 495,135 
 497,732 
 502,229 
 
 and others. 
 
 261 
 
PLATE 115. 
 
 26: 
 
Electric Lock for Stevens Machine. 
 
 PLATE 115. 
 
 T^HIS lock is placed above the interlocking of the machine, perpendicular to 
 its longitudinal axis, and in a horizontal position. The notch in the lock 
 lever (No. :',) engages with a dog that is built upon the tappet (No. 14, Plate 7), 
 and holds the tappet fast when the magnets (No. -JO) are discharged; the armature 
 (No. 19) is pulled from its position above the lock lever when the magnets are 
 excited, thus permitting the dog upon the tappet to raise the lock lever and force 
 its way out of the notch. 
 
 For the purpose of showing how the Cover (No. 1) is fixed with reference 
 to the rest of the device, it is placed at the top and away from the other details. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Cover. 
 
 2. Bracket, for lock lever. 
 
 3. LijCK Lever. 
 
 4. Turned Pin, for joining Nos. 2 and 3. 
 f). SrLiT Cutter, for No. 4. 
 
 Ci. T.\p Bolt, 1^2" x 3/g", for joining Nos. 1 and 2 to Stevens machine. 
 
 7. Tap Bolt, 1"x3/^", for joining No. 10 to Stevens machine. 
 
 !S. Cap Screw, J/^"xi^", for joining Nos. 20 and 21. 
 
 9. Machine Screw, }4" ^ yi", for joining Nos. 15 and 19. 
 
 10. Spectacle. 
 
 11. Bra.ss Nut, for No. 12. 
 
 12. Back Strap Support. 
 
 13. Shaft, for No. 1.5. 
 
 14. Dowel Pin, for fastening No. 18 into No. 10. 
 
 15. Armature Bar. 
 
 Ki. CciUNTERWEIOHT. 
 
 17. COUNTERWKICHT ArM. 
 
 18. Machine Screw, 14;" x 4-32, for fastening No, IC. to No. 17. 
 
 19. Armature. 
 
 20. Pair of Maonets. 
 
 21. Back S'prap. 
 
 22. Pad Lock. 
 
 23. Key. 
 
 263 
 
PLATE 116. 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 :64 
 
Relays. 
 
 OTHER FORMS ARE SHOWN ON PLATES 117, 119, 121, 12.} AND 125. 
 
 PLATE 116. 
 
 A. .'^PoiNl' U NCO\KKI';i> RlXAW 
 
 B. ;^-PoT-\T Dust Proof Rkl.w. 
 
 No. 
 
 < 
 
 o 
 
 4. 
 f). 
 
 (•). 
 
 s. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 11. 
 
 la. 
 
 14. 
 15. 
 
 If;. 
 
 17. 
 IS. 
 
 19. 
 
 I 20. 
 I 21. 
 
 ! 22. 
 
 I 2;-;. 
 
 ' 24. 
 I 2tj. 
 
 IN ORDERING ANY RELAY, GIVE THE RESISTANCE REQUIRED IN OHMS. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 Ba.se. 
 
 Pair of M.\(;NE'rs. Give resi.stance required in ohms. 
 
 Back Strap, with stud and adjusting nut. 
 
 Cat Screw, J^" x ^^."-20, for fastening back strap to magnets. 
 
 Akmaturi:. 
 
 BiMiij\<; P(;s'i'. 
 
 Screw, 7s" x 1()-.",2. 
 
 Hex. Nut, i4"-;i2. 
 
 -r> T) I " , " ! I'or }.)in(Hnpf post No. fi. 
 
 KcilHER nilSHlNC, 'ii -3 X .1 ' 
 
 I'Skass W'asfifk, 'i|"-V2". I 
 
 AiiitcsriNc S( REW Axii Jam Nci, with platinum point, l"xl()— M2. 
 
 AnjUSTixc S(kK\\' AXii |.\M N c I', with insulated point, l"xl(l-;i2. 
 
 Brass Washek, .^''-'-j"- / 
 
 RuJillFR BijSIIIXC, ..V'-'/i''. ^ 
 
 For adjusting screws Nos. 11 and 1 1' 
 
 Mica Ixsheatkin. Made in different sizes and forms, depending on where it is to 
 be used. 
 
 Coit'KK Wire, in rubber tube. Give length required. 
 
 Brass Macijixf Screw, '/4"xS-82, for fastening armature No. f) to armature bars 
 Nos. 2.S and 42. 
 
 Bra.ss Maciijxe Screw, yj^" xA-\^\ for fastening wires to armature bars anil spec- 
 tacles, and for fastening contact springs Nos. ;;() and 41 to armature. 
 
 Brass Washer, 's" rV. / 
 
 RURRER BUSMIX(,, 'x"-|'V, "• 
 SlM^C TACLi;. 
 
 Ru1;!i;er Bij.siiin(;, .^/y" X 1(i-;52, for adjusting screw holes in spectacle. 
 
 Brass Machine Screw, .^ s" x 1 2-;;2, for fastening spectacle to base. 
 
 Rurrer Bush IXC, :,',"-^x". '^^>^' screw No. 2;;. 
 
 Ma(;ne'|- Brack ei. 
 
 Brass Machkxe Screw, 3/^^" x 1 2-.")2, for fastening magnttt bracket to base. 
 
 hor screw No. bS. 
 
o 
 
 
 « O ) 
 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 -< 
 m 
 
 < 
 
 No. 
 
 I ■'■ 
 
 28. 
 j 21). 
 L 30. 
 
 31. 
 
 32. 
 
 33. 
 
 34. 
 
 35. 
 
 36. 
 
 37. 
 
 38. 
 
 39. 
 
 40. 
 41. 
 42. 
 43. 
 
 THREE-POINT UNCOVERED AND DUST-PROOF RELAYS. (Continued.) 
 
 Rur.i'.KR BusHiN(;, :j\" x ^/g", for screw No. 26. 
 
 Armature Bar.s. 
 
 Trunnion Screw, 1"x14;"-32, for holding armature bar. 
 
 PiiDSi'iiOR Bronze Contact Sprinc, with platinum disc. 
 
 Cover Frame. 
 
 Celluloid Sheet, for cover frame. 
 
 Dus']' Proof Spectacle. 
 
 Hard Ruhper Base, for insulation of dust proof spectacle. 
 
 Rup.PER Bushino, ys'-yi", for wire holes in spectacle No. 33. 
 
 RupBER BusHiNc, '^''-N 10-32, for adjusting-screw holes in spectacle. 
 
 PLATE 116. 
 
 RUPPER Busiii 
 
 NG, 
 
 ', for screw No. 39. 
 
 Brass Ma(;hine Screw, 3/i:j"x6-32, for fastening cover frame to spectacle. 
 
 Brass Machine Screw, 3^" x 12-32, for fastening magnet bracket and spectacle 
 to base. 
 
 Trunnion Screw and Jam Nut, lyi" x }^"-'A2, for holding armature bar. 
 
 Phosphor Bronze Contact Spring, with platinum disc. 
 
 Armature Bar. 
 
 Ma(;net Bracket. 
 
 Interlocking Relays. 
 
 PLATE 117. 
 
 IN ORDERING ANY RELAY GIVE THE RESISTANCE REQUIRED IN OHMS. 
 
 A. Interlocking Relay. — Square ends on the armature bars, two contact springs. 
 
 B. Interli icKiN(; Relay — Square ends on the armature bars, one contact spring. 
 
 C. Interlocking Relay. — Hooked ends on the armature bars, no contact springs. 
 
 Any one of these relays may be built without, or be furnished with, either one, two, 
 three or four contact springs on the armature bars. 
 
 A list of the parts is given on the following page. 
 
 266 
 
PLATE 117. 
 
 267 
 
PLATE 118. 
 
 ?68 
 
Interlocking Relays. 
 
 PLATE 118. 
 
 PARTS RELATING TO PLATE 117. 
 
 No. ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 2. Magnets, give resistance required in ohms. 
 
 3. Copper Wire r\ Rcpkek Tt-pk, give length re(|uired. 
 
 4. Magnet Bracket. 
 
 5. Cap Screw, 3,4" x ,■«"-] S, for No. -t. 
 
 6. Ru;ht-H.\nii Spectacle. 
 
 7. Left-Hand Spectacle. 
 
 S. Back Strap, stud and adjusting nuts. 
 
 U. Cap Screw, p,'' x l^"-2(), for No. S. 
 
 10. Armature. 
 
 11. Brass Screw, J y" .v s-;^)2, for No. lo. 
 
 12. Contact Sj'Rlnc (A and B, only). 
 
 13. St(ip, for armature bar (A and B, only). 
 
 14. Contact Sprln(, (B, only). 
 
 15. Hook, for armature bar (C, (Mily), 
 1,H. Armature Bar. 
 
 17. Machine Screw, '72" n 12-82, for fastening spectacle to base. 
 
 18. Machlne Screw, 3,-4" x 12-82, for fastening adjustment post, contact post and tension 
 
 posts to base. 
 
 19. Machine Screw, I/^"x4— 82, for fastening contact springs Nos. 12 and 14 to armature 
 
 bar. 
 iO. M.\cHiNE Screw, 3 x" n 4-82, for fastening Nos. 18 and If) to No. 1(1. 
 21. Bra.ss Washer, Vs'-i^", for Nos. 19 and 20, 
 
 Piece nv Mica Insula iion, made in different sizes and forms, depending on where it is 
 
 to be used. 
 Brass Hex Nut, ^4."-.",2, for binding post. 
 
 24. Brass Washer, %"-y2". for binding post. 
 
 25. Brass Screw, 10-82 for binding post. 
 
 26. Binding Post. 
 
 27. C(jNTAf:T Posi (for A only). 
 
 28. Adjust.men'i Post. 
 
 29. Adjustin(_; Screw, insulated point. 
 
 30. Adjustin*; Screw, platinum point. 
 
 31. Rubber Bushing, ^^"-^'s", for armature bearing in spectacles. 
 
 32. Rubber Bushing, '^''-ws". for base (No. I). 
 
 33. Rubber Busiiin(., 's"-r,i". for hook (No. 15). 
 
 34. Rubber Bushing, W-tk"' for contact spring (No. 12). 
 
 35. Tension Spring. 
 
 36. Tension Shaft. 
 
 37. Tension Posi. 
 
 269 
 
 •)•:> 
 
 28. 
 
PLATE 119. 
 
 270 
 
Relays. 
 
 PLATE 119. 
 OTHER FORMS ARE SHOWN ON PLATES llO, 117, 131, 133 AND 135. 
 
 A. Interlix'KINc Relay. — Upper mat^net open circuit; lower magnet closed circuit. 
 
 B. Intekluckinm; Relay. — Both magnets are on a closed circuit. 
 
 IN ORDERING ANY RELAY, GIVE THE RESISTANCE REQUIRED IN OH/VIS. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 2. Copper Wire, in rubber tube. 1 _ 
 
 [ Give length requii'ed. 
 
 3. Copper Wire, silk insulation. ) 
 
 4. Magnets. Give resistance required in ohms. 
 
 5. Spectacle, for the upper magnet. 
 
 6. Spectacle, for the lower magnet. 
 
 7. Back Strap. 
 
 8. Armature. 
 
 9. Bracket, for the upper magnet. 
 
 10. Bracket, for the lower magnet. 
 
 11. Armature Bar, for the upper magnet. 
 
 12. Hr)OK, for armature bar No. 11. 
 18. Latch, for relay "A." 
 
 11. Latch, for relay " B." 
 
 15. Armature Bar, for the lower magnet. 
 
 U'l. Machine Screw, 5.-3" x 12-;] 2, for fastening spectacle to base. 
 
 17. Maihine Screw, -)'4^" x 1 2-32, for fastening magnet brackets to base. 
 
 18. Brass Washer, ^V" x 3 g", for back contact post on lower spectacle. 
 
 19. Contact Post, 7,s"x1()-32, for lower spectacle. 
 
 20. Capstan Jam Nut, for contact post No. 19. 
 
 21. RuiiiiER BusHiNi;, :jV"-iV'-t«". fof contact post No. 19. 
 
 22. Brass Screw, 1"xI/^"-32, without rubber tip; trunnion for lower armature bar. 
 
 23. Brass Screw, 1"x 14 "-32, with rubber tip; trunnion for upper armature bar. 
 
 24. Adjus'ijng Screw and Jam Nut, 1"x 10-32, with insulated point, for upper spectacle. 
 
 25. Adjusting Screw and Jam Nut, 1"x 10-32, with platinum point, for upper spectacle. 
 
 26. Adjusting Screw and Jam Nut, 5/8"x8-32, with platinum point, for contact of lower 
 
 spectacle. 
 
 27. Adjusting Scre\v and Jam Nut, 7-8"x4-52, for lower armature bar. 
 
 28. Brass Screw, 5.4;" x 10-32, for binding post. 
 
 271 
 
INTERLOCKING RELAYS.— (Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 119. 
 
 29. Binding Post. 
 
 30. Rubber Bushing, '^"-i/s", for binding- post. 
 
 31. Brass Hex. Nut, for binding post. 
 
 32. Brass Washer, %"-}4", for binding post. 
 
 33. Rubber Bushing, 3V"-tV"-,^4". for spectacle and upper magnet brackets. 
 
 34. Mica Insulation, made in different sliapes and sizes to suit location. 
 
 35. Bronze Latch Sprin(,, for lower armature bar. 
 
 36. Silver Balance Strinu;, for upper armature bar. 
 
 37. Machine Screw, '/,."x4-4o, for fastening hook to upper armature bar. 
 
 38. Rubber Bushing, .-/V'-s^", for screw No. 37. 
 
 39. Machine Screw, Vj<" x 2-64, for latch spring to lower armature bar. 
 
 40. Machine Screw, fTi"x4-32, for fastening wire to spectacle. 
 
 41. Brass Washer, ^/s"-'^4". for No. 40. 
 
 42. Machine Screw, i.4"x6-32, for fastening armature to bars. 
 
 43. Machine Screw (Iron), I/^"x 12-24, for fastening back strap to magnets and brackets. 
 
 PLATE 130. 
 
 This is a recent and most successful installation. It is at the Philadelphia 
 Terminal of the Pennsylvania Railroad, one ot the most important stations on one 
 of the most important railroads in the United States. For many years this point 
 was protected by a Saxby & Farmer Machine that was erected in 1881; under the 
 demands of a rapidly increasing business the original locking was replaced by our 
 improved locking (see Plates 1, 2, 3 and 5) in 1890, which continued in service until 
 the station itself was greatly enlarged and the tracks entirely rearranged. Then it 
 was decided to make use of the Electro- Pneumatic System, which resulted in the 
 present plant. 
 
 Other views of this place are given on Plates 22, 31, lOl and 122. 
 
 272 
 
PLATE 130. 
 
 273 
 
PLATE 131. 
 
 274 
 
Relays. 
 
 PLATE 121. 
 OTHER FORMS ARE SHOWN ON PLATES 1 1<>, 117, llO, 123 AND 125. 
 
 o 
 
 < 
 o 
 
 h 
 
 a 
 z 
 
 P 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 A. 2-Pl>ixt Relay, sealeil base. 
 
 B. 1-PoiNT Relay, sealed base. 
 
 These relays are tested in the shop, and are then permanently sealed against moisture 
 or meddling. 
 
 IN ORDERING ANY RELAY, STATE THE RESISTANCE REQUIRED IN OHMS. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Base. 
 
 '2. Base Plate. 
 
 3. Back Stop (no contact), 
 
 ■i. Armature Bracket. 
 
 5. Armature. 
 
 -^ 6. Rubber Insulator, between No. .5 and No. 7 
 
 7. Phosplh ir-Broxze Sprinc;, jeweled point. 
 
 8. Rubber Bushing, ,h"-H"' ^°^ ^os. 7 and 9. 
 
 9. Iron Machine Screw, f,, x 8-32, for fastening Nos. 5, 6 and 7 together. 
 
 10. Special Screav, }4 x y^-o2, for fastening No. 3 to No. 1. 
 
 11. Iron IMachine Screw, I/:j;" x 8-32, for joining Nos. 4 and 5. 
 f 12. Back Strap. 
 
 13. Iron Machine Screw, 3,^x10-24, for back strap No. 12. 
 
 14. Magnets. — (In ordering give resistance that is wanted.) 
 
 15. Special Brass Nut, I/^"-28, for fastening magnets to base. 
 If;. Brass Screw, 10-32, for binding post. 
 
 17. BiNDRvr; Post, with platinum end. 
 
 18. BiNDixc, Post, plain. 
 
 19. Brass Washer, %"-}4", for binding post. 
 
 20. Rubber Bushing, '4"-3,s", for binding post. 
 
 21. Bra.ss Nut, }i"-''>-2,' for binding post. 
 
 22. Iron Machine Screw, 3,s"xlO-24, for joining base to base plate. 
 
 23. Ger.max Silvei; Contact Spring, platinum point. 
 Mica Insulatkjx, made in different sizes and forms, depending on where it is to 
 
 be used. 
 Screw Trunnion, for armature bracket. 
 Piece nv Copper Wire lv Rubber Tui;f„ 
 
 275 
 
 Q 
 
 < 
 
 O 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 u 
 
 < 
 
 24. 
 
 2.5. 
 26. 
 
RELAYS WITH SEALED BASES.— (Continued.^ 
 No. PLATE 131. 
 
 27. Bask, 
 
 2S. Bask Pkatk. 
 
 21). Ar.akvtukk Brackei". 
 
 ;!<). Rur.i'.KR Screw Pix, 3 s" x 4-;;2- 
 
 31. Germax Siia'Er Cdxrvc r Srrixc;, platinum point. 
 
 32. PiiosriiuR-BRoixzE SpriN(., jeweled point. 
 ° J 33. Armature. 
 
 34. Ba(_ R Smr, with contact point. 
 
 3,5. P^iRRE Pkug. 
 
 3(i. Rur.BER BusHixc, for No. 3S. 
 
 37. Brass Nut, 8-32 for No. 3S. 
 
 38. Iri.)X Maciikxk Screw, ,V" x 8-32, for joining Nos. 21), 31, 32 and 33. 
 Irox Macihxe Screw, J^" x 10-24, for joining base plate to base at the sealed corner. 
 
 39. 
 
 PLATE 133. 
 
 These illustrations show the method of arrane^insr the instruments in a cabin 
 at a large terminal, by means of which the train director is able to keep himself 
 informed of the movement of trains, the condition of the tracks, etc. 
 
 These views were taken in caljins of the Pennsylvania Railroad, at Philadel- 
 phia, where the Electro-Pneumatic System is in use. 
 
 276 
 
PLATE 123. 
 
 277 
 
PLATE 133. 
 
 B 
 
 t*- 
 
 
 
 fe:^7*5««-- 
 
 murnssi 
 
 r^^H 
 
 fc*- 
 
 » 
 
 
 i s« 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 ^ '"'f^ifflmJBffffl 
 
 i ~ 
 
 - 
 
 : 'Jl 
 
 
 ^^ j^^aHfi 
 
 H'-'- - 
 
 - 
 
 -j" -J ^B 
 
 
 ^tjj^ife^ 
 
 ~ u^^^B^H^tM 
 
 jgff^' - 
 
 **' '-*' *" 
 
 ^MH 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^IhlLI 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 lO 
 
 O 6 I 
 
 30 32 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 J4 
 
 O iS 
 
 ? 16 
 
 ? 17 
 
 37 
 
 278 
 
Relays. 
 
 PLATE 123. 
 
 OTHER FORMS ARE SHOWN ON PLATES 110, 117, 110, 121 AND 125. 
 
 A. 1-PoiNT Relay, front and back contact. 
 
 B. 1-PoiNT Relay, back contact, only. Uncovered. 
 
 C. l-PoiNT Relay, back contact, onh'. Dust proof spectacle. 
 
 IN ORDERING ANY RELAY, GIVE THE RESISTANCE REQUIRED IN OHMS. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. B.VSE. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 6 
 
 □ 
 
 z 
 
 < 
 
 7 
 
 < 
 
 s 
 
 12, 
 
 i;i 
 
 14. 
 
 fe a z z 
 
 Magnets ; y"i\'e resistance in oiims required. 
 
 Armature. 
 
 BiXDLXG Post Screw. 
 
 BlNDIiXG PcST. 
 
 RuuBER BusHiXG, J.^" — 3 y", for binding post. 
 
 Brass Washer, i/j^" — ^,4", for binding- post. 
 
 Brass Hex Nut, l_^," — .",2, for binding- post. 
 
 Cap ScRE^v, }4" x y^"-2i), for fastening magnets to back strap. 
 
 10. Adjustixg Screw axd Jam Nut, l"xln-;j2, with platinum point. 
 
 11. Br,\ss Maimilxe Screw, 5. .s" x 12-;52, for fastening spectacles A and B and bracket 
 C to base. 
 
 Rulrer Bushixc, :!-V"-3 Cs", for spectacles A and B and bracket C. 
 
 Mica Iksulatiox, made in different shapes to suit its position. 
 
 Cdi'I'LR Wire, in rubber tube. 
 
 1,5. Brass Wasiiel, Vn'-^", for holding wire to armature bar. 
 
 16. M.\ciiiXE S(;rew, j,^," x4-4(K for fastening washer No. 1 ,j to arn-iature bar. 
 
 17. Maciiixe S(T-;ew, ^ij^" x y-."i2, for fastening arn-iature to armature bar. 
 
 18. AujusTixc .Screw, 7s" x 4-52, with plantinum point, 
 
 19. RURRER Ijusiiixc, i4"x]0-ri2, for No. In. 
 
 20. SiTCCTACLE. 
 
 21. B.\CK SiRAi', with stud and adjusting nuts, 
 
 22. Macxet Bracrici-. 
 2o. Armaturi; 13 a r. 
 
 24. Brass Sckiav, 7,s" x i/j^"-;')2, trunnion for arn-iature bar. 
 
 25. Machixe Sckew. '/<" x 12-;'>2, for fastening spectacle ti-) base. 
 
 26. Maciiixe S(TvE\\', '4" x 4-40, for connecting wire to armature l)ar. 
 
 See number 37, part common to B and C. 
 
 279 
 
o 
 P5 
 
 1-POlNT UNCOVERED AND DUST=PROOF RELAYS. (Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 133. 
 
 27. Dust Pkook Si'ectaclf.. 
 
 2S. C()VEk-RiA[, for spt'Ctaclf^. 
 
 29. Ckllvij)!!) Siii;i:r. 
 
 ?)0. Back Strai', witli stud and adjusting nuts. 
 
 31. ]Mac;xet Bracket. 
 
 32. Ar-\[ature Bar. 
 
 ?).'). RL'Rrer IxsuEATiox, foF dust pi'oof spectaclc. 
 
 o4. Machexi-; .Sci.iia\, 3 ^" x C,-:',-2, for fastening cover to spectacle. 
 
 .';5. Machixe Screw, .^"xl2-.'12, for fastening spectacle to base. 
 
 ','>('}. Brass Screw, 1" .x '_^_"-'^'2, trunnion for armature bar. 
 
 87. AujusTixc, Screw axi> |aa[ Nut, 1"x1(J-;)2, with insulated point. This is com- 
 mon to B and C. 
 
 PLATE 134. 
 
 There is here shown a plan of the tracks and signals that are operated by the 
 machine illustrated on Plate 63. 
 
 This and that of the Boston & Maine R. R. at Boston (Plate 126), are the 
 largest Electro-Pneumatic Machines yet built. 
 
 2 So 
 
PLATE 134. 
 
 281 
 
PLATE 125. 
 
 C3 
 
 
 V ^^i-'-^'-'S^^-r^!^ 
 
 
 1*3 
 
 ««eO ssusKtg 
 
 o '■- o a o 
 
 M (V ..I r^ n 
 
 282 
 
Relays. 
 
 OTHER FORMS ARE SHOWN ON PLATES IKJ, 117, 119, 121 AND 12:}. 
 
 PLATE 135. 
 
 A. o-PuiXT l''usi-; Siii'xi Rl^i,A^. 
 
 B. '2-Pl)IXT Relay, Uncovered. 
 
 C. 2-Pr)iNr Relay, dust-proof spectacles. 
 
 IN ORDERINCi ANY RELAY GIVE THE RESISTANCE REQUIRED IN OHMS. 
 
 No. ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 f 1. Base. 
 
 2. Wire Exrvsi-.D tx Rluber Tul.!:. 
 
 3. Pair oe Mvc.xeis. — In orderinL;' give required resistance. 
 
 4. Brass Washer, ^:^"- }<", for binding posts. 
 
 5. Brass Hex Nui, ^_^_"- P>-2, for binding posts. 
 
 6. BlXLIXC, Pi 1ST ScRKW. 
 
 . 1 
 
 " 7. BixHixc Post. 
 
 Q 
 
 ■*_ S. Adjestixc, Screw axd Jaai Nvt, with contact point. 
 
 ^ .9. Adjl'stixc, Screw .vxd Jaai Nut, with insulated point. 
 
 ^ ~\ 10. Brass j\L\(TnxE Screw, 5 ,C;" x i2-;;2, for fastening spectacles. 
 
 z 
 
 3 11. Brass Machixe Screw, 3_(^"x 12-32, for fastening magnet brackets. 
 
 ^ , 12. Ruri'.er Busiiix(;, y^"-3,^" x iq_", for binding post holes. 
 
 H ! 
 
 < I 13 Rtm',i;er Busiiixc, Vg"— i/, ", insulations tor side contact sprintrs. 
 
 P- /-I- 1.-5 
 
 14. Brass Machixe Screw, '-^''x 12-32, for fastening armature. 
 
 ' 1.5. Brass Macihxe Screw, i/j^" x (1-32, for fastening side contact springs. 
 
 16. Mica Ix'si:la i n ix. — This is made in different sizes. Specify what it is wanted for. 
 
 17. Brass TRUXxrcix Scrian', 1" x ^:|^"- .')2 for supporting armature bar. 
 
 18. Bacr Stlal, with stud and adjusting nuts. 
 
 19. Cap Scrjav, J/^ " x '/("- 20, for fastening magnets to back strap. 
 
 f 20. ARAfATURE. 
 
 21. Spectacle. 
 
 ^' I 22. pRox'i' CdXiwcT Sprixg. 
 
 23. Ararvi'imho Bar. 
 
 24. Back Cox'iact Sprrxc 
 o -^ 2;"). Phospiior-Brox/.e Strip, with jeweled point. 
 
 26. RuRiiER I^irsiiiNc, ,Vg" x -,"i; "-1 8, for back contact screw. 
 
 27. RuRREK Busiiixc, :!'/'xi\/', for spectacle insulation. 
 
 28. RuRRER Besiiixc, 14" x ] 2-3.2, for back contact s|)ring. 
 
 29. Brass Washer, l)i" >^ li", ^or back contact spring. 
 
 30. Brass Machixe Screw, l^_">i4~iil for back contact spring. 
 
 283 
 
 o 
 
 
o 
 
 h 
 
 O 
 
 u 
 
 ;{-POINT FUSE SHUNT, ti-POlNT UNCOVERED AND 2-POlNT DUST-PROOF RELAYS.— (Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 135. 
 
 .")1. 1\Iagm:t Bkackki's, for A and B. 
 
 f o2. Armaturi:. 
 
 33. SrECTACLi:. 
 
 34. Brass Wasiii:i.i, f^n" — 3 3", for contact screws. 
 
 35. Rui;i!KR liusiiixc, -^-j" — 3 y", for spectacles and magnet brackets. 
 
 36. Rui;iu:r Wasiihk, //' — yC', for contact screws. 
 
 37. AkmatukI': Bar. 
 
 3S. CuNTACT Spring, for B and C. 
 
 39. Dust-Proof Spectacle. 
 
 40. Armature Bar. 
 
 41. Armature. 
 
 42. Rup.r.ER Ixsueator, for dust-proof spectacle. 
 
 43. Ruiiiu'.R Busiiixc, 14" — 3g"xlO-32, for contact screws. 
 
 44. Brass Mauihxe Screw, 3 3" x 6-32, for fastening cover to spectacle. 
 
 45. Cover, for spectacle; this includes a celluloid sheet, which if wanted without the 
 
 brass rim must be so specified. 
 
 46. Macxet Bracket. 
 
 PLATE 126. 
 
 This machine has been recently placed in service at Boston on the Boston & 
 Maine Railroad, and operates the switches and signals at Causeway Street which 
 are shown on Plate 18. 
 
 284 
 
PLATE 136. 
 
 285 
 
PLATE, IS'?. 
 
 
 A 
 
 • « » 
 i-i.ji^^ A. 
 
 'Ll _U 
 
 Q_j^ 
 
 
 J 
 
 111 '4 
 
 I ^ 15 
 
 I 13 Q .ii,^ 
 
 36 37 
 
 ,o 
 
 C20 
 
 MMfmmmfd 
 
 ■J."'. 2 2 
 
 o o 
 
 39 10 
 
 *Es m 
 
 L«^ 
 
 «_« -5 
 
 26 33© 
 
 4 1 4-2 
 
 286 
 
Lightning^ Arresters and Circuit Controllers. 
 
 PLATE 137. 
 
 A. Multiple Lichtxixc Ai^KEs-rEk. Made in aii)- size from a 1-way up to a 25-way. 
 
 B. LuiirrNiM; AkRi';sTEi<, for one wire only. This is our most recent form, and has proved 
 
 extremel)' reHable. 
 
 In ordering- any one of figures C, D, E, F or H, state whether it is to be on an 
 open or closed circuit. 
 
 C. CiRCUir CoxTROLLER, To be placed underneath and fastened to the top plate of an 
 
 interlocking machine. The lever of the machine strikes the small dog visible on 
 the rightdiand side of the figure and thus closes or opens the circuit. The con- 
 tact springs are struck I3)' the cam that projects from the pivoted end of the 
 dog, which is restored to its normal position by a vertical spring. It may be on 
 either an open or closed circuit. 
 
 D. Double Circuit Coxtroller. Especially designed for use in connection with a mechan- 
 
 ical interlocking machine. It is placed upon the wooden frame which supports 
 the machine, and is operated by the lever, which strikes it and compresses the 
 spring. 
 
 E. SiXGLE Circuit Controller. This is the one used in connection with the Union Lock 
 
 and Block System, and is placed either on the block instrument table, where it 
 can be operated by hand, or under the floor, where it can be reached by the 
 foot of the signal man. In the latter case the rod is made longer than the one 
 shown in the illustration. The controller is usually placed upon an open circuit. 
 
 F. Single Circuit Contruit.er. This form is generally placed at the edge of a station 
 
 platform, where it can be pressed by the foot of a conductor, or in some other 
 convenient place for the purpose of notifying a train starter's ofSce or a signal 
 cabin that a train is ready to start. This instrument is usually placed upon an 
 open circuit. 
 
 G. Cover, for Fip-. F. Used only when the instrument is exposed to wet or dirt. 
 
 H. Press Key Circuit Cdxtroller. It has a multitude of applications, and is made 
 either for an open or a closed circuit. 
 
 A list of the separate parts will be found upon the following pages. 
 
 287 
 
o 
 
 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS AND CIRCUIT CONTR0LLERS.-(Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 127 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 f 1. Hard Rudukr Ijask. 
 
 •2. Gkoum) Stri]'. 
 
 o. Machine Screw, I/^" x 8-oi', for No. 2. 
 
 <| 4. Coi'EER Washer, tV'-'^". for No. ;i 
 
 5. Cross Strir. 
 
 6. Machine Screw, I/2"n6-3l', for No. a. 
 
 7. CoRi'ER Washer, ^i'/'-is"- for No. H. 
 y. Si. ATE Base. 
 
 9. Seate C.\i'. 
 
 10. Pole Piece. 
 
 11. Bra.ss Screw, 1*14" .x yV"-o2, for No. lu. 
 
 1-2. Washer, f./'-Vs". i 
 
 - For No. 11. 
 13. Nut. fV -3l». \ 
 
 Ch 
 
 -^ 14. Resist. \NCE Coil. 
 
 [ 15. Machine Screw, 44" x 1-_>-;;-2, for No. 14. 
 
 < I IH. BiNDiNc Post, for No. l(i. 
 
 17. Machine Screw, 3 y" x 1i>-;!2. j 
 
 .,,-,,' :' For No. ]G. 
 
 lb. Washer, yV -tV ■ ) 
 
 19. Binding Post, for No. 14. 
 
 I 20. Machine Screw, 3/^"xS-S2. for No. li). 
 
 21. Brass Box. 
 
 22. Hard Rurrer B.\se, for Nos. 26 and 27. 
 
 23. Hard Rurrer Base, for outside wires. 
 
 24. Spring, for No. 25. 
 
 25. Cam. 
 
 26. Bent Contact Spring. 
 
 27. Straight Contact Spring. 
 
 28. Iron Screav, 17s"x l'4"~o2, for No. 25. 
 
 29. Machine Screw, l3 8"x 12-24, for joining Nos. 21, 22 and 23. 
 
 30. Machine Screw, 5,s"xl2-24, for No. 22. 
 
 31. Machine S( riav, '."x 12-24, for wires in No. 2-">. 
 
 o 
 s- 
 
 o 
 
 i— 
 
 '< 
 
 'Si 
 
 H 
 
 b: 
 <: 
 
 a, 
 
 i 
 
 32. Machine Si rew, Jv"x12-24, for wires in N 
 
 o. 
 
 33. Hex. Nut, '^''-.-ci, for No. 28. 
 
 34. Brass Washer, )^'-%'\ for Nos. 31 and 32. 
 ^Q r35. Base. 
 
 jv; o 
 
 V.% - 36. Brass Screw, 1 I4." x i4"-32, for Nos. 47 and 4S. 
 
 ^\ [37. Hex. Nut, i4"-32, for No. 36. 
 
PLATE 127 
 
 < ^ 
 
 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS AND CIRCUIT CONTROLLERS.-(Continued.) 
 
 No. 
 
 j 38. Thumb Nut, ^_^_"-^.^,•2. \ 
 
 39. Ruj;i;kr BrsuiNc;, '^''-.^s". 
 
 4(1. Bras> Busiux,;, i4."-,is'. :- For No. .HC. 
 
 ^ ' 41. Brass Wasiikr. t',-"-5 s" 
 I j 4:?. FlllRK Washi-r, '4."-5,s". ) 
 
 43. CoXTACT RixG, for No. 4.'). 
 
 44. DowKR Pix, for No. 4.".. 
 
 45. OpKRArixc, Ron axm Kn'oi;. 
 
 46. Srkixc, for No. 4,"). 
 
 47. Loxi; CiixiAcr Sruixc. 
 4$. SiKiRT CoXTAcr Srkixi;, 
 
 f 41). Riout-Haxd CoxTAcr SriuxI;. 
 
 5(1, Lei-t-Haxo CoxTAi'r Si'rixc. 
 
 5L Basic. 
 
 5--'. CiiXTACT Rixc;, for No. 55 
 
 . ' 53, Dower Prx, for Xo 52 
 
 W I 
 
 g i 54. Si'Rixc. for No. 55. 
 
 c 
 
 2 I 55. Operatixi; Ror axr Ivxor. 
 
 < I 
 
 I ' 5(1. Marhixr Screw, 1"x1()-;:',2, for outside wires and for Nos. 4U and 5(). 
 
 Z 57. MAriHXE .Screw, 3 s" x 10-3i\ for Nos. 41) and 50. 
 
 < 
 
 58. Hex. Net, l()-;-i2, for No.s. 5(-; and 57. 
 
 5i». Themr, Net, lo^.",:.', for No. 5(";, 
 
 (30, Br.\ss Washer, .^"-r",;". I 
 
 (31. FiRRE Wasiieie ;;V"-ia". ;^ For Nos. 5(1 and 57 
 
 [ (32, Rerree Bcshixc, t\/'-j',". I 
 
 l" See ¥\'j;. G, 
 
 (33. Base. 
 
 (34, CiA"i-;i;. 
 
 (35. Oreratrxo Roe axe Kxoi,. 
 
 " 6(5. Srrixi;. / 
 
 £ _ „ ., c For N(E r,5, 
 
 -J (m . d iXT.V'Cl' KRXC. ) 
 
 z 
 
 < -' 68. DoWEE Fix, for No. (i7. 
 
 ~ 61*. I^icht-Haxe Coxta( r Srrfxc, 
 
 < 70. Leet-H.vxe Co.x'iwc r Srrixc, 
 
 71. Cai' Screw, ^a" x i'',;"-;32, for fastening' wires. 
 
 72. AF\cHiXE .Si|;e\\, 5,s"x14-2o, for fasti-niny No. (',4 to No. 6;;, 
 
 73. M.\CHEXE Screw, t,^'" x lO-;;2, for head of .\'.i. 7 1 , and for fastenin- Nos (i',) and 7o 
 I 74. Hex. Net, 1o-;;l', for No. 73. 
 
 2S9 
 
c 
 
 5 ' 
 
 f- 
 
 LIQHTNINQ ARRESTERS AND CIRCUIT CONTROLLERS. -(Continued.) 
 
 No. PLATE 13 "7. 
 
 75. Hex. Nut, tV"-32, for No. 71. 
 
 76. Ruiu'.ER Bushing, i\,"-Tir", for No. 71. 
 
 77. Ruiu'.ER Bushing, tV-j, s", for No. 78. 
 
 78. Fibre Washer, t^,/'-5,'s", for No. 71. 
 
 79. Fibre Washer. 'A"-'4". } 
 
 „ -For No. 73. 
 
 80. Brass Washer, fV -^2 • \ 
 
 81. Rubber Base. 
 
 82. Knob, for No. 83. 
 
 S3. Large Contact Spring. 
 
 84. Small Contact Spring. 
 
 8.5. Bridge. 
 
 86. Machine Screw, 3s"x10-;32, for No. 85. 
 
 87. Machine Screw, yi" x ^/^"-?j2, for fastening wires. 
 
 88. Hex. Nut, ^^"~:\2. } 
 
 89. Brass Washer, ^''^H"-^^" ^" "'■ 
 
 90. Machine Screw. 3 ,s" x 12-;->2. for joining Nos. 83 and 84. 
 
 91. Hex. Nut, 12-32, for No. 90. 
 
 PLATE 138. 
 
 This was a comparatively early installation of the Electro-Pneumatic System, 
 for it has been in constant service since 1889. The system of tracks is an extremely 
 complicated one, consisting as it does of Railroad crossings and switches directly 
 in front of a large union passenger station. 
 
 2go 
 
PLATE 128. 
 
 291 
 
PLATE 129. 
 
 292 
 
Multiple Push Button Instrument. 
 
 PLATE l-iO. 
 
 T^HIS is one form of the many push button instruments that we manufacture; 
 it may be worlved on a closed or open circuit, and is intended lor either 
 operating or restoring a drop annunciator. One ot its applications is in the train 
 starter's office at the Philadelphia terminal of the Pennsylvania Railroad. In this 
 case it is used for operating the semaphore annunciator in the interlocking cabin 
 which tells the director that a train upon a certain track is readv to start. It may 
 also be used between cabins tor various purposes, and is an extremely useful and 
 substantial instrument. 
 
 -93 
 
PLATE 130. 
 
 r^ 1 fo 
 
 B 
 
 in 
 
 i 
 
 Ow 
 eg ^ 
 
 i>' 
 
 a 
 
 O £ 5^, 
 
 OS 
 
 in 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 CO 
 
 
 - ^ 
 
 (0 
 
 IT) 
 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 ^^^^" 
 
 294 
 
Drop Indicator Without Bell. 
 
 PLATE 130. 
 
 \ A 7E ILLUSTRATE this instrument for two reasons: first, it is unusually sub- 
 stantial in construction ; second, any one of the indicators may be caused 
 to disappear without disturbing" any of the others. It is made in many different 
 sizes, and like almost all of our electrical instruments may be connected either with 
 a track circuit or a push button. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Spectacle. 
 
 2. Back Strap. 
 
 3. Magnets. 
 
 4. Armature. 
 
 5. Spectacle Support. 
 <i. Ar>lature Bar. 
 
 7. Indicator Arjl 
 
 8. Tension Post. 
 
 9. Tension Spring. 
 10. Inhicator Plate. 
 n. Indicatur Number. 
 
 12. Push Butt(.)N Jaw. 
 
 13. Push Button Shaet. 
 
 14. Push Butt(jn. 
 
 15. Push Button Guide. 
 
 16. Push Button Numher. 
 
 17. Push Butt(jn Sprin(;. 
 
 18. Push Button Ring. 
 
 19. Push Button Glass. 
 
 20. Crank. 
 
 21. Horizontal Link. 
 
 22. Crank Stand. 
 
 23. Vertical Link. 
 
 24. Upper Link Stand. 
 2.5. Upper Link. 
 
 26. Phosphor-Bronze Contact Plate. 
 
 27. Adjusting Screw and Jam Nut, 3^" x 4-52, for No. 1. 
 
 295 
 
No 
 
 DROP SNDICATOR WITHOUT BELL.— (Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 130. 
 
 2S. Si'iiciAi, ScRKW AND NuT, ^/'x(\~:',2, iuv joininy Nos. 7 and 22. 
 
 •2'.». SiiaiAL Screw axd Nut. ,! y" x (')-o2, for joining Nos. 12 and 23. 
 
 00. Spkciai, Screw, :•■_^_" x C>-::-j, for joining Nos. 7, 24 and 25. 
 
 01. Si'EcE\E Screw, i /' x (;-;;2, for joinino- Nos. 20 and 22. 
 ail. Sreceve Screw, Vi;" x '_,."-;', 2, for joinin;^ Nos. 1 and 6. 
 ;-).■>. Si'EcEVE Screw. ^ ^_" x (\-:',-2 , for joining Nos. 2(i and 21. 
 
 ;U. Brass JMacmixe Scria\, 'j"x.S-.';2, for coarse wire in No, 2n. 
 
 of). Brass Machixi: Screw, '_,." x 8-o2, for joining Nos. 4 and 6. 
 
 3(;. Brass Machine Screw, '4" x (')-;!2, for fastening Nos. 22 and 24 to the case. 
 
 37. Brass Machixi; Screw, '4"x4-4(i, for fine wdre in No. 2r,, 
 
 3s. Iron Machine Screw, 3 ,s" x ,S-.")2, for joining Nos 2 and 3. 
 
 3!J. Brass Machine Screw, 3 ,^" x 6-32, for joining Nos. 1 and 5. 
 
 40. Br.vss Wu(jd Screw, i<"-#6, for No. 15. 
 
 41. CuRPER Washer, t\"-'':4", for No. 34. 
 
 42. Brass Washer, ^s'-tV", for No. 37 
 
 Multiple Disc Indicator. 
 
 PLATE 131. 
 
 T^HERE are so many different forms of indicators that it is impossible to 
 
 illustrate or describe them in all of their variations. This instrument is 
 sometimes operated by a push button, sometimes by a track circuit and may be 
 worked over Ioul;' distances. 
 
 The faces of the discs are marked with figures or letters which indicate their 
 functions. When the full front of the disc is exposed it indicates that the track 
 with A\'hich it is in communication is blocked ; on the contrary by turning its edge 
 to the front, the disc shows that the track connected with it is clear. 
 
 The upper figure presents the appearance of the indicator as it is seen when 
 ready for service, while the lo^ver one has the front of the case removed, and 
 exposes to view the magnets and relative parts. 
 
 A single indicator much after this pattern is shown on the lower part of 
 Plate 133. 
 
PLATE 131. 
 
 I»i#9^^^ 
 
 
 ff/'^m, ' 
 
 mm. 
 
 St 
 
 \:'S-. 
 
 >fj 
 
 -V, 
 
 n. 
 
 ^■:--:' I 
 
 i ■ 
 
 297 
 
PLATE 133. 
 
 298 
 
Two Forms of Single Disc Indicators with Bells. 
 
 PLATE 133. 
 
 T^HE upper figure on the left is usually placed in a signal cabin for the purpose 
 
 of indicating the approach of a train. The disc, which is now in its normal 
 position, revolves through an arc of 9o', and in making its passage closes the bell 
 circuit and calls the attention of the operator to its movement; the knob which 
 appears below the bell is for the purpose of acknowledging the signal and of 
 restoring the disc to its normal position. 
 
 The right-hand figure resembles the one on the left, except in the fact that 
 it is frequently made automatic in its action. The bell may be arranged to ring 
 continuously w^hen the disc is in one or other of its positions, or it may be arranged 
 to ring only while the disc is in motion. 
 
 This instrument is often used to inform an operator as to whether or not a 
 track is occupied, in which event it is connected with a track circuit. 
 
 The lower figures correspond with the ones above them, but show the cases 
 open and illustrate the arrangement of the magnets. 
 
 299 
 
PLATE 133. 
 
 1 ^l ii 
 
 """" 1 OFF, 
 
 , 
 
 
 *&.■«. 
 
 r .^ff^^%.> ] 
 
 soo 
 
Single Semaphore Indicator and Single Disc Indicator. 
 
 PLATE 133. 
 
 T^HERE are here shown single forms of the Multiple Semaphore Indicator and 
 Multiple Disc Indicator illustrated on Plates 135 and 13] . The Semaphore 
 Indicator which occupies the upper part of the plate is arranged as a distant signal 
 repeater, and through a circuit breaker (Fig. C, Plate 100), located on a distant 
 signal post, will inform an operator that a certain signal has followed the movement 
 of its lever in the cabin. This may be arranged to work with a home signal quite 
 as well, while other uses will suggest themselves. 
 
 The Disc Indicator is illustrated on the lower half of the plate, and is so 
 simple in form and construction that no particular description is necessary. 
 
 301 
 
PLATE 134. 
 
 ''\ 
 
 o 
 
 CJ 
 
 .^ag<r^tw?^2aa«Hg^^g|^ 
 
 CD 
 
 I 
 
 (D 
 
 2 
 
 CD 
 
 
 '>8 
 
 
 -«!« 
 
 O 
 
 n 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 
 IT) 
 
 (M 
 
 ^^(N 
 
 CNJ 
 
 ■■*€ fvj 
 
 302 
 
Semaphore Indicator with Bell Attachment. 
 
 PLATE 134. 
 
 T^HIS instrument was dcsis^ned for the purpose of informing tiie leverman in a 
 cabin as to the condition of the tracks which he controls. When a track is 
 unoccupied by any train the arm will be loweretl as on post 1 ; on the contrary, 
 for those tracks which are occupied the arms will retain the horizontal position as 
 shown on posts '2, o, 7, " Gauntlet " and " Main." The arms in passing from one 
 position to another make a temporary contact and ring the bell. 
 
 The device may be operated either by the track circuit or a push button, and 
 is susceptible of many applications, only one of which is described above. It may 
 also be made of anv size. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 1. 
 
 Bell. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Post. 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 H.vAiMER Stop. 
 
 
 
 4. 
 
 Back Strai'. 
 
 -For Bell. 
 
 
 5. 
 
 M.\(;xET. 
 
 
 
 6. 
 
 Haalmer fannature). 
 
 
 
 7. 
 
 Back Strap Suit'ort. ^ 
 
 
 
 8. 
 
 Bracket. 
 
 
 
 9. 
 
 Ma(;xet Si'Ect.vcle. 
 
 
 
 10. 
 
 Magnets. i u c i 
 
 I'tor Semaphore. 
 
 
 11, 
 
 Back Stkar. 
 
 
 
 12. 
 
 Macxet Pole. 
 
 
 
 13. 
 
 ALvgxet Armatlre. 
 
 
 
 14. 
 
 SEAfAlTIORE. 
 
 
 15. 
 
 Semaimiore Suaft. 
 
 
 Ifi. 
 
 Co-\lmutator. 
 
 
 17. 
 
 NUAFBER PlATIO AXD BrASS R LXG. 
 
 
 18. 
 
 Semaphore Posi'. 
 
 
 19. 
 
 Rurder CiR(;uLr Breaker Base. 
 
 
 20. 
 
 Gerafan Silver Circuit Breaker Si'Rix(;. 
 
 
 21. 
 
 Conxectixg Wire Teraiixal. 
 
 
 22. 
 
 Brass Maciiixe Screw, ;4"xS-32, for fastening No. 
 
 21 
 
 23. 
 
 Copper Washer, i-s"— '^". for No. 22. 
 
 
 
 
 303 
 
 
SEMAPHORE INDICATOR WITH BELL ATTACHMENT. -(Continued.) 
 No. PLATE 134. 
 
 24. Brass Maciiixe Screw, 3,s"xS-32, for joining Nos. 4 and 7. 
 
 25. Brass Maciiim: Screw, {',■/' x >^-'o2, for joining Nos. G and 7. 
 
 26. Brass Machine Screw, i^."x,S-o2, for joining Nos. 8 and 11. 
 
 27. Brass Maciiixe Screw, J<" x (3-;j2, for fastening No. 19. 
 
 28. Brass Machine Screw, 3v"x4-40, for connecting magnet wire to No. 21. 
 
 29. Brass Machine Screw, i,x"x4-40, for connecting ground wire to No. 21. 
 
 30. Brass Machixe Screw, i,s"xl>-;i2, for fastening No. 20 to 19. 
 
 31. Brass Machine Screw, 5,s"x8-32, for joining Nos. 10 and 11. 
 
 32. Brass Wood Screw, j^" — T='i, for fastening No. 7 to case. 
 
 33. Brass Wood Screw, 3 y" — #1;, for fastening No. 2 to case. 
 
 34. Brass Wood Screw, 14" — =*.-), for fastening No. 3 to case. 
 
 35. Iron Machine Screw, 3 y" x 8-32, for joining Nos. 4 and 5. 
 
 36. Iron Machine Screw, i-2"x6-32, for joining Nos. 10 and 12. 
 
 37. Iron Machine Screw, 3y"x]0-32, for joining Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 Multiple Semaphore Indicator with Bells. 
 
 PLATE 135. 
 
 ''PHIS arrangement is placed in the train starter's office at a large passenger 
 terminal, and serves two purposes. The semaphores are connected with push 
 buttons located near the various tracks, and when one of them is inclined, informs 
 the train starter that a train is ready to go from a certain track ; at the same time 
 one of the bells rings to attract his attention. Having received this information, 
 the train starter pushes the button on his instrument, which corresponds Avith the 
 semaphore that has been lowered, and thus notifies the signal cabin that such a 
 train is ready to go ; the signal cabin then acknowledges the receipt of the message 
 by ringing the other bell on the instrument that we are describing, at the same 
 time restoring the semaphore to its normal position. 
 
 A single instrument of this character will be found illustrated on Plate 133. 
 
 304 
 
PLATE 135. 
 
 305 
 
PLATE 136. 
 
 306 
 
Train Describing Instruments. 
 
 PLATE 136. 
 
 'T^HE instruments illustrated on Plate 136 are for the purpose of sending over 
 long distanees the information as to what track a train is approaching on. 
 The upper one, which is called the transmitter, and the lower one, which is called 
 the recorder, are located in separate cabins, and are connected by an electric 
 wire. The operation is as follows ; the approach of a train going from cabin A 
 towards cabin B on, let us say, track No. n is announced by operator A, who 
 presses button 8 on the transmitting instrument; this releases the needle which is 
 now pointing to button Ifi, and interposes a stop, which holds the needle, upon 
 reaching button s. This needle is mounted on a ratchet wheel that is driven by 
 clock work, and has the same number of teeth as there arc buttons on the instru- 
 ment ; it alternately makes and breaks a circuit eight times in the passage of the 
 needle from No. Hi to No. s. The making and breaking of the circuit through 
 the transmitter alternately excites and discharges a magnet on the recorder, which 
 in its turn drives the needle belonging to it. 
 
 Should any error of operation occur, which, however, is not likely, a means of 
 again bringing the needles to the same point, is provided on the recording instru- 
 ment, by which the recording needle may be mechanically propelled. This is 
 accomplished through a small push button, which projects through the lower left- 
 hand part of the recording instrument's case. 
 
 The parts illustrated in detail will be found on Plate i;'.7. 
 
 307 
 
PLATE 137, 
 
 19 
 
 2G 
 
 i 
 
 H ^ 
 
 36 45 
 
 21 o O 
 
 37 46 
 22 
 
 _fi23 ^ I 
 
 • 24- 26 4 7 
 
 25 O t 
 
 -^ - o T 
 
 129 I |30 41 60 
 
 y; 
 
 3 2: 
 
 o T 
 
 42 51 
 
 33 O I 
 
 43 52 
 34 
 
 35 O f 
 
 44 53 
 
 
 84 
 
 99 
 
 100 
 
 101 
 
 o 
 
 102 
 
 t 
 
 103 
 
 r 
 
 104 
 
 T 
 
 105 
 
 35 as ^^ 
 
 87 88 106 
 
 re 
 
 89 9o| 
 
 r o 
 
 91 92 
 
 107 
 
 77l 
 
 I" -I " '' o 
 
 ^80 <31 
 
 82 ec 
 
 I 
 
 t T 
 
 95 96 
 
 T 
 
 • 
 
 97 98 
 
 loe 
 
 IP 
 
 109 
 
 i08 
 
Train Describing Instruments. 
 
 PLATE 137. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. Cask. 
 
 •2. Dial Pi.atk. 
 
 8. Guide Rinc. 
 
 4. Clock Work Plate. 
 
 5. WixDiNc KE^. 
 
 (i. Sl'IKAL Si'KIMi. 
 
 7. Dru^i, for spiral spring. 
 
 8. Cover, for drum. 
 
 9. Rixo, for holding glass in No. 11. 
 
 10. St(_)p Bar. 
 
 11. Crystal Rim. 
 
 12. EsCAFEMEXT. 
 
 z 18. E.scAPE^rEX'l Wheel axl Pinion Silvet. 
 
 i 14. Ma IX Shaft. 
 
 1.5. Co.MAirrAToR. 
 
 111. Large Gkak, with pinion and shaft. 
 
 17. .Small Gear, with pinion, shaft and nut. 
 
 18. Push Bi'ttox. 
 
 19. POIXTER. 
 
 20. Bracket, for commutator springs. 
 
 21. Harh Rulker Ixsih.atkix, for commutator springs. 
 
 22. Straight Commutator Sprixg. 
 28. Oeeset Commutator Sitting. 
 
 24. Screw Stum, for joining Nos. 2 antl 4. 
 
 25. .Stul, for joining Nos. 2 and 8. 
 
 26. Rat< HEi' Pawl. 
 
 27. Spring, for ratchet pawl. 
 
 28. R.\TCHEJ- WhLI'.L. 
 
 29. Chain Whei;l, for Nos. 80 and 81. 
 80. Push Button Stem. 
 
 Stationary Bracket, for chain wheel No. 29. 
 Chain. Give length required. 
 
 88. Wire Ter.minal. 
 
 84. Tl-IRMINAL CoNIAC'I' Si'KLNG. 
 
 85. Copper Wire in Rl l;i;er Tlpe. Give length required. 
 
 309 
 
 81 
 p. 9 
 
TRAIN DESCRIBING INSTRUMENTS.— (Continued.) 
 
 No. PLATE 137. 
 
 30. Brass Screw axu Nut, 3^" x 8-32, for connection between commutator springs 
 and terminal. 
 
 37. Brass Washer, ix"-3y". l 
 
 3S. RuBiiER Bushing, ;iV"-3 s"- r For No. 36. 
 
 ^ 39. RuBRER Washer, jV'-3 s". 
 
 5 40. Brass Screw and Nut, }^"x4-40, for connection between commutator springs 
 '"'_ and terminal. 
 
 H 
 
 s 
 
 (A 
 
 PL, 
 
 41. RuBUKR Bushing, ^/%"-y^". ^ 
 
 ^ I 42. Brass Washer, i-s'-^i". 
 
 B T. ,,. ,, r n - For No. 40. 
 
 „ I 43. Brass Washer, ^'^'--i^ . 
 
 z J 
 
 ^ ^ 44. Rubber Washer, y^'-y^' 
 
 45. Brass Screw, fV" >^ -f-32, for fastening No. 19 to No. 17. 
 
 46. Rubber Bushing, y%"-y^' , for No. 45. 
 
 47. RuBiiER Bushing, V^" x V%"-^-s;;" , for insulating wire passing through stud No. 25. 
 
 48. Machine Screw, a-g" x 10-32, for fastening No. 26 to No. 4. 
 
 49. Machine Screw, J/g" x 4-32, for fastening No. 11 to No. 2. 
 
 50. Machine Screw, i^"x4-32, for fastening No. 20 to No. 2, and No. 27 to No. 4. 
 
 51. Machine Screw, 3'8"-^8-32, for fastening No. 3 to No. 25. 
 
 52. Wool) Screw, I/^"-#5, for fastening No. 2 to No. 1. 
 . 53. Brass Shaet, for No. 29. 
 ' 54. Case. 
 
 55. Dial Plate. 
 
 56. Wire Terminal. 
 
 57. Bracket, for fastening No. 55 to No 54. 
 
 58. Bracket, for No. 65 and No. 77. 
 
 59. Magnet Bracket. 
 
 60. NuMiiER Base. 
 
 61. Armature. 
 
 62. Magnets. 
 
 o 
 z 
 
 s 
 
 o '\ 63. Back Strap, 
 
 
 64. Rod, for manual operation of the device. 
 
 65. Armature Bar. 
 M"i. Hinge, for No. 68. 
 
 67. Pointer. 
 
 68. Rim, for glass cover. 
 
 69. Ring, for holding glass in No. 68. 
 
 70. Bracket, for Nos. S4 and 85. 
 
 71. Tension P(.)st and Ring. 
 
 72. Bracket, for holding No. 74. 
 
 ■\\o 
 
J 
 
 TRAIN DESCRIBING INSTRUMENTS. -(Continued.) 
 
 '■^o- PLATE 137. 
 
 78. Propkm.inc; Latch anh Si'KINC. 
 
 74. H()i,DiN(; Latch. 
 
 75. Stoi", for ratchet wheel, No. 77. 
 70. BiNiiiNc, P()si- Termtnai,. 
 
 77. Ratchet Wheel, Sie\ft and Nu'i\ 
 
 78. Catch, for No. 68. 
 
 79. Knob, for No. (U. 
 
 80. GER^EAN Silver Sprinc, for No. 74. 
 SL Aral\ture String. 
 
 82. Spring, for No. H4. 
 
 83. Tensiun P(3st Spring, for No. 7L 
 
 s 84. Capstan Screw, Li x" x 10-;',-J. ((These are placed in No. 70 for adjusting the 
 
 85. Capstan Screw, 5/8"x 10-32. f play of No. 63. 
 
 g 86. Machine Screw, i/j;"x8-32, for fastening No. 58 to No. 55. 
 
 g 87. Machine Screw, 3/,s"x8-32, for fastening No. 56 to No. 55. 
 
 o 
 
 « ' 88. Wool I Screw, rfi^"-#5, for fastening No. 7S. 
 
 O : 
 
 y j 89. Wood Screw, ag"-#5, for fastening Nos. 90 and 57. 
 
 5 1 90. Bracket, for No. 64. 
 
 9L Machine Screw, i4"x4-32, for fastening magnet wires to No. 56. 
 
 92. Copper Washer, }^"-3/fi,", for No. 91. 
 
 93. Machine Screw, >^"x2-64, for No. 73. 
 
 94. Machine Screw, fi,"x2-64, for No. 74. 
 
 95. Machine Screw, 14" x 8-32, for Nos. 60 and 63. 
 
 96. Machine Screw, A/' x 4-32, for fastening No. 57 to No. 55. 
 
 97. Machine Screw, 54j"x8-32, for joining Nos. 59, 61 and 62. 
 
 98. Machine Screw, ys" x 4.-32, for No. 66. 
 
 99. Binding Post and Nut. 
 
 100. Bra-SS Nut, 10-32, for Nos. 24 and 99. 
 
 101. Bra,ss Washer, -^"-^4", for No. 99. 
 
 102. Rubber Washer, tVH's". fo"" No. 104. 
 K 103. Machine Screw, >^" x 3-50, for Nos. 22, 23, 75 and 8(». 
 
 104. Machine Screw, 3/^" x 8-32, for Nos. 34, 58, 59 and 70. 
 
 105. Wood Screw, 3/8"-#r,, for No. 106. 
 
 106. Hanger, for Nos. 1 and 54. 
 
 107. NuMiiER Plate. 
 
 pS 108. Number Plate Rim. 
 
 109. Number Plate Crystal. 
 
 311 
 
 H 
 
PLATE 1.38. 
 
 10 
 
 r 
 
 ii 
 
 ..-'-™sj 
 
 13 
 
 14. 
 
 O 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 312 
 
Track Instrument. 
 
 PLATE t.-JS. 
 
 T^HIS is one of our oldest tleviees, and when it is not advisable to use the 
 traek eireuit, ma\- be sul;)stituted foi- it m many places, wherever neeessary to 
 make or l^-eak a circuit automatically throus^li the presence of a train at any 
 particular ])omt. 
 
 The Stand (No. 1) and the fulcrum castiu!^ (No. 7) are usually ]:)laced beside 
 the track upon a lon^ tie; the operatinj.^ lever (No. '.») |jrojects from the stand 
 where it is en;j,'aged with the jaw (No. .">), to the rail; its relation with the latter 
 is shown in the ujjper hL;ure. 
 
 The )aw passes u].) through the stand and carries in its upper end the con- 
 tact rod (No. T)!, which, in its turn, is encircled b\- the rim^s Nos. !'■'> and 14 which 
 lie above the top of the stand. Anv vertical movement of the rail is therefore 
 transmittetl to the contact ring, which is, in that way, either thrown out oi or into 
 touch with the contact springs (Nos. 11 and li*), depending on whether the device 
 is placed upon a closed or open circuit. The cap (No. -2) which ordinarily rests 
 upon the top ot the stand is here shown detached from the other jjarts, in order 
 that the construction of the instrument may be more clearly shown. 
 
 No. ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER^ 
 
 1. St.vxi.. 
 
 ■2. Cm. 
 
 .-,. Jaw. 
 
 4. H,vr;i Rcr.iiKR 1!.\.sf,, for contact springs, 
 
 ."i. CoxT.M I' Ron. 
 
 (i. kiPK AMI l^NKiN, -^4". for containing wires. 
 
 7. Fi'i,(i<i\\i C \sTi\o. 
 
 s. Fi:i,(i<i:\( Pin. 
 
 '.I.' ()\'V.R.\T\S(, Le\ KK, 
 
 10. .Sim, IT CoTTKK, ,',;" -x 1 12". f'>r No. s. 
 
 n. Co,\-r.\ci Si'Kixc, for closod circuit. 
 
 1l'. Citx'iAot Si'Rixo, for open circuit. 
 
 i;;. CoxTAcr RiNO, vvitli rubber bushiny. 
 
 14. H.\Ri) RtTiiiii-K Rixo, stop for No. 1.".. 
 
 If.. Ikox Maciiixe .S( kf.w, 3,4" X fV/'-ls, for fastening No. 4 to No. 1. 
 
 IC. Ikox Macuixk Screw, 7x" x .5 s"-1 ''>. f"r fastening No. i' to No. 1. 
 
 17. P.R.vss Ma( iiixi: S.REw, '."xs-;3i», for fastening Nos. 11 and 1 l> to No. 4. 
 
 15. |-)RASS WaSIII'R, ;,s"X|'n", f')r No. 17. 
 
 19. Glide .wxn Nuts, for No. 5. 
 
 313 
 
PART III. 
 
PLATE 139. 
 
 A W' 
 
 ;i6 
 
The High and Low Union Stands. 
 
 PLATE 1.39. 
 
 IN ORDERING ANY SWITCH STAND, GIVE THE THROW OF THE SWITCH. 
 
 DESIDES throwing a switch, these stands accomplish a ver\ desirable thing'. 
 
 W^hen the switch is in the correct position for the main track any movement 
 of the handle will move the target, but when the switch is set for the siding the 
 target will remain in that position until the switch has made one half of its throw 
 towards the main track position. 
 
 Anv style of lamp or target may be used with these stands. 
 
 A list of the parts \v\\\ be found on the next page. 
 
PLATE 140. 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 ID 
 II 
 
 318 
 
Parts of High and Low Union Stands. 
 
 PLATE 140. 
 
 zU° 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 
 J T 
 
 s H 
 O 
 
 < 
 
 o z 
 z < 
 
 < H 
 
 Ph 
 O 
 
 No. 
 
 r 1- 
 
 ' 2. 
 I 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7, 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 fll. 
 12. 
 
 14. 
 
 [ 15. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 Head. 
 
 Shaft. 
 
 Base. 
 
 Lever C.\stin(;. 
 
 Lever. 
 
 Crank Pin (lj^4"x5"), nuts and cotters ( ^^4" -x 1 ^2"), for switch rod connection. 
 
 Washer, \y^" diameter for No. 6. 
 
 Lock Pin. 
 
 Dowel Pin, 5-3 "x 4", for joining Nos. 4 and 5. 
 
 DnwEL Pin, %" yio-y^" , for joining heads Nos. 1 and 14 to shafts 2 and 13. 
 
 Rivet, i y," ^\-}i" , for joining vanes to target rod No. 12. 
 
 TAR(;E'r Rod. 
 
 Sua IT. 
 
 Head. 
 
 Base. 
 
 319 
 
PLATE 141. 
 
 320 
 
High and Low Automatic Stands. 
 
 PLATE 141. 
 
 IN ORDERING ANY SWITCH STAND QIVE THE THROW OF THE SWITCH. 
 
 T^HE principal merits of this stand are that it is automatic in both positions, 
 
 locks itself and the switch firmly in both positions and, owing to the pecu- 
 liar construction of its parts, is not subject to the wear and subsequent lost motion 
 which are the unfortunate features of most automatic stands. 
 
 In the illustration the handle of the Low Stand is raised preparatory to throw- 
 ing the switch, and the switch rod is shown connected with the stand ; in this 
 position the switch is unlocked. The target in the low stand is movable to make 
 place for the lamp, which much reduces its height. 
 
 On the Hi(,H Stand the handle is lowered and the locking rod projects below 
 the stand, in which position it engages with the casting (Plate 142, No. U), which 
 in practice is fastened to the end of the switch rod. 
 
 Any style of target or lamp can be furnished that is desired. 
 
 The details of the parts will be found on the following page. 
 
 321 
 
PLATE 143. 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 rJ 
 
 M 
 
 23 
 
 1 5 
 
 17 
 
 322 
 
o 
 a 
 
 X 
 
 2 < 
 
 Parts of Automatic Stands. 
 
 PLATE 143. 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. \\\XF. Socket. — In ordering give the shape that is needed to suit the lamps. 
 
 2. Head. 
 
 o. H.VNDEE. 
 
 z ^- -\ 4. Switch Rod. 
 
 5. Locking Rod 
 
 6. Sn.\ET. 
 
 l2 I 7. M.\IX CASTING. 
 
 _■ [' S. Si'KiKi;. 
 
 ^ 9. Lock Casting. 
 
 2 10. Link. 
 
 o J 
 
 i ! 11. Turned Pin, 7/8"x23/g", for the jaw on the switch rods. 
 
 f. \ 12. BoL'i' AND Nut, 3.g"xl3/y", for joining- switch rod and lock casting. 
 
 ^ \ 13. Bolt .and Nut, yi" ^\\\", for handle. 
 
 >.■ f 14. Bolt and Nut, i^"x43^", fo"" lamp-spindle and clamps. 
 
 ° 1.5. La.mi' Spindle. — In ordering give the shape that is wanted. 
 
 5 I 16. Plain Clamp. — To be used with both lamp-spindle and bottom clamp. 
 
 H 
 
 O) 
 
 s : 17 Bottom Clamp. 
 ^ i 18. Switch Rod. 
 19. Ma IX Casting. 
 
 
 20. Handle. 
 
 21. Head. 
 
 22. Lo(TviX(; Rod. 
 V 23. Shaft. 
 
 323 
 
PLATE 143, 
 
 ^msm?. 0; 
 
 C?****'^^-- ^ 
 
 
 '-0 ^ 
 
 324 
 
Various Rigid Switch Stands. 
 
 IN ORDERING SWITCH STANDS GIVE THE THROW OF THE SWITCH. 
 
 PLATE 143. 
 
 Z CO 
 
 w S iJ 
 
 ^ o ^ 
 
 « < o 
 
 5 ■" -, 
 
 ^ § S 
 
 O CJ rJ 
 
 z z 3 
 
 S H PS 
 
 [I] U 
 
 S li W 
 
 S Z 5 
 
 A. TiiKEK Throw "Harp" Switch Stand. 
 
 B. Single Ground Swnou Stand, arranged to operate a single or double slip with 
 
 rigfid froirs. 
 
 C Doui'.i.E Ground Switch Stand, arranged for operating a single or double slip 
 with movable frogs. 
 
 D. SiNCiLE Ground Switch Stand, with adjustable connecting rod. For ordinary 
 
 track work, 
 
 E. Single Ground Switch Stand, for narrow eaucre or very light track work. 
 
 F. Lamp Stand, for use in connection with Figs. A, B, C, D and E. 
 
 G. Bell Crank. I 
 H. T Crank. 
 
 For use in connection with movable frog and slip work. 
 
 No. 
 
 1. 
 
 
 
 ORDER BY PLATE AND NUMBER, 
 
 Various Links, see Ficjs. B and C. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9 
 
 10. 
 11. 
 12. 
 13. 
 14. 
 15. 
 16. 
 17. 
 18. 
 19. 
 20. 
 21. 
 
 Eye Rod, see Fig. B. 
 
 Washer, \}i'\ for No. 10. 
 
 Screw Jaw. ) 
 
 r For Nos. 8 and 9. 
 Jam Nut. ) 
 
 " Various Links, see Figs. C and D. 
 
 Stud, for No. 11. 
 Base. 
 
 Cranks. 
 
 Relating to Figs. G and H. 
 
 Relating to Fig. F. 
 
 Driving Rod. 
 
 Lami' Spindle 
 
 Rocker. 
 
 Brace. 
 
 Bushing. 
 
 Base. 
 
 Bridle Rod. 
 
 Switch Rod. 
 
 Staple, for Nos. 2;'., 24 and 2i 
 
 F'or stub switch ; in ordering give gauge of track and section of rail 
 
 325 
 
No. 
 
 23. 
 
 24. 
 25. 
 26. 
 
 27. 
 
 28. 
 
 2y. 
 
 30. 
 
 31. 
 
 32. 
 
 33. 
 
 34. 
 
 35. 
 
 36. 
 
 37. 
 
 38. 
 
 39. 
 
 40 
 
 41. 
 
 42. 
 
 43. 
 
 44. 
 
 45. 
 
 46. 
 
 VARIOUS RIGID SWITCH STANDS. -(Continued.) 
 
 PLATE 143. 
 
 SwiT<H Lf.vek, for Fies. B and C. i 
 
 * I 
 
 Switch Li:vi:r, for Fio;. D. In orderine grive the throw of the switch. 
 
 o I o o 
 
 Switch Lever, for Fig. E. j 
 
 Stud, for single links on Figs. C, D and E. 
 
 Stud, for double links on Figs. B and C, and for Nos. 28, 29, 30 and 31. 
 
 Base, for Fig. C. 
 
 Base, for Fig. B. 
 
 Base, for Fig. D. 
 
 Base, for Fig. E. 
 
 Tarcet, this may be made of any desired shape. 
 
 Bolt and Nut, for supporting No. 36. 
 
 Hasp. 
 
 Frame. 
 
 Switch Lever. 
 
 Turned Pin, 7^"x23/^", for jaws on Nos. 1, 2, 6 and '.». 
 
 Bolt and Nut, for joining Nos. 17 and 19. 
 
 Hex. Nut, for Nos. 26 and 27. 
 
 Rivet, for fastening No. 32 to No. 36. 
 
 Rivet, for No. 34. 
 
 Rivet, for No. 15. 
 
 Split Cotter, for No. 37. 
 
 Split C(jtter, for Nos. 26, 27 and 33. 
 
 Si'LiT Cotter, for No. 14. 
 
 Washer, for Nos. 26, 27 and 33. 
 
 Relating to Fig. A. 
 
 Railroad Crossing Frogs. 
 
 PLATE 144. 
 
 IN ORDERING FROGS GIVE THE ANGLE, THE GAUGE OF TRACK, THE WEIGHT, SECTION AND PUNCHING 
 
 OF THE RAIL. 
 
 F 
 
 IGURES A, B and C show frogs of different angles and give some idea as to 
 how the joints and connections are made. 
 
 A. Riveted and B(jlted Frog. 
 
 B. Bolted Fr<ig. 
 
 C. Clamped Frog. 
 
 326 
 
PLATE 144. 
 
PLATE 145. 
 
 328 
 
Two Forms of Continuous Rail Crossings. 
 
 PLATE 145. 
 
 IN ORDERING FROGS GIVE THE ANGLE, THE SECTION OF RAIL AND ITS PUNCHING. 
 
 T^HE upper arrangement is known as the "Movable Frog," the lower one as 
 
 the " Fontaine Crossing." 
 
 Although intended to fulfill the same purpose these devices can never sup- 
 plant each other, since the Movable Frog is suited to angles not exceeding 45 
 degrees, and the Fontaine Crossing to angles of not less than 45 degrees. 
 
 As will be seen, the Movable Frog really consists of two switches which 
 work in opposite directions at the same time. 
 
 The Fontaine Crossing is formed of four vertical turrets connected together 
 by heavy rods and enclosed in a strong frame of channel iron. 
 
 Both of these articles reach their highest usetulness in connection with inter- 
 locked signals. 
 
 329 
 
PLATE 146. 
 
 SECTION AB. 
 
 SECTION E F. 
 
 330 
 
Rigid Frogs. 
 
 PLATE 146 
 
 IN ORDERING FROGS GIVE THE ANGLE, THE LENGTH, THE SECTION OF RAIL AND ITS PUNCHING. 
 
 T^HE illustrations given on the opposite page are of the ordinary forms of rigid 
 frogs, which differ from each other only in the method of fastening the several 
 
 rails together. 
 
 These frogs are made of any length and of any section of rail. 
 
 A-B. BuLTED Fro<;. 
 C-D. Clamped pRnG. 
 E-F. Plate Frog. 
 
 33' 
 
PLATE 147. 
 
 33^ 
 
Ordinary Spring Rail Frogs. 
 
 PLATE 147. 
 IN ORDERING FROGS GIVE THE ANGLE, THE LENGTH, THE SECTION OF RAIL AND ITS PUNCHING. 
 
 T^HESE Frogs are constructed according to the common practice, and, altliough 
 not so expensive or substantial as those illustrated on Plate 148, are largely 
 used on railroads which are subjected to a heavy traffic. 
 
 A-F. Bolted Frog. 
 G-K. Clam TED Frog. 
 L-M. Plate Frog. 
 
 333 
 
PLATE 148. 
 
 334 
 
spring Rail Frogs. 
 
 MODEL OF 1893. 
 
 PLATE 148. 
 
 IN ORDERING FROGS, GIVE THE ANGLE, THE LENGTH, THE SECTION OF RAIL AND ITS PUNCHING. 
 
 IN ALL of the frogs shown on this plate the same general plan of construction is 
 followed, the difference being in the method of binding the three fixed rails 
 together. 
 
 It will be observed that the spring rail in these frogs is unusually long, back 
 of the point, and that it is prevented from rising by two boxes instead of by one, 
 as is the common practice. This method of construction we believe to be the 
 best in use. 
 
 A-F. Bolted Spring Rail Frog. 
 G-K. Clamped Spring Rail Frog. 
 X-M. Riveted Spring Rail Fkog. 
 
 335 
 
PLATE 149. 
 
special Forms of Automatic Frogs. 
 
 PLATE 149. 
 IN ORDERING FROGS, GIVE THE ANGLE, THE LENGTH, THE SECTION OF RAIL AND ITS PUNCHING. 
 
 A-D. HiNGEii Fr(>(i. — An experimental frog of this pattern has been for a year in the main 
 track of the Pennsyhania R. R., at a point where it is in almost constant use, and 
 shows practically no wear. It is designed to correct the most glaring faults of 
 the spring rail frog, without too greatly increasing the cost, and we believe that 
 it does so. We are prepared to build this frog of all sizes and weights of rail. 
 
 E-K. 1 HE W(_)Oi) Fr<j(;. — This pattern was conceived many years ago by Mr. Joseph Wood, 
 an engineer (jf the Pennsylvania R. R. It was first used on the Camden & Ambo)' 
 R. R., ha's since been in constant service at many places on the United Railroads 
 of New lersey Division, and is now being extensively used in repairs at many 
 other points on the Pennsylvania R. R. 
 
 This frog differs from all others of an automatic character, in the fact that it has no 
 loose small parts, and that it remains in the position in which it was left by the last train 
 that used it. The last particular ensures its long life, since no matter in which direction the 
 frog is most used it adapts itself to the condition, always furnishing a continuous rail to a 
 train moving in either direction. The point rails are riveted to the main plate ; the wing 
 rails are joined by the straps shown on the plan and the sections ¥. F"-G H, and are free 
 to m_ove when impelled by a wheel llange, which, however, never acts unless the frog is in 
 the wrong position. 
 
 S3 7 
 
PLATE 150. 
 
 SECTION CD. 
 
 k 
 
 338 
 
Simple Split Switches.— Derail. 
 
 PLATE 150. 
 
 IN ORDERING SWITCHES GIVE THE LENGTH, THE GAUGE OF THE TRACK, THE DESIRED THROW, 
 
 THE SECTION OF THE RAIL AND ITS PUNCHING. 
 
 A-B. The Riveted Switch. — This we consider the best form of split switch. There is 
 not a weld anywhere in the arrangement shown, and, except in the adjustable 
 front-rod feature, there need not be a nut. The adjustable front-rod, which is at 
 times provided with a spring, renders it possible to use a switch of a certain 
 width with switch stands of widely varying amounts of throw. The switch may 
 be furnished with or without the adjustment, and either with or without the 
 spring. 
 
 C-D. Man^• railroads continue to use this switch as their standard. Like iieure A-B, the 
 rods are all jointed, while the adjustable front-rod and spring may be used separ- 
 ately, together, or entirely omitted. 
 
 These are only two of the many forms of simple split switches that we build, but they 
 are both good, and to illustrate each varying detail as it is required on different railroads 
 would be an endless task. Suffice it to say that we are prepared to execute with prompt- 
 ness the utmost variety of accurate and careful work. 
 
 Derail. — A derail consists of nothing but one rail of a split switch with a front rod for 
 connecting it with the interlocking mechanism. The derail is usually made 15 
 feet long, and, depending on which side of the track it is placed, is called a right 
 hand or left hand. In ordering give the section and punching of the rail, and 
 state whether it is to be a right or left hand. 
 
 33Q 
 
PLATE 151. 
 
 340 
 
Double and Single Slips. 
 
 PLATE 151. 
 
 IN ORDERINQ SLIPS, GIVE THE DESIRED THROW, THE ANGLE OF THE FROG, THE GAUGE OF THE 
 TRACK, THE WEIGHT, SECTION AND PUNCHING OF THE RAIL. 
 
 "\ 7[ 7K ILLUSTRATE here two forms of Slips, which are extremely convenient 
 for crossover work in main tracks, or at other points where economy in 
 space is of great importance. 
 
 Slips may be arranged to work in connection with frogs varying between and 
 including Nos. 6 and 15; these limits may even be exceeded, but experience has 
 proved that it is not advisable: for passenger trafhc, slips in connection with 
 a No. 8 Movable Frog (Plate 145) are found to be entirely reliable. 
 
 On Plate 151 the double slip is shown in connection with a movable frog 
 and the single slip with a rigid frog, but it is to be understood that either slip 
 ma)' be joined with eithei" trog. 
 
 The switch stands and connecting rods for operating slips are shown on 
 Plate 148. 
 
 341 
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 
 
Table of Contents, 
 
 Page. 
 
 PART I. — Mp:chanical Interlocking and Signaling 
 
 Devices, ....... 6 
 
 PART II. — Electric and Electro-Pneumatic Devices, 140 
 
 PART III. — Switch Stands, Switches and Fro(;s 
 
 (no Table of Contents), .... 316 to 341 
 
Alphabetical Index. 
 
 Adjustment Devices for PirE and Wire, 
 
 Appliances for Condensing Moisture, Electro-Pneumatic System, 
 
 Arresters, Lightning, and Circuit Controllers, 
 
 Automatic PjLOCk Signaling, General Description of. 
 
 Automatic Block Signals, 
 
 Automatic Bridge Coupler, 
 
 Automatic Engine, ..... 
 
 Automatic Frogs, Spring Rail, 
 
 Automatic Frogs, Special For.ms of, 
 
 Automatic Switch Stands, High and Low 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 8(; and 87 
 
 104 and 105 
 
 :iS(:< to 200 
 
 230 to 234 
 
 178, 238, 241 
 
 GO and 01 
 
 202 and 203 
 
 332 and 334 
 
 33t; and 337 
 
 320 to 323 
 
 Banner, Target and Disc Signals, Union Electric, 
 
 Bars, Detector, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Bars, Detector, Mechanical, .... 
 
 Batteries, Gravity, ...... 
 
 Batteries, Storage and Governing ])evices, 
 
 Battery Housings and Relay Box, 
 
 Bell Cranks, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Bell Cranks for Switch \\'ork, .... 
 
 Bell Cranks, Mechanical, ..... 
 
 Block and Lock System, The L'nion, Description of 
 Block Instrument, The LTnion, .... 
 
 Block, Scotch, ........ 
 
 Block Signaling, General Description of Automatic 
 
 Block Signals, ]MSchanical Station, 
 
 Block Signal Stands, ..... 
 
 Bolt Locks, Facing Pijint and Bridge Locks 
 
 Bolts and Lag Screws, 
 
 Box, Relay and Battery Housings, 
 
 Brace, Rail, ..... 
 
 Bracket Post, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Bracket Post, ^Iechanical, 
 
 Bridge Coupler, Auto.matic, 
 
 Bridge Coupler, Multiple, 
 
 Bridge Lock, Facing Point and Bolt Locks, 
 
 Burners, Lenses and Lamps, .... 
 
 238 to 248 
 
 164 to 170 
 
 52 to 54 
 
 23G and 237 
 
 106 and 107 
 
 234 and 235 
 
 166 to 170 
 
 324 to 826 
 
 64 to 68 
 
 250 to 253 
 
 250 to 257 
 
 62 and 63 
 
 230 to 234 
 
 98 and 90 
 
 06 and 07 
 
 40 to 46 
 
 82 to 84 
 
 234 and 235 
 
 52 and 166 
 
 178 and 179 
 
 106 and 107 
 
 60 and 61 
 
 56 to 59 
 
 40 to 46 
 
 130 to 133 
 
 Cabins for Interlocking Machines, 
 
 Cabin Selector, ...... 
 
 Carriers for Pipe and Wire, .... 
 
 Chain Wheels, ....... 
 
 Chicago & Northwestern Railway Signals, 
 
 Chutes and ^VELLS fur ISattekies, Relay Brjx, 
 
 Circuit Breakers, Automatic, for Switches and Signals, 
 
 Circuit Breakers, for Electro-Pneumatic Signal Cylinder, 
 
 Circuit Controllers (Manual) and Lightning Arresters, 
 
 Circuit, Track, Parts Relating to 
 
 Clips, Rail, fur Electro-T'nfu.matic Detector Bars, 
 Clips, Rail, for Mechanical FJetector Bars, 
 
 134 to 137 
 
 36 to 38 
 
 78 to 80 
 
 02 to 95 
 
 102 and 110 
 
 234 and 235 
 
 224 to 226 
 
 176 and 177 
 
 286 to 200 
 
 236 and 237 
 
 166 to 160 
 
 52 to 54 
 
 345 
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX. (Continued.) 
 
 Compensator Foundation, 
 
 Compensators for Pipe and Wire, 
 
 Condensing Appliances for Electro- Pneumatic System 
 
 CoNDuCTiNo Wires, Electric, 
 
 Connecting and Track Wires, .... 
 
 Coupler, Automatic Bridge, 
 
 Coupler, Multiple Bridge, ... 
 
 Crank Foundation, ....... 
 
 Cranks for Electro-Pneumatic Interlockin(;, 
 Cranks for Mechanical Interlocking, 
 
 Cranks for Switch Work, 
 
 Crossing Frogs, Continuous Rail (Fontaine and M(ivai!le), 
 Crossing Frogs, Ordinary Railroad, ..... 
 Cylinder and Signal Valve, Electrii-Pneumatic, 
 Cylinder and Switch Valve, Electro-Pneumatic, Direct-Acting 
 Cylinder and Switch Valve, Electro-Pneumatic Lnterlockin 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 70 to 72 
 
 194 and 195 
 
 232 and 223 
 
 236 and 237 
 
 60 and 61 
 
 56 to 59 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 166 to 170 
 
 64 to 68 
 
 ;124 to 326 
 
 328 and 329 
 
 326 and 327 
 
 172 to 175 
 
 192 and 103 
 
 156 to 102 
 
 Deflecting Rods, .......... 
 
 Derail and Split S\vitches, ........ 
 
 Descriping Instrument, The Train, ...... 
 
 Detector Bars, Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking, 
 
 Detector Bars, j\[echanical Interlocking, .... 
 
 Direct-Acting Electro-Pneu.matic Switch A'alye and Cylinder, 
 
 Disc, I!anner and Target Signals, Union, . 
 
 Disc Indicators (for use in cabin), 
 
 Double and Single Slip Switches, 
 
 Double Ground Le\-er Interlocking Machine, 
 
 DrjUBLE and ^^'lDE JawS, .... 
 
 Double Point Relays, ..... 
 
 Double Point Switch and Lock Mcivement, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Double Point Switch and Lock Movement, Mechanical, . 
 
 Drop Indicator (for use in cabin), . 
 
 Dust Proof RELA^'S, .... 
 
 Dwarf Signal Foundation, 
 
 Dwarf Signal, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Dwarf Signals, ^Fechanical, . 
 
 Dyna;.io for Charging Storage Batteries, ^\'estinghouse. 
 
 204, 
 
 68 and 09 
 
 338 and 339 
 
 306 to 311 
 
 104 to 170 
 
 52 to 54 
 
 102 and 103 
 
 238 to 248 
 
 290 to 301 
 
 340 and 341 
 
 20 and 27 
 
 70 and 77 
 
 274 and 282 
 
 ICil to 171 
 
 48 to 51 
 
 204 to 2'.)C 
 
 74, 278 and 282 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 182 to 184 
 
 122 to 127 
 
 198 and 199 
 
 Electric Banner, Target and Disc Signals, The Union, 
 
 Electric Block Instruments, The Union, ....... 
 
 Electric Lock for Stevens Interlocking Machine, ..... 
 
 Electric Lock, The LInion, for Sa.xby «S; Farmer Interlocking Machine 
 Electric Signaling, Patents Relating to, ..... 
 
 Electric Slot, ............ 
 
 Electric Switches for Changing Direction of Current, 
 Electric Testing Instruments, ........ 
 
 Electric Wires for Conducting Current, ...... 
 
 Electric Work, Special Tools for, ....... 
 
 Electro-Pneumatic ])ouble Point Switch and Lock Movement, 
 Electro-Pneumatic Dwarf Signal, ....... 
 
 Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking jMachine, ..... 
 
 Electro-Pneumatic, Patents Relating to, ..... 
 
 Electro-Pneumatic Pipe Fittings, . . . ' . 
 
 
 238 to 2 48 
 
 250 to 257 
 
 262 and 203 
 
 250 to 253, 258 to 260 
 
 217 and 201 
 
 
 214 to 210 
 
 
 200 and 201 
 
 
 220 and 221 
 
 
 222 and 223 
 
 
 218 to 220 
 
 
 164 to 171 
 
 
 182 to 184 
 
 
 142 to 155 
 
 
 163 
 
 
 204 and 205 
 
 346 
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.— (Continued.) 
 
 Electro-Pneumatic Push-Button Machine, ..... 
 
 Electro-Pneumatic Semaphore Signals, ..... 
 
 Electro-Pneumatic Signal \'alve and Cylinder, 
 Electro-Pneumatic Signal Cylinder, Circuit 1!reaker for, 
 Electro-Pneumatic Slot, ........ 
 
 PjLectro-Pneumatic Switch Cylinder and Valve, Direct-Acting, 
 Electro-Pneumatic Switch Cylinder and Val\'e, Interlocking, 
 Electro-Pneumatic Switch Lock for I-!lock Signal S\'stfm, 
 Electro-Pneumatic System, Condensing Appliances for, 
 Electro-Pneumatic System, Special Tools for. 
 Engine, Westinghouse Autiim.atic, ..... 
 
 Eyes, \Vire, ......... 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 180 to 190 
 178 to 185 
 ir-.' to 175 
 
 176 and 177 
 310 to 212 
 
 102 and 10.3 
 156 to 162 
 206 to 208 
 
 194 and 195 
 21S to 220 
 
 202 and 203 
 82 to 84 
 
 Facin(; Point Lijcks, Briih;e ,\nd Bolt Locks, 
 Fittings, ELECTRO-PNEUiMATic Main Line Semaphores 
 Fittings, Illuminated Semaphore, 
 Fittings, Mechanical Main Line Semaphores, 
 Fittings, Pipe, Electro-Pneumatic System, . 
 Fontaine Crossing and Movable Frog, 
 Foundation Bolts, ....... 
 
 Foundations, A'arious, ...... 
 
 Frogs, Automatic, Special Forms, 
 
 Frogs, Crossing, Continuous Rail (Fontaine and Movapl 
 
 Frogs, Crossing, Ordinary Railroad, 
 
 Frogs, Single Rigid, ...... 
 
 Frogs, Spring Rail, Model of 1893, 
 
 Frogs, Spring R.^il, Ordinary, .... 
 
 Fuse Shunt Relay, Three Point, .... 
 
 40 to 46 
 180 and 181 
 120 and 121 
 
 108 to 118 
 
 204 and 205 
 
 328 and 329 
 
 82 to 84 
 
 74 and 75 
 336 and 337 
 328 and 329 
 326 and 327 
 330 and 331 
 334 and 335 
 332 anil 333 
 
 282 to 284 
 
 Gear, Hook, Selector, ..... 
 
 Generator, AV^estinghouse Electric, 
 Governing IIevices and Storage Batteries, 
 Gra\tty Battery, ....... 
 
 Ground Lever, Double Interlocking, . 
 Ground Lever, Triple Interlocking, . 
 Ground Lever Switch Stand, . . . . 
 
 Guide and Stake for Pipe (Electro-Pneumatic), 
 
 34 and 35 
 
 198 and 199 
 
 196 and 197 
 
 236 and 237 
 
 20 and 27 
 
 24 and 25 
 
 324 to 326 
 
 228 and 229 
 
 Harp Three-Throw Switch Stand, 
 High and Low Automatic Switch Stands, 
 High and Low Union Switch Stands, . 
 Hook Gear Selector, . . ■ • 
 
 324 to 326 
 
 320 to 323 
 
 316 to 319 
 
 34 and 35 
 
 Illuminated Semaphore, 
 
 Indicator, Dprip (for use in cabin), 
 
 Indicators, Disc (for use in cabin), 
 
 Indicators, Dwarf Signal with, 
 
 Indicators, Semaphore (for use in cabm), 
 
 Indicators, Main Line Signals with, . 
 
 Instrument, Multiple Push-Button, 
 
 Instruments, Views of in cabin, Pennsylvania Railroad, 
 
 120 and 121 
 
 294 to 296 
 
 290 to 301 
 
 122 to 126 
 
 300 to 305 
 
 104 and 116 
 
 292 and 293 
 
 277 
 
 347 
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.— (Continued.) 
 
 Instrument, The Track, ..... 
 
 Instrument, Train Describing, 
 Instruments, Electric Testing, 
 Instrument, Union Block, .... 
 
 Interlocking Machine, Double Ground Lever, 
 Interlocking jNIachine, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 Interlocking )»Iachine, Saxby & Farmer, Improved, 
 Interlocking Machine, Stevens, .... 
 
 Interlocking Machine, Triple Ground Lever, 
 Interlocking Machines, Views of, . 
 Interlocking Relays, ...... 
 
 Iron Post Main Line Signals, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 Iron Post Main Line Signals, Mechanical, 
 
 10, 20, 24, 26, 
 
 142, 
 
 page. 
 
 312 and 313 
 300 to 311 
 220 and 221 
 250 to 257 
 26 and 27 
 142 to 155 
 8 to 18 
 20 to 23 
 24 and 25 
 147, 151 and 285 
 266 to 272 
 185 
 116 to 118 
 
 Jaws, Various, 
 
 Jaws, Wide and Double, 
 
 88 and 89 
 76 and 77 
 
 Lag Screws and Bolts, ..... 
 
 Lamps for Signals and Switch Stands, 
 Lenses and Burners, ..... 
 
 Lightning Arresters and Circuit Controllers, 
 Link, Split, ....... 
 
 Lock and Block System, The LTnion, Description of, ..... 
 
 Lock, Electric, The Union, for Saxby & Farmer Interlocking Machine, 
 Lock, Electric, for Stevens Interlocking Machine, .... 
 
 Locks, Facing Point, Bridge and Bolt, 
 
 Lock, Switch, for Electro-Pneumatic Block Signal System, 
 
 Low and High Automatic Switch Stands, 
 
 Low and High Union Switch Stands, 
 
 Lugs for Pipe and Wire, 
 
 250 to 
 
 82 to 84 
 
 130 and 131 
 
 132 and 133 
 
 286 to 200 
 
 82 to 84 
 
 250 to 253 
 
 253, 258 to 260 
 
 262 and 263 
 
 40 to 40 
 
 206 to 208 
 
 320 to 323 
 
 316 to 319 
 
 76 and 77 
 
 Machine, Double Ground Lever, Interlocking, 
 
 Machine, Electro-Pneumatic, Interlocking, 
 
 Machine, Electro-Pneu.matic, Push-Button, 
 
 Machine, Saxby & Farmer I.mproved Interlocking, 
 
 Machines, Interlocking, Views of, . 
 
 Machine, Stevens Interlocking, ...... 
 
 Machine, Triple Ground Lever, Interlocking, 
 Mechanical Signaling Patents, ...... 
 
 Mechanical Slot, ......... 
 
 Movable Frog and Fontaine Crossing, .... 
 
 Movement, Double Point Switch and Lock, Electro-Pneumatic 
 Movement, Double Point Switch and Lock, Mechanical, 
 Multiple Bridge Coupler, ....... 
 
 Multiple Push-Button Instrument, ..... 
 
 10, 
 
 20, 24, 26, 
 
 142, 
 
 26 and 27 
 142 to 155 
 186 to 190 
 8 to 18 
 147, 151 and 285 
 20 to 23 
 24 and 25 
 19 and 39 
 90 and 91 
 328 and 329 
 164 to 171 
 48 to 51 
 56 to 59 
 292 and 293 
 
 One Point Relays, 
 
 !74 and 278 
 
 Patents Relating to Electric Signaling, . 
 Patents Relatlng to Electro-Pneumatic System, 
 
 217 and 261 
 163 
 
 348 
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.- (Continued.) 
 
 Patents Relating to Mechanical Signaling, 
 Pennsylvania Lines West of Pittsburg, Main Line Signals, 
 Pipe and Wire, Adjustment Devices For, 
 Pipe and Wire Carriers, ...... 
 
 Pipe and Wire CoiiPENSATORS, .... 
 
 Pipe and Wire I>ugs, ...... 
 
 Pipe and Wire, Parts Relating to (Mechanical) 
 
 Pipe and Wire, Trunking for Electric and Electro-Pneujiatic, 
 
 Pipe Carrier Foundation, .... 
 
 Pipe Compensator Foundation, 
 Pipe, Electro-Pneumatic, Stake and Guide for. 
 Pipe Fittings, Electro-Pneumatic System, 
 Pipe Selector, ....... 
 
 Plans of Tracks and Signals, 
 
 Pneumatic, ....... 
 
 Pot Signals ( Mechanical ),.... 
 
 Push-Button Instrument, Multiple, 
 Push-Button Machine, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 l!i and 39 
 
 08, 100 and 110 
 
 80 and 87 
 
 78 to 80 
 
 70 to 72 
 
 70 and 77 
 
 83 to 84 
 
 228 and 229 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 228 and 229 
 
 204 and 205 
 
 32 and 33 
 
 73, 119, 240, 281 and 291 
 
 See Electro-Pneumatic. 
 
 128 and 129 
 
 292 and 203 
 
 180 to 190 
 
 Rail Br.\ce, ... .... 
 
 Rail Clip for Electro-Pneumatic Detector Bars, 
 
 Rail Clip for Mechanical Detector Bar, 
 
 Rail Lock for Bridges, 
 
 Railroad Crossing Frogs, Movable, 
 
 Railro-\d Crossing Frogs, Ordinary, 
 
 Relay Bcix and Battery Housings, 
 
 Relay, Fuse Shunt, 
 
 Relays, Dust-Proof, 
 
 Relays, Interlocking, 
 
 Relays, One Point, 
 
 Relays, Sealed Base, 
 
 Relays, Three Point, 
 
 Relays, Two Point, 
 
 Resistance Coil, 
 
 Rigid Frogs, 
 
 Rigid Switch Stands, Various, 
 
 Rocking Shafts and Cranks, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Rocking Shafts and Cranks, Mechanical, 
 
 Rods, Deflecting, ..... 
 
 52 
 
 264, 
 
 54, 166 and 168 
 
 166 and 168 
 
 52 to 54 
 
 40 to 46 
 
 328 and 329 
 
 326 and 327 
 
 234 and 235 
 
 282 
 
 274, 278 and 283 
 
 266 to 272 
 
 274 and 278 
 
 274 to 276 
 
 204 and 282 
 
 274 and 282 
 
 196 and 197 
 
 330 and 331 
 
 324 to 326 
 
 166 to 169 
 
 64 to 68 
 
 68 and 69 
 
 Saxp.y & Farmer Improved Interlocking Machine, 
 
 Scotch Block, 
 
 Screws, Lag, and Bolts, 
 
 Sealed Base Relays, 
 
 Selector, Cabin Wire, 
 
 Selector, Foundation, 
 
 Selector, Hook Gear, 
 
 Selector, Pipe, 
 
 Selector, Standard AVire, 
 
 Semaphore Castings, Main Line, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Semaphore Castings, Main Line, Mechanical, 
 
 Semaphore, Illuminated, 
 
 108, 
 
 8 to 18 
 
 62 and 63 
 
 82 to 84 
 
 274 to 276 
 
 36 to 38 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 34 and 35 
 
 32 and 33 
 
 28 to 31 
 
 180 and 181 
 
 110 and 116 
 
 120 and 121 
 
 349 
 
15, -tS, 55, 81, 85 
 
 RG, 
 
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX.— (Continued.) 
 
 Semaphore In'dicaturs (for use in cabin), .... 
 
 Se-MAI'hore Post Fittings, Main Li.\'e, Elkctro-Pneujiatic, 
 Semaphore Post Fittings, Main Line, Mechanical, 
 Semaphore Post with Indicators, Main Line, 
 Shackles, Wire, ....... 
 
 Shunt Relay, P'use, ....... 
 
 Shafts, Rocking, and Cranks, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 Shafts, Rocking, and Cranks, Mechanical, 
 Signal and Switch Automatic Circuit Breakers, 
 Signal and Switch Lamps, ..... 
 
 Signal Cylinder Circuit Breakers, Electro-Pneumati 
 
 Signals and Tracks, Plans of, . . . 
 
 Signals and Tracks, Views of, 
 
 Signaling, Automatic Block, Description of. 
 
 Signals, Block, Automatic, Electric Banner, Target and Disc, 
 
 Signals, Block, Mechanical Station, 
 
 Signals, Bracket Post, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Signals, Bracket Post, Mechanical, 
 
 Signals, Dwarf, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Signals, Dwarf, Mechanical, .... 
 
 Signals, Iron Post, }iIain Line, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Signals, Iron Post, ?>[ain Line, ^Mechanical, 
 
 Signals, Main Line, Chicago & Northwestern Railway, 
 
 Signals, Main Line, Ordinary Mechanical, 
 
 Signals, ]Main Line, Pennsylvania Lines West of Pittsbuj 
 
 Signals, Pot, Mechanical, ...... 
 
 Signals, The LTnion Electric Banner, Target and Disc, 
 
 Signal Valve and Cylinder, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Signal Wire, Mechanical Interlocking, 
 
 Single Point Relays, 
 
 Slip Switches, Single and Double, 
 
 Slot, Electric, . 
 
 Slot, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Slot, Mechanical, 
 
 Split Link, .... 
 
 Split Switches and Derail, 
 
 Spring Rail Frogs, Model of 18'.i3, 
 
 Spring Rail Frogs, Ordinary, 
 
 Stake and Guide for Pipe, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 Stake for Wire Carriers, Mechanical, 
 
 Standard Wire Selector, ..... 
 
 Stands for Operating Block Signals, Mechanical, 
 
 Stands, Switch, High and Low Automatic, 
 
 Stands, Switch, High and Low Union, 
 
 Stands, Switch, Various Rigid, 
 
 Station Block Signals, Mechanical, 
 
 Stevens Interlocking Machine, 
 
 Stevens Interlocking Machine, Electric Lock for, 
 
 Storage Batteries and Governing Devices, 
 
 Switch and Lock Movement, Double Point, Electro-Pneuma' 
 
 Switch and Lock Movement, Double Point, Mechanical, 
 
 Switch and Signal, Automatic Circuit Breakers, 
 
 Switch and Signal Lamps, 
 
 Switch Cylinder and Valve, Direct-Acting, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 Switch Cylinder and Valve, Interlocking, Electro-Pneumatic, 
 
 ic, 
 
 115 
 
 i7, rs, 
 
 159, 101, 
 
 119, 
 209, 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 yoo to 305 
 
 180 and 181 
 
 112 and 116 
 
 104 and 116 
 
 82 to 84 
 
 382 to 284 
 
 166 to 169 
 
 64 to 68 
 
 224 to 226 
 
 130 and 131 
 
 176 and 177 
 
 249, 281 and 291 
 
 213, 227 and 273 
 
 230 to 234 
 
 238 to 248 
 
 98 and 99 
 
 178 and 179 
 
 106 and 107 
 
 182 to 184 
 
 122 to 127 
 
 185 
 
 116 to 118 
 
 102 and 1 10 
 
 104 and 105 
 
 98, 100 and 110 
 
 128 and 129 
 
 238 to 248 
 
 172 to 175 
 
 82 and S3 
 
 274 and 278 
 
 340 and 341 
 
 214 to 216 
 
 210 to 212 
 
 90 and 91 
 
 82 and 83 
 
 338 and 339 
 
 334 and 335 
 
 332 and 333 
 
 228 and 229 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 28 to 31 
 
 96 and 97 
 
 320 to 323 
 
 316 to 319 
 
 324 to 326 
 
 98 and 99 
 
 20 to 23 
 
 202 and 263 
 
 196 and 197 
 
 164 to 171 
 
 48 to 51 
 
 224 to 220 
 
 130 and 131 
 
 192 and 193 
 
 156 to 162 
 
 350 
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX. -(Continued.) 
 
 Switches for Cmanoing Direction of Electric Current, 
 
 Switch Lock for Electro-Pneumatic Blmck Signal System, 
 
 Switch Stands, High and Low Automatic, 
 
 Switch Stands, High and Low Union, 
 
 Switch Stands, Various Rigid, ... 
 
 Switches, Slip, Douijle and Single, 
 
 Switches, Split, and Derail, .... 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 200 and 201 
 
 206 and 208 
 
 320 to 323 
 
 316 to 319 
 
 324 to 320 
 
 340 and 341 
 
 338 and 339 
 
 Target, Banner and Disc Signals, IInion Electric, 
 Testing Instruments, Electric, .... 
 
 Three Point Relays, ...... 
 
 Three-Throw Switch Stand, Hari', 
 
 Tools for Electric and Electro-Pneumatic Work, 
 
 Towers F(.)r Interlocking Machines, 
 
 Track and Connecting \\'ires, ) 
 
 Track Circuit, Parts Relaitnt; to, ^ ' 
 
 Track Instrument, ....... 
 
 Tracks and Signals, Plans of, .... 
 
 Tracks .and Signals, A^iews of, ..... lo, 43 
 
 Train Descriling Instrument, .... 
 
 Triple Ground Le\"er Interlocking ^Machine, 
 
 Trunking for Pipe and Wire, Electric and Electro-Pneumat 
 
 Two Point Relays, ....... 
 
 55, 81, 85 
 
 , 115 
 
 238 and 248 
 
 220 and 221 
 
 264 and 282 
 
 324 to 326 
 
 218 to 220 
 
 134 to 137 
 
 236 and 237 
 
 
 
 312 and 313 
 
 47, 73, 119, 
 
 249, 
 
 281 and 291 
 
 159, 191, 209, 
 
 213, 
 
 227 and 273 
 306 to 311 
 
 24 and 25 
 
 228 and 229 
 274 and 282 
 
 Union Block Instrujient, ......... 
 
 L'niijn Electric Banner, Target and Disc Si(.;nals, . . . . 
 
 LInpjn Ellc'I'ric Lock for Saxbv &: Far.mer Interlocking Machine, 
 LTnion Lt)ck and Block System, Descrip'iton of, . . . . . 
 
 LTnion Switch Stands, High and Low, ...... 
 
 250 to 257 
 238 to 248 
 250 to 253, 258 to 260 
 250 to 253 
 316 to 319 
 
 Views of Electric Instrujients in Cap.in, 
 Views of In'terlockini:; jSIachines, . 
 Views of Tracks and Signals, 
 
 . . . 277 
 
 8, 10, 20, 24, 26, 142, 147, 151 and 285 
 15, 43, 55, 81, 85, 115, 159, 191, 209, 213, 227 and 273 
 
 Well and Chutes for P!atteries. Relav H 
 
 Westinghouse Automatic Engine, 
 
 Westinghouse Electric Generator 
 
 Wheel Foundation, . 
 
 Wheels for Chain, 
 
 Wide and Double Jaws, . 
 
 Wire and Pipe, Adjustments for. 
 
 Wire and Pipe Carriers, . 
 
 Wire and Pipe Compensators, . 
 
 Wire and Pipe Lugs, 
 
 Wire and Pipe, Parts Relating to 
 
 Wire and Pipe, Trunking for. Electric 
 
 Wire Carrier Stake, 
 
 Wire Eyes, . . ■ ■ 
 
 Wire for Mechanical Signals, 
 
 Wires, Electric Conducting, . 
 
 Wire Selector, Standard, 
 
 Wire Shackles, 
 
 Wires, Track and Connecting, 
 
 Electr 
 
 -Pne 
 
 234 and 235 
 
 202 and 203 
 
 198 and 199 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 92 to 95 
 
 76 and 77 
 
 86 and 87 
 
 78 to 80 
 
 70 to 72 
 
 76 and 77 
 
 82 to 84 
 
 228 and 239 
 
 74 and 75 
 
 82 and 83 
 
 82 and 83 
 
 222 and 223 
 
 28 to 31 
 
 82 and 83 
 
 236 and 237 
 
 the end. 
 
 351 
 
^\ 
 
 ^i^'^^ 
 
 .-■^ 
 
 .ys^r^'i 
 
 «s»S^